Ford 2013 F 250 Owners Manual

: Ford Ford-2013-Ford-F-250-Owners-Manual-815476 ford-2013-ford-f-250-owners-manual-815476 ford pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 577

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2013 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual

2013 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual

fordowner.com

ford.ca

DC3J 19A321 AA

|

March 2013

|

Third Printing

|

Owner’s Manual

|

Super Duty

|

Litho in U.S.A.

Table of Contents

1

Introduction

9

Child Safety
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seat positioning . . . . .
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing child safety seats .
Child safety locks . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

18
.20
.20
.22
.25
.35

Safety Belts
Fastening the safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime .
Safety belt-minder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

36
.38
.42
.43
.43
.45

Supplementary Restraints System
Driver and passenger airbags . . . .
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety canopy curtain airbags . . . .
Crash sensors and airbag indicator
Airbag disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

46
.48
.56
.57
.59
.60

.
.
.
.

61
.61
.62
.62
.66

.
.
.
.
.
.

67
.67
.68
.69
.70
.70
.71

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

Keys and Remote Control
General information on radio frequencies.
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a lost key or remote control. . .
MyKey
Settings, MyKey . . . . . .
Creating. . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . .
System status. . . . . . . .
Remote start, MyKey . .
Troubleshooting, MyKey

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2

Table of Contents

Locks
72
Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
SecuriCode™ keyless entry keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Security
77
SecuriLock® passive anti-theft system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Steering Wheel
80
Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Pedals
83
Adjustable pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Wipers and Washers
84
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Lighting
Lighting control . . . . . . . . .
Autolamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument lighting dimmer.
Daytime running lamps . . . .
Front fog lamps . . . . . . . . .
Direction indicators . . . . . .
Interior lamps . . . . . . . . . .
Windows and Mirrors
Power windows . . . .
Exterior mirrors . . . .
Interior mirrors . . . .
Sun visors . . . . . . . .
Moonroof . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

85
.85
.86
.87
.87
.88
.88
.89

.
.
.
.
.

90
.90
.92
.94
.95
.96

Table of Contents

3

Instrument Cluster
97
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Warning lamps and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Audible warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Information Displays
104
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Information messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Audio System
AM/FM stereo. . . . . . . . . .
AM/FM/CD with SYNC . . .
Auxiliary input jack . . . . .
USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite radio information .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

134
.136
.137
.141
.142
.143

Climate Control
146
Manual heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Dual automatic temperature control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Seats
Sitting in the correct position
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . .
Manual seats . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory function . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated and cooled seats . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

154
.154
.155
.157
.159
.160
.161
.165

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
168
Car2U® home automation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
HomeLink® wireless control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

4

Table of Contents

Auxiliary Power Points

178

Storage Compartments
181
Overhead console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Starting and Stopping the Engine
182
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Fuel and Refueling
188
Fuel quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Transmission
199
Transmission operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Hill start assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
209
Four wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Brakes
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hints on driving with anti-lock brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

223
.223
.224
.224

Traction Control
225
Traction Control™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Stability Control
227
AdvanceTrac® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Terrain Response
230
Hill descent control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Parking Aids
232
Sensing system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Rear-view camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Table of Contents

5

Cruise Control

238

Driving Aids

240

Load Carrying
241
Vehicle loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Towing
Trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer brake controller-integrated .
Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational towing . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

253
.253
.259
.266
.268

Driving Hints
269
Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Roadside Emergencies
Getting roadside assistance .
Hazard flasher control. . . . .
Fuel cut-off switch . . . . . . .
Jump-starting the vehicle . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

276
.276
.278
.278
.279

Customer Assistance
282
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Fuses
290
Changing a fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Fuse specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Upfitter controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

6

Table of Contents

Maintenance
General information . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing the hood . . . .
Under hood overview . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant check . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission fluid check
Brake fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering fluid check . . . . . .
Fuel filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the vehicle battery . . . . .
Checking the wiper blades . . . . . .
Air filter(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the headlamps . . . . . . . .
Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb specification chart. . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

302
.302
.303
.304
.306
.306
.307
.313
.317
.317
.317
.318
.318
.321
.323
.325
.326
.331

Vehicle Care
Cleaning products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repairing minor paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the windows and wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens
Cleaning the alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

332
.332
.332
.334
.334
.334
.335
.335
.336
.340
.340

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Table of Contents
Wheels and Tires
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a road wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel lug nut torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities and Specifications
Engine specifications . . . . . . .
Engine drivebelt . . . . . . . . . . .
Part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle identification number .
Vehicle certification label . . . .
Transmission code designation.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

343
.345
.364
.371
.387
.387

.
.
.
.
.
.

389
.389
.389
.395
.395
.396
.397

Accessories
398
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Ford Extended Service Plan

400

Scheduled Maintenance
403
Normal scheduled maintenance and log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
SYNC®
420
Pairing your phone for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
911 Assist™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Vehicle Health Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

8

Table of Contents

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Privacy Information . . . . . . . .
Voice recognition . . . . . . . . . .
Listening to music . . . . . . . . .
Phone features . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information Menu . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate features . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation system. . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

466
.472
.472
.478
.500
.508
.520
.534
.537

Appendices

549

Index

569

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to
print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change
specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No
part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our
written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2013

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Introduction

9

ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time
to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you
know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when
using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle.
Note: This manual describes a range of product features and options,
sometimes before they are generally available. Therefore, you may find
options in this manual that are not found on your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different
models, so they may appear different than your vehicle. However, the
essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable
laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral
part of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or
right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat.
A. Right-hand side
A
B. Left-hand side

B
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

10

Introduction

SYMBOL GLOSSARY
WARNING: You risk death or serious injury to yourself and
others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol.
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Symbol Description
Safety alert

Avoid
smoking,
flames, or
sparks
Brake fluid –
non
petroleum
base
Check fuel
cap

Symbol Description
See Owner’s
Manual
Battery

Symbol Description
Anti-lock
braking
system
Battery acid

Brake system

Cabin air
filter

Child seat
lower anchor

Child seat
tether anchor

Child Safety
Door Lock
and Unlock
Cruise
control

Engine air
filter

Engine
coolant

Engine oil

Explosive gas

Engine
coolant
temperature
Fan warning

Fasten safety
belt

Front airbag

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Do not open
when hot

Front fog
lamps

Introduction
Symbol Description
Fuel pump
reset
Heated rear
window

Lighting
control
Panic alarm

Power
steering fluid

Service
engine soon
Windshield
defrost and
demist

11

Symbol Description
Symbol Description
Fuse
Hazard
compartment
warning
flasher
Interior
Jack
luggage
compartment
release
Low tire
Maintain
pressure
correct fluid
warning
level
Parking aid
Parking
system
brake system
Power
windows
front and
rear
Side airbag

Windshield
washer and
wiper

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Power
window
lockout
Stability
control

12

Introduction

DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. Additionally, when your vehicle is in for service or repair,
Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities
may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC® Vehicle
Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also
be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used for any
purpose. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal;
• How fast the vehicle was travelling;
• Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Introduction

13

Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data or information
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see
limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, Directions and
Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data recorder information without
obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or where
required by law enforcement, other government authorities or
other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event
Data Recorders applies to SYNC® or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash
involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates
to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically
or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911
operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate
the 911 Assist feature. See your SYNC® chapter for more
information.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

14

Introduction

Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do
not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not
activate the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses
to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle
travel information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC® chapter
for more information.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING: Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle
components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Note: Certain components in your vehicle, such as airbag modules,
safety belt pretensioners, and remote control batteries, may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
more information.
FORD CREDIT (U.S. ONLY)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you
acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through
Ford Credit, thank you for your business.
For your convenience, we offer a number of ways to contact us, as well
as help manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit, as well as access to
Account Manager, please go to www.fordcredit.com.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Introduction

15

REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts.
We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft
parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair.
You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking
for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years
of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using
parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this owner’s manual.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do
happen. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent
requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and
dent resistance. During vehicle development, we validate that these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine
Ford replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only
replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused
to your vehicle as a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For additional information, see the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered
by your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the warranty
information that is provided to you along with your owner’s manual.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

16

Introduction

Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the Supplementary Restraints System
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
For more information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a
snowplow, refer to the Snowplow section in the Driving Hints chapter.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it may be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges ambulance
manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s Layout Book and the
Qualified Vehicle Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as pertinent
supplements. For additional information, please contact the Truck Body
Builders Advisory Service at http://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/ and
then by selecting “Contact Us” or by phone at 1–877–840–4338.
Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance, without the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited
Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties. In addition, ambulance
usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which
could lead to fires.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it will be indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label is located on the driver’s side door pillar or on the rear
edge of the driver’s door. You can determine whether the ambulance
manufacturer followed Ford’s recommendations by directly contacting
that manufacturer. Ford Ambulance Preparation Package is only available
on certain Diesel engine equipped vehicles.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Introduction

17

Using your vehicle as a stationary power source (PTO)
Refer to the Driving Hints chapter for more information and guidelines
for operating a vehicle equipped with an aftermarket power take-off
system.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
you must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and
security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations.
Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this owner’s manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
owner’s manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. See this owner’s manual for all other required
information and warnings.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

18

Child Safety

GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a
device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child
safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure
to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford recommends
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
(CPST) and consulting your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is
appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and properly installed
in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST, contact
the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet at
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John
Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information,
contact your provincial ministry of transportation, or locate your local
St. John Ambulance office by searching for St. John Ambulance on the
internet, or Transport Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).
Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for
their height, age, and weight may result in an increased risk of serious
injury or death to your child.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or
Recommended
age
restraint type
Infants
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or Use a child safety seat
or
less (generally age four or
(sometimes called
toddlers younger).
an infant carrier,
convertible seat,
or toddler seat).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Child Safety

19

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or
Recommended
age
restraint type
Small
Children who have outgrown or no Use a belt-positioning
children longer properly fit in a child safety booster seat.
seat (generally children who are
less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall,
are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Larger
Children who have outgrown
Use a vehicle safety
belt having the lap belt
children or no longer properly fit in a
snug and low across the
belt-positioning booster seat
(generally children who are at
hips, shoulder belt
centered across the
least 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or
shoulder and chest, and
greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by seat back upright.
child restraint manufacturer).
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local and
state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years
of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

20

Child Safety

CHILD SEATS
Use a child safety seat (sometimes
called an infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat) for infants,
toddlers or children weighing
40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. When
possible, all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a
rear seating position. If all children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the largest child in
the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings
provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if
the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size, height, weight, or
age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your child’s height,
age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death
in a crash.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Child Safety

21

WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.

Restraint
Type

Child
Weight

Rear-facing Up to
child seat 48 lb
(21 kg)
Forward- Up to
48 lb
facing
child seat (21 kg)
Forward- Over
facing
48 lb
child seat (21 kg)

Use any attachment method as indicated below
by X.
LATCH LATCH
Safety Safety
Safety
(lower (lower
belt
belt and belt
anchors anchors and
LATCH
only
and top only)
top
(lower
tether
tether anchors
anchor)
anchor and top
tether
anchor)
X

X

X

Note: The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon
which it is installed. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See the Seats chapter for information on head restraints.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

22

Child Safety

BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until
they reach age eight (8), a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when the child is seated without a booster seat.
• Can the child sit all the way
back against their vehicle seat
with knees bent comfortably at
the edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and
shoulder belt.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Child Safety

23

Types of Booster Seats
• Backless booster seats

If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child’s head (as measured at the tops of the
ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to
another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap
and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back booster seat.
• High back booster seats

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that
adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be
a better choice.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

24

Child Safety

Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s hips.

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used,
placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster
seat may improve this condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than
this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Child Safety

25

INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Children 12 and under should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the child seat will be installed in
the upright position.
• This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

26

Child Safety

Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in
a seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.

3. While holding the shoulder
and lap belt portions together,
route the tongue through the child
seat according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Child Safety

27

4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.

5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.

6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5
and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, for example, by pressing
down or kneeling on the child
restraint while pulling up on the
shoulder belt in order to force slack
from the belt.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

28

Child Safety

This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the
extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps
to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). See Using
Tether Straps in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place.

To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side
to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch
(2.5 centimeters) of movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed.
In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for referral
to a Child Passenger Safety Technician.
Using Cinch Tongue Lap and Shoulder Belts (All Front Center and
Super/Crew Cab Rear Center Positions)
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat,
move seat all the way back.
WARNING: Rear facing child seats should never be placed in
front of an active airbag.
WARNING: Always use both lap and shoulder safety belt in the
Regular Cab center seating position if applicable.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Child Safety

29

The belt webbing below the tongue is the lap portion of the combination
lap and shoulder belt, and the belt webbing above the tongue is the
shoulder belt portion of the combination lap and shoulder belt.
1. Position the child safety seat in
the center front seat.

2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.

3. While holding both shoulder and
lap portions next to the tongue,
route the tongue and webbing
through the child seat according
to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure that the belt
webbing is not twisted.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

30

Child Safety
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.

5. While pushing down with your
knee on the child seat pull up
on the shoulder belt portion to
tighten the lap belt portion of the
combination lap and shoulder belt.

6. Allow the safety belt to retract and remove any slack in the belt to
securely tighten the child safety seat in the vehicle.
7. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). See Using
Tether Straps in this chapter.
8. Before placing the child into the
child seat, forcibly pull the child
seat forward and back to make sure
that the seat is held securely in
place. To check this, grab the seat
at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward
and back. There should be no more
than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of
movement for proper installation.
9. Check from time to time to be sure that there is no slack in the lap
and shoulder belt. The shoulder belt must be snug to keep the lap belt
tight during a collision.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Child Safety

31

Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed.
In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for referral
to a Child Passenger Safety Technician.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two lower
anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet (called
the seat bight) and one top tether anchor located behind that seating
position. Your vehicle is not equipped with the lower anchor points in the
seat bight. For this vehicle, use the vehicle safety belt and upper tether to
secure a child seat. See Using Tether Straps and Recommendations for
Safety Restraints for Children in this chapter for more information.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
The passenger seats of your vehicle may be equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be straps on the seat back or an
anchor bracket mounted to the body shell on the back panel.
The SuperCab rear seat has three straps behind the top of the seat back
that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor
loops.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

32

Child Safety

The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
• F-Series Regular Cab

• F-Series SuperCab

• F-Series Crew Cab

Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been installed using the safety belt, you
can attach the top tether strap.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Child Safety

33

Tether Strap Attachment
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seat back. If the top of the safety
seat hits the head restraint, raise the head restraint to let the child seat
fit further rearward.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
3. You may need to pull the seat back forward to access the tether
anchors. Make sure the seat is locked in the upright position before
installing the child seat.
4. Remove the tether cover.

5. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown.
• Front seats (Regular Cab)/Rear
seats (Crew Cab)

If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a crash.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

34

Child Safety

If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
Tether Strap Attachment (Rear SuperCab Only)
There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat
(along the bottom edge of the rear window) in the SuperCab. These
loops are to be used as both routing loops and anchor loops for up to
three child safety seat tether straps.
These straps may be secured below the back of the seat with rubber
bands. To access, reach below the back of the seat and pull tether loop
out of the rubber band securing it.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to
the loop directly behind the child seat. To provide a tight tether strap:
1. Route the tether strap through
the loop directly behind the child
seat.

2. Attach the strap hook onto the
loop behind an adjacent seating
position.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Child Safety

35

3. Install the child safety seat tightly
using the vehicle belts. Follow the
instructions in this chapter.
4. Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.

A single loop can be used to route and anchor more than one child seat.
For example, the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child
safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child
seats installed in the outboard rear seats.
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
The childproof locks are located on
the rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door.
Move the lock control up or down
to engage or disengage the
childproof lock.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

36

Safety Belts

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seat back upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly
wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Safety Belts

37

WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. Failure
to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts.
All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety
belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• lap and shoulder safety belts.
• shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode, (except driver
safety belt).
• height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions
• safety belt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions.
• Safety belt warning light and chime. See Safety Belt
Warning Light and Indicator Chime later in this chapter.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in the
Supplemental Restraints System chapter.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in rollovers. The safety belt
pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the
safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body when activated. This helps
increase the effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal crashes, the safety
belt pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the crash is of sufficient
severity, together with the front airbags.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

38

Safety Belts

FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints in your vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts.
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.

2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.

Using the Safety Belt with Cinch Tongue (Front Center and Rear
Center Seats Only)
The cinch tongue will slide up and down the belt webbing when the belt
is stowed or while putting safety belts on. When the lap and shoulder
safety belt is buckled, the cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to be
shortened, but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getting
longer. The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash, so always
wear the shoulder belt properly and don’t allow any slack in either the
lap or shoulder portions.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Safety Belts

39

Before you can reach and latch a lap and shoulder belt having a cinch
tongue into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap belt portion of it.
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull
some webbing out of the shoulder
belt retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below
the tongue, grasp the tip (metal
portion) of the tongue so that it is
parallel to the webbing and slide the
tongue upward.

3. Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the
buckle.
Fastening the Cinch Tongue
WARNING: The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible
around the hips, not across the waist.
1. Pull the lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder
belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and chest.
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted, remove the twist.
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on
the tongue.
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the lap and shoulder belt with
a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard,
turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more, the safety belt will become locked and help reduce your forward
movement.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

40

Safety Belts

Restraint of Pregnant Women
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seat back upright
and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the
following figure.
Pregnant women should always wear
their safety belts. The lap belt
portion of a combination lap and
shoulder belt should be positioned
low across the hips below the belly
and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.

Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNING: After any vehicle crash, the safety belt system at all
passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking
retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in crashes.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Safety Belts

41

All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode, and the
front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt
length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
out again in a slow and controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a booster,
is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children 12 years
old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See the Child Safety chapter.
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the safety belt is now in the
automatic locking mode.

How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

42

Safety Belts

Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, you can obtain a
safety belt extension assembly from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Pull on the center button and
slide the height adjuster up or
down.
2. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure
it is locked in place.
PULL

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Safety Belts

43

SAFETY BELT WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the
driver’s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle’s
ignition is turned on.
Conditions of Operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator light
is illuminated and the warning
chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...

Then...
The safety belt warning light illuminates
1-2 minutes and the warning chime
sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.

The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.

SAFETY BELT-MINDER®
This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing
additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating
the safety belt warning light when the driver’s seat is occupied and the
safety belt is unbuckled.
If...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position or less than 1-2 minutes
have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle
has reached at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition switch
has been turned to on...

Then...
The Belt-Minder feature will not
activate.

The Belt-Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates
and the warning chime sounds for six
seconds every 25 seconds, repeating for
about five minutes or until the safety
belts are buckled.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

44

Safety Belts

If...
The driver’s safety belt becomes
unbuckled for about one minute
while the vehicle is traveling at
least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more
than 1-2 minutes have elapsed
since the ignition switch has
been turned to on...

Then...
The Belt-Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates
and the warning chime sounds for six
seconds every 25 seconds, repeating for
about five minutes or until the safety
belts are buckled.

Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder® Feature (Driver Only)
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave
the Belt-Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use
the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate or activate
the Belt-Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
Note: If you are using MyKey®, the Belt-Minder cannot be disabled.
Also, if the Belt-Minder has been previously disabled, it will be
re-enabled during the use of MyKey®. See the MyKey® chapter.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• the parking brake is set
• the transmission selector lever is in position P
• the ignition is off
• all vehicle doors are closed
• the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled
• the parking lamps and headlamps are off.
1. Turn the ignition on. DO NOT START THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (about one minute).
• Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Safety Belts

45

3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times at a moderate speed,
ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
• After Step 3 is complete, the safety belt warning light will be turned
on for three seconds.
4. Within seven seconds of the light turning on, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder feature if it is currently enabled.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder feature if it is currently disabled.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the vehicle
and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts.
Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including retractors,
buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),
shoulder belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child safety seat LATCH
and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a
crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use
in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was
minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage
and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced.
Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, see Cleaning the Interior in the
Vehicle Care chapter.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

46

Supplementary Restraints System

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk
of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in
the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Supplementary Restraints System

47

The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to
work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front
passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery
residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell
the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that
result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts
of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause
abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result
of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death
or serious injuries, such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal
injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is
extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away
from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required.
SOS POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM™
The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn
(intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag
equipped on your vehicle, such as front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy®.
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
• the hazard control button is pressed
• the panic button (if equipped) is pressed on the remote entry
transmitter, or
• your vehicle runs out of power.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

48

Supplementary Restraints System

DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS
WARNING: Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag
module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
The driver and front passenger
airbags will deploy during significant
frontal and near frontal crashes.

The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules
• crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later
in this chapter.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Supplementary Restraints System

49

Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment
WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 centimeters) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts,
it is very important that they continue to sit properly. Properly seated
occupants sit upright, lean against the seat back, and center themselves
on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event.
For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a crash.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

50

Supplementary Restraints System

If two adults and a child occupy a Regular Cab, properly restrain the
child in the center front unless doing so would interfere with driving
your vehicle. This provides lap and shoulder belt protection for all
occupants, and airbag protection for the adults. A child or infant
properly restrained in the center front seat should not incur risk of
serious injury from the airbags.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12
and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer
protection to an occupant in the center seating position.
High-series vehicles (if equipped)
The front passenger sensing system
uses a passenger airbag status
indicator that will illuminate,
indicating that the front passenger
frontal airbag is either ON (enabled)
or OFF (disabled). The indicator
lamp is located by the radio.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator OFF and ON lamps will
illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is first turned on
to confirm it is functional.
Switch position
Off
On

Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator
OFF: Lit
ON: Unlit
OFF: Unlit
ON: Lit

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Enabled

Supplementary Restraints System

51

Low-series vehicles (if equipped)

PASS AIRBAG

The front passenger sensing system
uses a pass airbag off indicator which
will illuminate and stay lit to remind
you that the front passenger frontal
airbag is disabled. The indicator lamp
is located by the radio.

Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is first turned on to confirm it is functional.
Passenger Airbag ON/OFF Switch (if equipped)
WARNING: An airbag ON/OFF switch may be installed in this
vehicle. Before driving, always look at the face of the switch to
be sure the switch is in the proper position in accordance with these
instructions and warnings. Failure to put the switch in a proper position
can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.
Turning the Passenger Airbag Off
WARNING: If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air
bag switch is off and the ignition is on, have the passenger air
bag switch serviced at your authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING: In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the
switch, always remove the ignition key from the passenger air
bag ON/OFF switch.
WARNING: An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of
serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag. Rear
facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless
the passenger airbag is turned off.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

52

Supplementary Restraints System
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the
switch off and hold in off while
removing the key.
2. When the ignition is turned on, the
pass airbag off light illuminates briefly,
momentarily shuts off and then turns
back on. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is deactivated.

Turning the Passenger Airbag Back On
WARNING: The safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to
function together with the airbags in certain types of crashes. When
you turn OFF your airbag, you not only lose the protection of the
airbag, you also may reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt
system, which was designed to work with the airbag. If you are not a
person who meets the requirements stated in the NHTSA/Transport
Canada deactivation criteria turning OFF the airbag can increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: If your vehicle has rear seats, always transport
children who are 12 and younger in the rear seat. Always use
safety belts and child restraints properly. DO NOT place a child in a
rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is equipped
with an airbag ON/OFF switch and the passenger airbag is turned OFF.
This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating
airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the airbag
inflates is substantial.
WARNING: If the pass airbag off light is illuminated when the
passenger airbag switch is on and the ignition is on, have the
passenger airbag switch serviced at your authorized dealer immediately.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Supplementary Restraints System

53

The passenger airbag remains off until you turn it back on.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn
the ignition on.
2. The pass airbag off light will
briefly illuminate when the ignition
is turned to on. This indicates that
the passenger airbag is operational.
The passenger side airbag should always be ON (the pass airbag off light
should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets the
requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the NHTSA/Transport
Canada deactivation criteria which follows.
The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an airbag
than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life threatening
injuries, airbags must open with great force, and this force can pose a
potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a front seat
occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way to reduce the
risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the overall safety of
the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained in the
vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the protection of safety
belts and permits the airbags to provide the additional protection they
were designed to provide. If you choose to deactivate your airbag, you are
losing the very significant risk reducing benefits of the airbag and you are
also reducing the effectiveness of the safety belts, because safety belts in
modern vehicles are designed to work as a safety system with the airbags.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

54

Supplementary Restraints System

NHTSA Deactivation Criteria (Excluding Canada)
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular
belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the
risk of injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to
reduce concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the
risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a
crash, if the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt
might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to
incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is
turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA
deactivation criteria.
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
• the vehicle has no rear seat;
• the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing
infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that
the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat
because:
• the vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front
because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or
• the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat
so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Supplementary Restraints System

55

3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which,
according to his or her physician:
• causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash.
Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria (Canada Only)
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular
belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the
risk of injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to
reduce concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the
risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a
crash, if the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt
might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to
incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is
turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA
deactivation criteria.
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition.
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the
front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever
possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes
ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

56

Supplementary Restraints System

• the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that,
according to his or her physician:
• poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and
experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the airbag cover, on the side of the seat backs (of the front
seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase
the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seat back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag,
as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again. The side airbag system (including the seat) must
be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Supplementary Restraints System

57

The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seat backs
of the front seats. In certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the side
affected by the crash will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate
between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
The system consists of the
following:
• a label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are
found on your vehicle
• side airbags located inside the
seat back of the driver and front
passenger seats
• crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in
this chapter.
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY® CURTAIN AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a
deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain
airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
curtain airbags, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner
on a vehicle containing curtain airbags, as you could be seriously injured
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

58

Supplementary Restraints System

WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle including the driver
should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system and curtain airbag is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury
or death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place
objects in the deployment path of the curtain airbag.
WARNING: If the curtain airbags have deployed, the curtain
airbags will not function again. The curtain airbags (including the
A, B and C pillar trim and headliner) must be inspected and serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side crashes or when a
certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind
the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain sideways crashes or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which
seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the
side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided
in side impact crashes and rollover events.
The system consists of:
• safety canopy curtain airbags
located above the trim panels
over the front and rear side
windows identified by wording
on the B-pillar trim.

• a flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air
curtain deployment.
• crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in this
chapter.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Supplementary Restraints System

59

Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along
the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety Canopy included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
your vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which
provide information to the restraints control module which deploys
(activates) the front safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, seat mounted side airbags, and the Safety Canopy. Based on the
type of accident (frontal impact, side impact or rollover) the restraints
control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above
safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the
safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. See the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem or light are repaired.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

60

Supplementary Restraints System

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint
system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains frontal or
sideways deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to
deploy a safety device or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is
detected by the rollover sensor.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for
both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (such as crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and
near-frontal crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts)
unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the safety belt pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in rollovers.
• The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side impact
crashes. Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact
crashes or rollover events. The Safety Canopy may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation, or a certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Keys and Remote Control

61

GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. The term IC before the radio certification number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater
range. A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around your vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by
other short-distance radio transmissions, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm
systems. If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your
remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press
any button unintentionally.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

62

Keys and Remote Control

REMOTE CONTROL

CAUTION
TO BE REMOVED

BY CUSTOMER ONLY

Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
two integrated keyhead transmitters.
Use the key blade to start your
vehicle and unlock or lock the
driver door from outside the vehicle.
The transmitter portion functions as
the remote control.
Note: Your vehicle’s keys came
with a security label that provides
important key cut information.
Keep the label in a safe place for
future reference.

Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the
back surface of the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from the
vehicle. The transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032
or equivalent.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot near the key
1 ring to remove the battery cover (1).
2. Carefully peel up the rubber gasket (2)
2 from the transmitter if it does not come off
with the battery cover.
3 3. Remove the old battery (3).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Keys and Remote Control

63

4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the integrated
keyhead transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the
battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery
housing cavity.
5. Reinstall the rubber gasket.
6. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
The feature allows the remote control to recall the driver seat, power
mirrors and power adjustable foot pedals (if equipped) memory
positions.
Press the unlock button on the remote control to recall the memory
positions. If the easy entry and exit feature is enabled, the seat will move
to the easy entry position. The seat will move to the driver memory
position when the key is put in the ignition.
Programming Memory to the Transmitter
1. Move the memory features to the desired positions using the
associated controls.
2. Press and hold memory button 1 on the driver door for
five seconds. A tone will sound after about two seconds.
1
Continue to hold until a second tone is heard.
3. Within three seconds press the lock button on the remote
control.
4. Wait 10 seconds, then press the unlock button on the
2
remote control.
Repeat this procedure for memory button 2 and a second
remote control if desired.
Deactivating Memory from the Transmitter
1. Press and hold the desired memory button for five seconds. A tone
will sound after about two seconds. Continue to hold until a second tone
is heard.
2. Within three seconds press the unlock button on the remote control.
Repeat this procedure for each additional transmitter if desired.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

64

Keys and Remote Control

Car Finder
Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn will sound
and the turn signals will flash. We recommend you use this
method to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Press the button to activate the alarm. Press the button again
or switch the ignition on to deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if
your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel.
The remote start button is on the transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle from outside your vehicle.
The transmitter has an extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control can be configured to operate
when the vehicle is remote started. See the Climate Control chapter for
more information. A manual climate control system will run at the setting
it was set to when your vehicle was last turned off.
Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems.
The remote start system will not work if:
• the ignition is on
• the alarm system is triggered
• you disable the feature
• the hood is not closed
• the transmission is not in P
• the vehicle battery voltage is too low
• the service engine soon light is on.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Keys and Remote Control

65

Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within three seconds of each other.
Your vehicle will not remote start and the horn will not chirp if you do
not follow this sequence.
The label on your transmitter
details the starting procedure.

To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The exterior lamps will flash
twice.
The horn will chirp if the system fails to start.
Note: If you remote start your vehicle with an integrated keyhead
transmitter, you must switch the ignition on before driving your vehicle.
If you remote start your vehicle with an intelligent access transmitter,
you must have a programmed intelligent access key inside your vehicle
and press the START/STOP button on the instrument panel once while
applying the brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows will be inhibited during the remote start and the
radio will not turn on automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and your vehicle will run for 5, 10, or
15 minutes, depending on the setting. See the Information Displays
chapter to select the duration of the remote start system.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

66

Keys and Remote Control

Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with your vehicle still running to extend the run
time for another remote start duration. If the duration is set to last
10 minutes, the duration will extend by another 10 minutes beginning
after what is left of the first activation time. For example, if your vehicle
had been running from the first remote start for five minutes, your
vehicle will continue to run now for a total of 15 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after a vehicle
shutdown.
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote Starting
Press the button once. The parking lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle than when starting due to
ground reflection and the added noise of the running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start system through the
information display. See the Information Display chapter.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement or additional keys or remote controls from
an authorized dealer. A dealer can program the transmitters to your
vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself. See the Security
chapter for information on programming your transmitters.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyKey

67

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to
promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed are referred to as
administrator keys or admin keys. These can be used to:
• create a MyKey
• program configurable MyKey settings
• clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you can access the following
information using the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the same settings. You cannot
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles with intelligent access key (push-button start)
keyless start, when both a MyKey and an admin intelligent access key
(fob) are present, the admin fob will be recognized by the vehicle to
start the engine.
Standard Settings
These settings activate automatically with a programmed MyKey:
• Belt-Minder. The audible safety belt warning tones continue and do
not time out after approximately five minutes. The audio system also
mutes until drivers and front passengers fasten their safety belts.
(Not available in vehicles equipped with AM/FM only audio systems.)
• Early low fuel. The low-fuel warning activates earlier, giving MyKey
drivers more time to refuel.
• Driver assist features, if equipped, remain on and active: Parking aid,
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) with Cross Traffic Alert and the
Collision Warning System.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

68

MyKey

Optional Settings
You can configure these settings while programming a MyKey or change
them while using an admin key:
• 80 mph (130 km/h) vehicle speed limit. Drivers receive visual
warnings and an audible tone when they reach 80 mph (130 km/h).
• 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h) vehicle speed warning. Drivers
receive visual warnings and an audible tone when they exceed the
preselected vehicle speed.
• 45% of the maximum audio system output. The audio system displays
a message when drivers attempt to exceed the volume limits.
• AdvanceTrac. Program the system to Always-on and these features,
if your vehicle is equipped, cannot be turned off when drivers use a
programmed MyKey.
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a MyKey.
For Type 1 information displays:
1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu within the information display, and press
SETUP using the information display button until PRESS RESET
TO CREATE MYKEY displays.
4. Press and release the RESET button. The message HOLD RESET
TO CONFIRM MYKEY will display.
5. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK
THIS AS RESTRICTED displays. Wait until KEY RESTRICTED
AT NEXT START displays, confirming that your key is successfully
created.
Make sure you label your key so you can distinguish it from the admin
keys.
For Type 2 information display controls:
1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. From the main menu within the information display, use the right
arrow key > or OK to select SETTING and then MYKEY.
4. Press > or OK to select CREATE MYKEY.
5. Hold OK as prompted until you see MARK THIS KEY AS
RESTRICTED in the information display screen.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyKey

69

The key is successfully created. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings for the key(s). Refer to the
Programming/Changing Optional Settings section.
Programming/Changing Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on with an admin key.
2. Access the main menu on the information display controls, and select
Settings, then MyKey by pressing OK or > button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to get to a feature.
4. Press OK or > to make a selection.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey settings at any time during
the same key cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you have switched
the engine off, however, you will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear all MyKeys within the same key cycle as you created the
MyKey. If you switch your ignition off, however, you will need to use an
admin key to clear your MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and
return all MyKeys to their original admin key status at once.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use the information display to
do the following:
For Type 1 information display settings:
1. Access the main menu of your information display and press SETUP
until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY displays.
2. Press and release the RESET button. The display will show HOLD
RESET TO CONFIRM CLEAR.
3. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL
MYKEYS CLEARED displays.
For Type 2 information display settings:
1. Access main menu of your information display and select Settings,
then MyKey.
2. Scroll to Clear All and press the OK button.
3. Hold the OK button until ALL MYKEYS CLEARED displays .

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

70

MyKey

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS
You can find information about your programmed MyKeys by using the
information display.
MYKEY DISTANCE
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete
the accumulated distance is by using an admin key to clear your MyKey.
If the distance does not accumulate as expected, then the intended user
is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
NUMBER OF MYKEY(S)
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and
determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
NUMBER OF ADMIN KEY(S)
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use
this feature to determine how many unrestricted keys you have for your
vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has been programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, please see
your Ford authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyKey

71

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition
I cannot create a
MyKey.

I cannot program the
configurable settings.

I cannot clear the
MyKeys.

I lost the only admin
key.
I lost a key.
No MyKey functions
with intelligent access
key (push- button
start).
MyKey distances do
not accumulate.

Potential causes
• The key or fob used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
• The key or fob used to start the vehicle is
the only admin key (there always has to be at
least one admin key).
• Vehicles with push-button start: The
intelligent access key is not in the backup slot.
The backup slot location information is in
another chapter. See Starting and Stopping
the Vehicle.
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
• The key or fob used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey.
• The key or fob used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. Refer to Creating a
MyKey.
• Purchase a new key from your authorized
dealer.
• Program a spare key. See SecuriLock in the
Security.
• An admin fob is present at engine start.
• No MyKey has been created. See Creating a
MyKey.
• The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

72

Locks

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock
and unlock the vehicle.
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
The power door lock control is located on the driver and front passenger
door panels.
A. Unlock
B. Lock

A

B

Remote Control
You can use the remote control anytime the vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
Press the button to unlock the driver’s door.
Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signals will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control
for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking. Disabling
two-stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of
the button. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the unlocking
mode was changed. The unlocking mode will be applied to the remote
control and keyless entry keypad (if equipped).
Locking the Doors
Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors
are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp and the turn
signals will illuminate if all the doors are closed.
Note: If any door is not closed, or if the hood is not closed on vehicles
equipped with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn will chirp
twice and the lamps will not illuminate.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Locks

73

Smart Unlocks (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of your
vehicle if your key is still in the ignition.
When you open the driver door and lock your vehicle with the power
door lock control, all the doors will lock then unlock if your key is still
in the ignition.
Your vehicle can still be locked with the key in the ignition by:
• using the manual lock button on the door
• locking the driver door with a key
• using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped)
• using the lock button on the remote control (if equipped).
Autolock and Unlock (If Equipped)
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all doors are closed,
• the ignition is on,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the vehicle was autolocked, the autounlock feature will unlock all
doors when the driver’s door is opened within 10 minutes of switching
the ignition off.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and Autounlock
These features can be enabled or disabled:
• by your authorized dealer
• through the information display
• using the power door lock procedure.
To enable or disable using the power door locks, do the following:
Note: You will have 30 seconds to complete the procedure.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock button three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock button three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn will chirp indicating the programming
mode has been entered.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

74

Locks

Autolock: Once in programming mode, press the power door unlock
button then the lock button. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
Autounlock: Once in programming mode, press the power door lock
button then the unlock button. The horn will chirp once if autounlock
was deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock
was activated.
6. Turn the ignition off. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.
Note: The autounlock feature can be enabled or disabled independently
of the autolock feature.
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when the remote entry
system is used to unlock the door(s).
The system will turn off the lights if:
• the ignition is turned on
• the lock button on the remote control is pressed
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control
• any door is open.
Battery Saver
The battery saver shuts off the interior lamps 30 minutes after you
switch the ignition off if you leave a door open and leave the dome lamp
switch on. It shuts off the interior lamps after 10 minutes if you leave the
dome lamp switch off.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Locks

75

SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to lock or unlock the doors
without using a key.
The keypad can be operated with the factory-set 5-digit entry code;
this code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create up to five of
your own 5-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press the 1•2 on the keypad within five seconds.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. You must enter each number within
five seconds of each other.
4. For memory recall feature, enter the sixth digit 1•2 to store driver 1
settings or 3•4 to store driver 2 settings.
Note: Pressing 5•6, 7•8, or 9•0 keypad numbers as a sixth digit will
not recall a driver memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory setting.
5. The doors will lock and then unlock to confirm that programming is
complete.
You may also program a personal entry code through the MyFord Touch
or MyLincoln Touch system. Refer to the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln
Touch chapter.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory-set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

76

Locks

Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release the 1•2 on the keypad within five seconds.
3. Press and hold the 1•2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory-set 5-digit code
will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode if you enter the wrong code
seven times (35 consecutive button presses). This mode disables the
keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity
• pressing the unlock button on the remote control
• the ignition is turned on.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To unlock the driver door: Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each number within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate. Note: All doors will unlock if
the two-stage unlocking feature is disabled. Refer to Locking and
Unlocking earlier in this chapter.
To unlock all doors: Enter the factory-set code or your personal code,
then press the 3•4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors: Press and hold 7•8 and 9•0 at the same time with
the driver door closed. You do not need to enter the keypad code first.
Displaying the Factory Set Code
Note: You will need to have two programmed passive anti-theft keys for
this procedure.
To display the factory set code in the information display:
1. Insert a key into the ignition and turn the ignition on for a few seconds.
2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.
3. Insert the second key into the ignition and turn the ignition on.
The factory set code will display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after any other warning messages
first display.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Security

77

SECURILOCK® PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote
start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the
same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to
the key when starting the engine. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine
if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always take
your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
The system is an engine immobilization system. It helps prevent the
engine from starting unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle
is used. Using the wrong key may prevent the engine from starting.
A message may appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, a
malfunction has happened and a message may appear in the information
display.
Automatic Arming
Your vehicle arms immediately after you switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Your vehicle disarms when you switch the ignition on with a coded key.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle may come with two integrated keyhead transmitters.
The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition
key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote
control.
If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys are
lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key, you will need to
have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need
to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be
programmed.
Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to
help prevent any inconveniences. See an authorized dealer to purchase
additional spare or replacement keys.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

78

Security

Programming a Spare Key
Note: A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your
vehicle. Only four of these eight can be integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitters or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program both
the engine immobilizer key code and the remote entry portion of the
remote control to your vehicle.
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See your authorized dealer to have
the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are
not available
Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the first coded
key, insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least one
second, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed
coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition off
and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least
one second, but no more than 10 seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
The key will start the vehicle’s engine and will operate the remote entry
system (if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter) if it has
been successfully programmed.
If the key was not successfully programmed, wait 20 seconds and repeat
Steps 1 through 8. Take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have
the new key programmed if you are still unsuccessful.
Wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 to program
an additional key.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Security

79

ANTI-THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED)
The system will warn you of unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound when:
• any door or the hood is opened without using the key or the remote
control
• the ignition is turned on with an invalid key.
Take all keys and remote controls to your authorized dealer if there is
any potential alarm problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The system is ready to arm whenever the ignition is off. Lock the vehicle
to arm the alarm.
The turn signal lamps will flash once after locking the vehicle to indicate
the alarm is in the pre-armed mode and will become fully armed in
20 seconds.
Disarming the Alarm
To disarm the alarm, do any of the following:
• Press the power door unlock button within the 20-second pre-armed
mode.
• Press the unlock button on the remote control.
• Unlock the doors with the keyless entry pad.
• Turn the ignition on with a valid key.
• Press the panic button on the remote control. The alarm system will
still be armed, but this shuts off the horn and turn lamps when the
alarm is sounding.
Note: If the driver’s door is unlocked with a key, a chime will sound
when you open the door. You will have 12 seconds to disarm the alarm
using any of the actions above, otherwise the alarm will trigger.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

80

Steering Wheel

ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting
in the Correct Position in the Seats chapter.
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position.

3. Lock the steering column.

AUDIO CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
A. Media
B. Volume up
C. Volume down
D. Seek down or previous
E. Seek up or next

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Steering Wheel

81

Media
Press the media button repeatedly to scroll through available audio modes.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset
• play the next or previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band
• seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

A

A. Voice recognition
B. Phone mode
See the SYNC or MyFord Touch
chapter.

MEDIA

+
VOL

SEEK

B

CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
See the Cruise Control chapter.
CNCL
RSM

ON/
OFF

- SET +

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

82

Steering Wheel

INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
Type 1
SETUP

INFO

RESET

Type 2

OK

See the Information Displays chapter.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)
See the MyFord Touch chapter.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Pedals

83

ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with
feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
The control is located on the left side of the steering column. Press and
hold the appropriate control to move the pedals.
A. Farther
B. Closer

A

B

The pedal positions are saved and recalled with the memory feature
(if equipped). Refer to the Seats chapter.
The pedals should only be adjusted when the vehicle is parked.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

84

Wipers and Washers

WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield in icy conditions before turning on
the windshield wipers.
Rotate the end of the control away
from you to increase the speed of
the wipers. Rotate toward you to
decrease the speed of the wipers.

Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes will
decrease when intermittent wipe is selected.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out.
Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat.
Press the end of the stalk to
activate the washer.

• A brief press causes a single wipe without washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold will activate the wipers and washer fluid for up
to 10 seconds.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining
washer fluid. This feature can be turned on and off in the information
display.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Lighting

85

LIGHTING CONTROL
• Rotate the headlamp control
clockwise to the first position to
turn on the parking lamps.
• Rotate clockwise to the second
position to also turn on the
headlamps.

High Beams
Pull the lever fully past the detent
to switch the high beams on.
Pull the lever fully again switch the
high beams off.
OFF

Headlamp Flasher
Pull the lever toward you slightly
and release it to flash the
headlamps.

OFF

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

86

Lighting

AUTOLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)

A

The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally controlled
by the headlamp control.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the
control to the fourth position.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the
control to the first, second, or
third position.

Note: If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps, it will have the
headlamps on with windshield wipers feature. If the windshield wipers
are turned on, the exterior lamps will turn on with the headlamp control
in the autolamp position.
The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for a predetermined
amount of time after the ignition switch is turned to off. You can change
the amount of time the lamps stay on by using the programming
procedure that follows:
Autolamps - Programmable Exit Delay
Programmable exit delay allows the length of the autolamp exit delay to
be changed.
To program the auto lamp exit time delay:
1. Start with the ignition in the off position and the headlamp control in
the autolamp position.
2. Turn the headlamp control to off.
3. Turn the ignition switch to on and then back to off.
4. Turn the headlamp control to the autolamp position. The headlamps
will turn on.
5. Wait the desired amount of time for the exit delay you want (up to
three minutes), then turn the headlamps off.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Lighting

87

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
lit components in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp
operation.
• Tap the top or bottom of the
control to brighten/dim all
interior lit components
incrementally, or
• Press and hold at the first position the top or bottom of the control
until the desired lighting level is reached.
• Press and hold the top of the control to the full on position to activate
the “dome on” feature. This will turn on the interior courtesy lights.
The lights will remain on until the bottom of the control is pressed.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always remember to switch your headlamps on in
low light situations or during inclement weather. The system
does not activate the tail lamps and may not provide adequate lighting
during these conditions. Failure to activate your headlamps under these
conditions may result in a collision.
The system switches the headlamps on with a reduced output in daylight
conditions.
To switch the system on:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Switch the lighting control to the off or parking lamp position.
3. Disengage the parking brake.
4. Make sure the transmission selector lever is not in position P.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

88

Lighting

FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
The headlamp control also operates
the fog lamps. The fog lamps can be
turned on only when the headlamp
control is in the parking lamp
(second) position, headlamps on
(third) position, or autolamp
(fourth) position, and the high
beams are not turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn fog lamps on. The fog lamp
indicator light will illuminate.
A

DIRECTION INDICATORS
The turn signal lever does not mechanically lock in the upward or
downward position when activated. The turn signal control activation and
cancellation is electronic.
• To operate the left turn signal,
push the lever down until it stops
and release.
• To operate the right turn signal,
push the lever up until it stops
and release.
OFF
• To manually cancel turn signal
operation, push the lever again in
either direction.
Lane Change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
• Push the lever up/down to the first stop position and release. The turn
signals will flash three times and stop.
• Push the lever up/down to the first stop position and hold. The turn
signals will flash for as long as the lever is held in this position.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Lighting

89

INTERIOR LAMPS
Front Map Lamps (If Equipped)
The map lamps are located on the overhead console. Press the controls
on either side of each map lamp to turn on the lamps. The map lamps
also light when:
• any door is opened,
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on, and
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is off.
Rear Dome and Map Lamps
Your vehicle may have map lamps
within the rear dome lamp. Press
the switches on either side of the
dome lamp to turn the lamps on.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

90

Windows and Mirrors

POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle
and do not let them play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Note: You may hear a rumbling noise when one or both of the rear
windows are open. Lower a front window slightly to reduce this noise.
Press the switch to open the
window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
AUTO

One-Touch Up or Down (Front Windows)
Note: The window may be disabled for up to five minutes if it is cycled
up and down repeatedly. This helps prevent damage to the motor.
Normal operation will resume once the motor cools.
This feature automatically opens or closes the window.
Press or lift the switch completely and release. The window will fully
open or close. Press or lift it again to stop the window.
Restoring the One-Touch Up Functionality
Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration with the door closed.
Calibrating with the door open will cause the window to continuously
bounce back.
Functionality may be lost under low battery power conditions.
To reset this function after restoring full battery power:
1. Pull the switch to the one-touch up position.
2. Hold the switch until the glass reaches the stall position and continue
to hold for two seconds.
3. Press the switch down and operate the window to the full down
position. One-touch up will now be functional.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Windows and Mirrors

91

Bounce-Back (One-Touch Up or Down Windows Only)
The window will stop automatically while closing and reverse some
distance if there is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: When you override the bounce-back feature the
window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal injury.
Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window
reaching the bounce-back position. The window will travel up with no
bounce-back protection. The window will stop if you release the switch
before the window is fully closed.
Global Open Windows (If Equipped)
Note: The ignition must be off and the accessory delay feature must not
be activated in order for this feature to operate.
Note: This feature can be disabled or enabled by your authorized dealer or
through the information display. Refer to Information Displays chapter.
Press and hold the unlock button on the remote control to begin opening
the windows.
Press the lock or unlock button on the remote control to stop motion.
Window Lock
A. Unlock
B. Lock

A

B

Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

92

Windows and Mirrors

Power Sliding Back Window (If Equipped)
WARNING: When operating the power sliding back window you
must ensure all rear seat occupants and/or cargo are not in the
proximity of the back window.
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power sliding back window.
They may seriously injure themselves.
The control is located on the
overhead console.
Press and hold the control to open
the window. Pull and hold the
control to close the window.
TILT

SLIDE

Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several minutes after you switch
the ignition off, or until you open either front door.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while your vehicle is in
motion.

B
A

C

A. Left mirror
B. Off
C. Right mirror

To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center position to lock mirrors in place.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Windows and Mirrors

93

Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully
engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position.
Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
Note: Activating the mirrors 10 or more times within one minute, or
repeated folding and unfolding of the mirrors while holding the control
down during full travel, may disable the system to protect motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three minutes with the vehicle running,
and up to 10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the system to reset and for
function to return to normal.
Pull the control back to fold the
mirrors in or out.

Loose Mirror
A mirror may also be manually folded by pulling it toward the door
window glass. This may cause the mirror to appear loose and it will need
to be re-synchronized. Pull and hold the control to fold the mirrors in
until movement stops. A click will be heard indicating re-synchronization.
If the click is not heard, use the control to fold the mirrors all the way
out, then in again. Once the click is heard the mirrors will operate
normally until they are again manually folded.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
The heated exterior mirrors switch on with the heated rear window.
See Heated Windows and Mirrors in the Climate Control chapter.
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory
function. See Memory function in the Seats chapter.
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror housing blinks when you
activate the turn signal.
Clearance Lamps (If Equipped)
The lower, outer portion of the mirror housings illuminates when the
headlamps or parking lamps are switched on.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

94

Windows and Mirrors

Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped)
This feature allows the mirror to
extend approximately 3 inches
(75 millimeters). It is especially
useful when towing a trailer. The
mirrors can be manually pulled out
or pushed in to the desired position.

PowerScope® Power Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped)
This feature lets you position
both mirrors at the same time.
The switch is on the door trim
panel.

To telescope the mirrors out, press and hold the left side of the switch.
When the mirrors are fully extended, it is normal to hear the telescoping
motors running as long as you continue to hold the switch.
To telescope the mirrors in, press and hold the right side of the switch.
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also
have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or
down and from side to side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Windows and Mirrors

95

Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror.
Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised
rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are
detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal
reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
Slide-On-Rod (If Equipped)
Rotate the visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for
extra sunlight coverage.
Retract the visor before moving it
back toward the windshield and
storing it.

Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
Lift the cover to switch on the
lamp.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

96

Windows and Mirrors

MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moonroof or leave
children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
WARNING: When closing the moonroof, you should verify that it
is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are
not in the proximity of the moonroof opening.
The sliding shade can be manually opened or closed when the moonroof
is closed. Pull the shade toward the front of the vehicle to close it.
The moonroof control is located on the overhead console.
The moonroof has a one-touch open and close feature. To stop its motion
during the one-touch operation, press the control a second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Press and release the SLIDE control to
open the moonroof. The moonroof will
stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce
rumbling wind noise which may happen
with the moonroof fully open. Press and
release the control again to fully open the
moonroof.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to
close the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically while closing and reverse some
distance if there is an obstacle detected.
Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two seconds of a bounce-back
event to override the function. While bounce-back is active, the closing
force increases for each of the next three times the moonroof is closed.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to move the moonroof to the vent
position. Pull and hold the TILT control to close the moonroof.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

97

GAUGES

A

G

B

C

D

F

E

Cluster shown in standard measure. Metric similar.
A. Engine oil pressure gauge
B. Engine coolant temperature gauge
C. Transmission fluid temperature gauge
D. Fuel gauge
E. Speedometer
F. Information display. See Information displays for more information.
G. Tachometer
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle should stay in the normal
operating range. If the needle falls below the normal range, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and check the engine oil level. Add oil if
needed. If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your
authorized dealer.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

98

Instrument Cluster

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature,
the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant
temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge
Indicates transmission fluid temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the
transmission fluid temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible and verify the airflow is not restricted
such as snow or debris blocking airflow through the grill. Also, higher
than normal operating temperature can be caused by special operation
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing or off-road use). Refer to Special
operating conditions in the scheduled maintenance information for
instructions. Operating the transmission for extended periods of time
with the gauge in the higher than normal area may cause internal
transmission damage. Altering the severity of the driving conditions is
recommended to lower the transmission temperature into the normal
range. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see your
authorized dealer.
Fuel Gauge
Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the
ignition is on). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in
motion or on a grade. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of
the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information display Registers the
accumulated distance your vehicle has travelled.
Trip Computer
See Trip A/B in Information Displays.
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See Information Displays.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

99

WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some lamps will illuminate when you
start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for
further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and
function the same as a warning lamp but do not display when you start
your vehicle.
Airbag – Front
If it fails to illuminate on startup, continues to flash or remains
on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by
your authorized dealer. A chime will sound when there is a
malfunction in the indicator light.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to have the normal braking
system (without ABS) unless the brake warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
Brake System
It will illuminate when the parking brake is engaged and the
ignition is on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not
engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake
fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause
brake failure and the risk of personal injury.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

100

Instrument Cluster

Charging System
It will illuminate when the 12–volt battery is not charging
properly. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
Check Fuel Cap
It will illuminate when the fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Continued driving with this light on may cause the
Service engine soon warning indicator to come on.
Cruise Control (if equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard
warning flasher is switched on. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb.
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely
closed.
Electronic Locking Differential
Displays when using the electronic locking differential.
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are
driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level.
Note: Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level
being correct. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let
cool.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

101

Fasten Safety belt
It will illuminate and a chime will sound to remind you to fasten
your safety belt.
High Beam
It will illuminate when the headlamp high beam is switched on.
It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher.
Hill Descent (if equipped)
Illuminates when hill descent is turned on.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel level is low or near empty.
Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine running or when driving, check
your tire pressure as soon as possible.
The lamp also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on
to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system
checked by your authorized dealer.
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced Power/Electronic Throttle
Control
Illuminates when a powertrain fault has been detected. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

102

Instrument Cluster

Service Engine Soon
The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and to
indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) testing. Normally, the “service engine soon” light will stay on until
the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the “service engine soon” light blinks eight
times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. See the
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) testing in the Fuel and
Refueling chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter.
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage
your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Stability Control System
Displays when the AdvanceTrac®/Traction control is active.
If the light remains on, have the system serviced immediately.
Stability Control System Off
Illuminates when AdvanceTrac®/Traction control has been
disabled by the driver.
Transmission Tow/Haul
Illuminates when the Tow/Haul feature has been activated.
Refer to the Transmission chapter for transmission function
and operation. If the light flashes steadily, have the system
serviced immediately, damage to the transmission could occur.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

103

4X2
Illuminates momentarily when two-wheel drive high is selected.
If the light fails to display when the ignition is turned on, or
remains on, have the system serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer.
4X4 LOW
Illuminates when four-wheel drive low is engaged. If the light fails
to display when the ignition is turned on, or remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
4X4 HIGH
Illuminates when four-wheel drive high is engaged. If the light fails
to display when the ignition is turned on, or remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
Diesel Warning Lights: If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine,
it has some unique warning lights; refer to the Instrument Cluster in
your diesel supplement for detailed information on their function.
• Glow plug pre-heat
• Water in fuel
• Diesel exhaust fluid
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Key In Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory
position and the driver’s door is opened.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Sounds when the keyless vehicle is in RUN and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off
(the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle.
If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking
brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

104

Information Displays

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while
driving and that you comply with all applicable laws.
Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information
display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information is
displayed in the information display.
Information Display Controls (Type 1)
• Press the INFO button to scroll
through trip, outside
temperature, fuel usage, trailer
gain and MyKey® information.
• Press the SETUP button to scroll
through various vehicle feature
settings.
• Press the RESET button to
choose settings, reset information
and confirm messages.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays

105

Info
Press the INFO button repeatedly to cycle through the following
features:
Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the
items are optional.
INFO
TRIP A/B
XXX° (if equipped)
MYKEY MILES (km) (if programmed)
XXX MILES (km) TO E
XX.X AVG MPG (L/100km)
MPG (L/km)
TIMER
TBC GAIN (if equipped)
EXHAUST FILTER (diesel only)
• TRIP A/B: Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and
release the INFO button until TRIP A/B appears in the display (this
represents the trip mode). Press and hold the RESET button to reset.
Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from metric
to English.
• XXX° (outside air temperature) (if equipped): This displays the
outside temperature.
• MYKEY MILES (km) (if programmed): For more information, refer to
the MyKey® chapter.
• XXX MILES (km) TO E: This displays an estimate of approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under
normal driving conditions. Remember to turn the ignition off when
refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
Distance to empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy,
which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km).
This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display. The
running average fuel economy is re-initialized to a factory default
value if the battery is disconnected.
• XX.X AVG MPG (L/100km): Average fuel economy displays your
average fuel economy in miles/gallon or liters/100 km.
• MPG (L/km): This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

106

Information Displays

• TIMER: Displays the trip elapsed drive time. Press and release RESET
to pause the timer. Press and hold RESET to reset the timer.
• TBC GAIN (if equipped): Displays the level of trailer brake gain or if
the trailer is not connected.
• EXHAUST FILTER (Diesel only): For more information, refer to the
Diesel exhaust system: oxidation catalyst/diesel particulate filter
system in your diesel supplement for more information.
System Check and Vehicle Feature Customization
Press the SETUP button repeatedly to cycle the message center through
the following features:
Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the
items are optional.
Note:When returning to the SETUP menu and a non-English language
has been selected, HOLD RESET FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to
change back to English. Press and hold the RESET button to change
back to English.
SETUP
RESET FOR
press the
OIL LIFE
SYSTEM CHECK RESET button
EXHAUST FLUID LEVEL
(Diesel only)
ENGINE HOURS
ENGINE IDLE HOURS
CHARGING SYSTEM
DOOR
BRAKE SYSTEM
TBC GAIN = XX.X
FUEL LEVEL
MYKEY DISTANCE
MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays

107

SETUP
OIL LIFE
UNITS

press the
RESET button

Distance
Temperature

English
Metric
Fahrenheit
Celsius

AUTOLAMP
0 to 180 seconds
(SEC)
AUTOLOCK
On or Off
AUTOUNLOCK
On or Off
COURTESY
On or Off
WIPE
REMOTE
On or Off
WINDOW OPEN
CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP / CLEAR MYKEY
RESET FOR ZONE SETTING (if equipped)
ZONE XX RESET = CHANGE (if equipped)
RESET FOR CALIBRATION (if equipped)
RESET FOR
press the
On or Off
REMOTE START RESET button
5, 10, 15 minutes
(if equipped)
TBC MODE (if
Electric or EOH
equipped)
TRAILER SWAY
On or Off
(if equipped)
LANGUAGE =
English / Spanish / French
ENGLISH /
SPANISH /
FRENCH
• RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK: The message center will begin to cycle
through the vehicle systems and provide a status of the item if
needed. Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.
• OIL LIFE: This displays the remaining oil life. An oil change is required
whenever indicated by the message center and according to the
recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY RECOMMENDED
ENGINE OILS.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

108

Information Displays

To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change,
perform the following:
1. Press and release the SETUP button to display OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD
RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds and release to reset
the oil life to 100%.
Note: To change oil life 100% value (if equipped with this feature) to
another value, proceed to Step 3.
3. Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX% is displayed, release and press the
RESET button to change the Oil Life Start Value. Each release and press
will reduce the value by 10%.
• UNITS: Displays the current units in English or Metric.
• AUTOLAMP (SEC): This feature keeps your headlights on for up to
three minutes after the ignition is switched off.
• AUTOLOCK: This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when
the vehicle is shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
• AUTOUNLOCK: This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors
when the driver’s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition
being turned off.
• COURTESY WIPE: This feature allows for an extra swipe of the wipers
after a wipe/wash cycle.
• REMOTE WINDOW OPEN: This feature allows for all windows to be
opened remotely.
• CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP / CLEAR MYKEY: For more
information refer to MyKey® in the Locks and Security chapter.
• RESET FOR ZONE SETTING (if equipped): This feature changes the
compass zone setting.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point
that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation
is four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable
as the vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will
eliminate this error.
Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
• ZONE XX RESET = CHANGE (if equipped): The compass heading is
displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW in the message
center display.
Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays

109

• RESET FOR CALIBRATION (if equipped): This feature calibrates the
compass.
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna.
Magnetic or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may
also affect compass accuracy. If the compass appears to be inaccurate,
a manual calibration may be necessary.
Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
3 2
1
15 location by referring to the zone map.
2. Start the engine.
4
14
13 3. From the SETUP menu, press
and release the RESET button until
5
12 the message center display changes
to show the current zone setting
ZONE XX RESET = CHANGE.
6

7 8 9 1011

4. Press and release the RESET button repeatedly until the correct zone
setting for your geographic location is displayed on the information
display.
5. Press and release SETUP, press INFO or allow the setup timer to
expire to exit the procedure.
Compass calibration adjustment
Note: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away
from large metallic objects or structures. Switch off all non-essential
electrical accessories (heated rear window, heater, A/C, map lamps,
wiper, etc.) and make sure all the doors are closed
Note: If the RESET button is pressed or three minutes has expired, the
display will go back to the INFO menu and will show CAL instead of the
compass heading until the compass is calibrated.
1. Press the RESET button until the display reads RESET FOR
CALIBRATION to start the compass calibration function.
2. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]) until
the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE display changes to CALIBRATION
COMPLETED. It will take up to five circles to complete calibration.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

110

Information Displays

3. The compass is now calibrated.
• RESET FOR REMOTE START (if equipped)
• REAR PARK AID (if equipped): This feature sounds a warning tone to
warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper, and functions only
when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
• TBC MODE (if equipped): Allows you to choose the trailer brake
mode.
• TRAILER SWAY (if equipped): This feature uses the electronic
stability control to mitigate trailer sway.
• LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH: Allows you to choose
which language the message center will display in.
Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message
center through each of the language choices.
Press the RESET button to set the language choice.
Information Display Controls (Type 2)
• Press the up and down arrow
buttons to scroll through and
highlight the options within a
menu.
• Press the right arrow button to
enter a sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to
exit a menu.
• Press the OK button to choose
and confirm a setting/messages.
OK

Main menu
You can access the menus using the information display control.
• Gauge Mode
• Trip A/B

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays

111

• Fuel Economy
• Truck Apps (If Equipped)
• Settings
• Information
Gauge Mode
Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following gauge
options.

Gauges Detail

Gauge Mode
Engine Oil Temperature (Diesel only)
Transmission Temperature
The compass orientation can be
Compass
changed between fixed north or
rotating north. To change the
modes, press OK when the compass
display is shown. Use the right
arrow to choose the mode. Press
and hold OK to set the mode.
Exhaust Filter (diesel only). Refer to Diesel exhaust
system: oxidation catalyst/diesel particulate filter
system in your diesel supplement for more
information.
Blank

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

112

Information Displays

Trip A/ B
Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip
options.
Trip A/ B
Trip time
Trip distance
Fuel used
Avg MPG (L/100km)
Odometer
Press OK to pause the Trip A or B screen/press again to un-pause.
Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.
• Trip time: shows the elapsed trip time. This timer will stop when the
vehicle is turned off and will restart when the vehicle is restarted.
• Trip distance: Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
• Fuel used: Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
• Average MPG: Shows the average distance traveled per unit of fuel
used for a given trip.
Fuel Economy
Use the arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy
display.

Fuel Econ.

Fuel Hist.: shows
fuel usage as a
bar graph based
on time. The
duration time can
be changed.

Fuel Economy
Instant MPG (L/100km)
Miles (kilometers) to Empty
AVG MPG (L/100km)
Duration: 5 Minutes, 10 Minutes, 30 Minutes, Last 5
Resets. The graph is updated each minute with the
fuel economy that was achieved during the prior 5,
10, 30 minutes of driving.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays

113

• Instant MPG: shows instantaneous fuel usage.
• Miles to empty: shows the approximate distance the vehicle can travel
before running out of fuel.
• Average MPG: shows the average fuel usage based on time. See Fuel
Hist. to change the time interval. Press and hold OK to reset this
value.
Truck Apps
In this mode, off-road information depicted with graphics and
trailer towing application options are available.
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Off Road

Truck Apps
Pitch and bank angle (in degrees): Displays the pitch angle
(front to rear) and bank angle (side to side) of the road
surface.
Steering angle (in degrees): Displays the steering angle of
the front wheels after the vehicle has been driven for a
period of time.
Differential lock/unlock: Displays the state (locked or
unlocked) of the electronic locking differential.
Energy flow: Displays the operating mode of the transfer
case: 4X2, 4X4 High or 4X4 Low.
Press OK for ELD (Electronic Locking Differential)
Info
Hill Descent Control
4X4 System
Traction Control
AdvanceTrac® + RSC

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

114
Trailer
(cont’d)

Information Displays
Truck Apps (cont’d)
Active trailer name or default trailer
Accumulated trailer distance
Trailer gain and output
Trailer disconnected. Disregard this status if your vehicle
is not equipped with a factory installed trailer brake
controller. This message may appear when an aftermarket
TBC is used even when the trailer is connected.
Press OK for Options
options
Change
When this is highlighted,
press the right arrow key
Active
to change the currently
Trailer
selected trailer. Use the up
and down arrows to select
a trailer and press the OK
button to choose the
highlighted trailer.
Adding a new trailer– Use
the up/down arrows to
highlight New Trailer and
press the right arrow key to
enter the New Trailer input
screen. Use the up/down
arrow keys to choose alpha,
numeric and symbol
characters and then press
the right arrow to move the
character space over.
Continue adding characters
as needed. Press the left
arrow to go back and change
a previously selected
character. When finished
with the new trailer name,
press OK to accept the new
trailer name.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays
Trailer
(cont’d)

115

Truck Apps (cont’d)
Conventional, Fifth Wheel
Press OK for Connection
and Gooseneck. Use the
options
Checklist
(if equipped) up/down arrows to highlight
one of these choices and
press OK to display the
connection checklist.
Follow the on-screen
instructions to go through
the connections list.
Delete
Use the up/down arrows to
Trailer
highlight the trailer you
want to delete and press
OK to delete. Follow the
on-screen prompts to exit
or confirm delete.
Information Tow Haul mode, Trailer
Screen
Brake Controller.
Rename
Use the up/down buttons
Trailer
to highlight a trailer and
press OK to select it. Use
the up/down arrow buttons
to change the characters
as needed. When done,
press OK to accept the
change.
Reset Trailer Use the up/down buttons
to select a trailer, then
Mileage /
Kilometers
press and hold OK to
(if equipped) reset the trailer mileage
(kilometers).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

116

Information Displays

Settings
In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Driver Assist

Settings
Rear Park Aid
On/Off
Rear Video
Camera Delay
On/Off
Camera
Trailer Brake
Electric or Elect. Over Hydraulic
Mode
Trailer Sway
On/Off
Control

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays
Vehicle

Autolamp
Delay
Compass

117

Settings (cont’d)
Off or XXX seconds

Easy
Entry/Exit
DTE
Calculation
(distance to
empty)
Locks

Maintenance

Menu Control

Oil Life Reset
Remote Start
Windows
Wiper Control

Zone Setting (1–15) See the diagram
below to determine your magnetic zone.
Calibration (When choosing Calibration,
follow the on-screen directions to
calibrate the compass)
On/Off
Normal History Used
Towing History Used

Autolock
On/Off
Autounlock On/Off
Unlocking
One Stage or Two Stage
Coolant
Hold OK if coolant
(if equipped) maintenance performed
Fuel Filter
Hold OK if Fuel Filter
(diesel only) Changed
Standard: with standard set, pressing the
up/down arrows from a lower level menu
will escape to the main menu.
Memory On: with memory on set, pressing
the up/down arrows will navigate to the
previous lower level menu.
Set to XXX% (Hold OK to Reset)
Duration
5, 10 or 15 minutes
System
Enable/Disable
Remote
On/Off
Open
On/Off

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

118

Information Displays

Compass (if equipped):

3 2

1

15

4

14
13

5

12
6

MyKey

Language
Units

Determine which magnetic zone you
are in for your geographic location
by referring to the zone map.

7 8 9 1011

Settings
Create MyKey
AdvanceTrac
MAX Speed
Speed Warning

(cont’d)
Hold OK to create MyKey
Always On / Selectable
80 MPH (130 km/h) or Off
45, 55 or 65 MPH (75, 90 or
105 km/h), Off
Volume Limiter
On/Off
Clear MyKey
Hold OK to Clear MyKey
English, Español, Français
Distance
English
Metric
Temperature
Fahrenheit
Celsius

Information
In this mode, you can view different vehicle system information
and perform a system check.

MyKey

Information
Admin Keys (Number of admin keys)
MyKeys (Number of MyKeys programmed)
MyKey Miles (km) (Distance traveled using a
programmed MyKey)

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays
System Check

119

Information
Some items will only display during a system check if
a problem has been detected. If an issue exists on one
of the monitored systems, the number of warnings
that need immediate attention will display in red and
the number of informational warnings will display in
amber. Use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll
through the list; press the right arrow button to
display specific information on the highlighted
warning

Compass/Transmission indicator display (if equipped)
The compass heading will display in the upper right corner of the
information display; the transmission gear indicator displays in the right
side of the information display when using the SelectShift Automatic™
transmission feature. These displays will not be shown in all screen
modes. For example: when programming certain vehicle features or in
certain information menus.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle, not
all of the messages will display or be available. Certain messages may be
abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have.
Press the RESET button for Type 1 displays or the OK button for Type 2
displays to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information
display. Other messages will be removed automatically after a short time.
Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus.
AdvanceTrac® /
Traction Control
Messages
SERVICE
ADVANCETRAC

ADVANCETRAC
OFF

Action / Description

Displayed when the AdvanceTrac® system has
detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac® system has
been disabled by the driver.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

120

Information Displays

AdvanceTrac® /
Traction Control
Messages
TRACTION
CONTROL OFF
Alarm/Security
Messages
TO STOP ALARM
START VEHICLE

SECURITY SYSTEM
FAULT
Brake System
Messages
BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL LOW

CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM

PARK BRAKE
ENGAGED

Action / Description

Displayed when the traction control has been
disabled by the driver. Refer to the Traction
Control chapter for more information.
Action / Description
Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is
armed and the vehicle is entered using the key
on the driver’s side door. In order to prevent
the perimeter alarm system from triggering,
the ignition must be turned to start or on
before the 12 second chime expires.
Displayed when the security system has
detected a fault. See your authorized dealer
for service.
Action / Description
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the
brake system should be inspected immediately.
Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance
chapter.
Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Displayed when the parking brake is set and
the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING: When the CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER message
appears in the message center, do not park near flammable
materials, vapors or structures until filter cleaning is complete.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays
Diesel Messages
CHECK COOLANT
ADDITIVE
CLEANING
EXHAUST FILTER

DRIVE TO CLEAN
EXHAUST SYSTEM

121

Action / Description
Displayed when the coolant additive needs to be
checked. Refer to your diesel supplement for
more information.
Displayed when the vehicle has entered the
cleaning mode. Various engine actions will raise
the exhaust temperature in the Diesel Particulate
Filter (DPF) system to burn off the particles
(exhaust soot). After the particles are burned
off, the exhaust temperature will fall back to
normal levels. This message is NORMAL. Refer to
your diesel supplement for more information.
Displayed when the Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF) is full of particles (exhaust soot) and the
vehicle is not being operated in a manner to
allow normal cleaning. This message will stay on
until the exhaust filter cleaning has begun, at
which time the CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER
message will be displayed. It is recommended the
vehicle operator drive the vehicle above 30 mph
(48 km/h) until the CLEANING EXHAUST
FILTER message turns off. This message is
NORMAL. Refer to your diesel supplement for
more information. Note: If this message is
ignored, your vehicle will continue to fill the
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) with particles
(exhaust soot). If cleaning is not permitted, the
light will illuminate and engine power may be
limited. If the vehicle is still not operated in a
manner to allow cleaning, the service engine
soon light will illuminate and engine power will
be further limited. Dealer service will then be
required to restore your vehicle to full-power
operation.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

122

Information Displays

Diesel Messages
STOP SAFELY NOW

Action / Description
Displayed and a chime sounds when the vehicle
exhaust system temperature exceeds intended
operating range. If this warning occurs, engine
power is reduced and the engine will shut down
when the vehicle speed is below 3 mph (5 km/h).
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible
and contact your authorized dealer. Depending
on the severity of the over-temperature
condition, the vehicle may not restart after
cycling the ignition off. If the vehicle restarts,
there may be limited power. If the exhaust
over-temperature condition reoccurs, the
message center will display STOP SAFELY NOW,
the chime will sound, and engine power will be
reduced again and shut down below 3 mph
(5 km/h). Refer to your diesel supplement for
more information.
ENGINE OIL
Displays once the engine oil has become diluted
and needs to be changed. See Changing the
DILUTED
engine oil and oil filter in your diesel
supplement.
ENGINE TURNS OFF Displayed when the vehicle is in the final second
of a countdown to where the engine will
IN 1 SECOND
intentionally be turned off by the PCM.
The diesel engine shutdown is a (regulatory)
requirement which may be required of a
particular diesel vehicle for sale in states
requiring this feature. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
ENGINE TURNS OFF Displayed when the vehicle is in the final
30 seconds of a countdown to where the engine
IN XX SECONDS
will intentionally be turned off by the PCM. The
diesel engine shutdown for extended idling is an
optional feature. Refer to your diesel supplement
for more information.
ENGINE TURNED
Displayed after the 30 second countdown. Refer
to your diesel supplement for more information.
OFF

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays
Diesel Messages
ENGINE WARMING
PLEASE WAIT

123

Action / Description
Displayed in extremely cold weather, typically
below –15°F (–26°C), if the engine block heater
is not utilized. The engine will not respond to
accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds; this
is done so the engine oil can be properly
circulated to avoid engine damage from lack of
lubrication. A timer will begin a countdown from
30 seconds. Once the counter has reached
0 seconds, OK TO DRIVE will be displayed and
the engine will respond to accelerator pedal
movement. Refer to your diesel supplement for
more information.
EXHAUST FILTER
Displayed when the Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF) has been adequately cleaned after the
DRIVE COMPLETE
DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST FILTER followed
by CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER messages have
been displayed. This message is NORMAL. Refer
to your diesel supplement for more information.
EXHAUST FILTER
Displayed when the Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF) has been adequately cleaned by the
CLEANED
manual regeneration process (OCR). Refer to
your diesel supplement for more information.
EXHAUST CLEAN
Displayed when the Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF) manual regeneration process (OCR) has
STOPPED
been stopped. Refer to your diesel supplement
for more information.
EXHAUST FLUID
Displays the distance you can travel before
depleting the remaining diesel exhaust fluid.
RANGE XXX MI
Refer to your diesel supplement for more
information.
IN XX MILES, SPEED Displayed when the diesel exhaust fluid is
LIMITED TO XX
nearing empty. The vehicle’s top speed will
MPH EXHAUST
become limited in the displayed distance. The
diesel exhaust fluid must be replenished to
FLUID EMPTY
resume normal operation of the vehicle. Refer to
your diesel supplement for more information.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

124

Information Displays

Diesel Messages
SPEED LIMITED TO
XX MPH UPON
RESTART EXHAUST
FLUID EMPTY

Action / Description
Displayed when the remaining diesel exhaust
fluid level is depleted. Speed will be limited
upon restart. The diesel exhaust fluid must be
replenished to resume normal operation of the
vehicle. Refer to your diesel supplement for more
information.
SPEED LIMITED TO Displayed when the diesel exhaust fluid is empty.
XX MPH EXHAUST
The diesel exhaust fluid must be replenished to
resume normal operation of the vehicle. Refer to
FLUID EMPTY
your diesel supplement for more information.
ENGINE IDLED
Displayed when the SCR system detects low
exhaust fluid. The engine will eventually enter
SOON EXHAUST
into an idle only mode. The diesel exhaust fluid
FLUID EMPTY
must be replenished to resume normal operation
of the vehicle. Refer to your diesel supplement
for more information.
ENGINE IDLED Displayed when a problem exists with the SCR
SEE OWNER’S
system. The vehicle will enter into an idle-only
MANUAL EXHAUST mode. If the exhaust fluid is empty, it must be
replenished to resume normal operation of the
FLUID EMPTY
vehicle. Refer to your diesel supplement for more
information.
IN XX MILES, SPEED Displayed when the SCR system detects a fault.
LIMITED TO 50 MPH The vehicle’s top speed will become limited in
EXHAUST FLUID
the displayed distance starting at 50 miles
(80 km) and count down from this point. Refer
SYSTEM FAULT
to your diesel supplement for more information.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
SPEED LIMITED TO Displayed when the SCR system detects a fault.
50 MPH UPON
The vehicle’s top speed will become limited upon
RESTART EXHAUST restarting. Refer to your diesel supplement for
FLUID SYSTEM
more information. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
FAULT

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays
Diesel Messages
SPEED LIMITED TO
50 MPH EXHAUST
FLUID SYSTEM
FAULT
ENGINE IDLED
SOON EXHAUST
FLUID SYSTEM
FAULT SEE MANUAL

125

Action / Description
Displayed when the SCR system detects a fault.
The vehicle’s top speed is limited. Refer to your
diesel supplement for more information. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Displayed when the SCR system detects a fault.
The engine will enter into an idle only mode.
Refer to your diesel supplement for more
information. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
ENGINE IDLED Displayed when the SCR system detects a fault.
SEE OWNER’S
The engine will eventually enter into an idle-only
MANUAL EXHAUST mode. Press OK to override the idle mode. Refer
to your diesel supplement for more information.
FLUID SYSTEM
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
FAULT
possible.
FUEL FILTER
Displayed when a fuel filter change is required.
CHANGE REQUIRED Refer to the scheduled maintenance
information.
REDUCED ENGINE
Displayed approximately two hours after the
DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST SYSTEM message
POWER
has displayed and the vehicle operator has not
driven the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) for at
least 20 minutes to clean the DPF. At this point
the vehicle must be serviced by an authorized
dealer. This message is normal. Refer to your
diesel supplement for more information.
WATER IN FUEL
Displayed when the water separator has reached
DRAIN FILTER SEE a predetermined capacity and needs to be
drained. Refer to your diesel supplement for
MANUAL
more information.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

126
Diesel Messages
LOW FUEL
PRESSURE

Information Displays
Action / Description
If this message appears during a cold start
or during cold operation 32°F (0°C) up to
10 minutes after the initial cold start; monitor
the message center and if it disappears and does
not re-appear after the engine has fully warmed
up, the low fuel pressure message is most likely
caused by waxed or gelled fuel. To prevent this,
use an anti-gel additive. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information. The customer
warranty may be void from using additives that
do not meet or exceed Ford specifications. If the
low fuel pressure message persistently appears
after re-fueling during the cold start and cold
operation conditions defined previously and then
disappear when the engine has fully warmed up,
consider different fuel sources.
Low Fuel Operation: If the message appears
when the vehicle is warm and during low fuel
tank level operation, i.e. the tank level is at or
very near empty, refuel the vehicle and operate
the vehicle. If the message reappears after
fueling, see below. If the message does not come
back, the low fuel pressure condition was due to
low fuel levels in the fuel tank.
Normal Operation: If the message appears during
normal operation when the vehicle / engine is
fully warm, and fuel level is not low, the fuel
filters must be changed regardless of the
maintenance schedule interval. If replacement
of the fuel filter does not remedy the low fuel
pressure message during normal operation as
defined above, please take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays

127

Door Messages
X DOOR AJAR

Action / Description
Displayed when the corresponding door is not
completely closed.

Drivetrain Messages
LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL
ENGAGED/
DISENGAGED
LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL
DISENGAGED
TO ENGAGE
LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL
SLOW TO XX
MPH/KM/H
TO ENGAGE
LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL
RELEASE
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL
SLOW VEHICLE TO
XX KM/H FOR ELD

Action / Description
Displayed when the electronic locking
differential is engaged.

SLOW VEHICLE TO
XX MPH FOR ELD
CHECK LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL

SHIFT TO PARK

Displayed when the electronic locking
differential is disengaged.
Displayed when the electronic locking
differential requests a certain speed
requirement to engage.

Displayed when the electronic locking
differential request the accelerator to be
released in order to engage.

Displayed when the vehicle speed requirement
for the electronic locking differential mode has
not been met.
Displayed when the vehicle speed requirement
for the electronic locking differential mode has
not been met.
Displayed when an electronic locking
differential (ELD) system fault is present.
For more information, refer to the Four-Wheel
Drive chapter.
Displays as a reminder to shift into park.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

128

Information Displays

Engine Messages
TRANSPORT MODE
CONTACT DEALER

Action / Description
Displayed when the vehicle is set to transport
mode. The transport mode is used to disable
certain vehicle functions to prevent battery
discharge when the vehicle is in the
transport/inventory phase and is not driven
long enough to maintain the battery’s charge.
This mode can be disabled by doing the
following: Turn the ignition on, without
starting the engine. Press and release the
brake pedal fully five times and press the
hazard button four times (on, off, on, off)
within 10 seconds.
POWER REDUCED
Displayed when the engine temperature gauge
TO LOWER ENGINE needle moves to H. You may notice reduced
engine power. Refer to Engine coolant in the
TEMP
Maintenance chapter for more information.
Fuel Messages
CHECK FUEL CAP
FUEL LEVEL LOW
Key Messages
COULD NOT
PROGRAM
INTEGRATED KEY
TO DRIVE: TURN
KEY TO ON
Maintenance
Messages
ENGINE OIL
CHANGE SOON
OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED

Action / Description
Displayed when the fuel cap may not be
properly closed.
Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
Action / Description
Displayed when an attempt is made to
program a fifth integrated key. For more
information, refer to the Security chapter.
Displayed when the factory equipped remote
start is activated.
Action / Description
Displayed when the engine oil life is nearing
its end.
Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays
Maintenance
Messages
SERVICE POWER
STEERING
SERVICE POWER
STEERING NOW

POWER STEERING
ASSIST FAULT
MyKey® Messages
MYKEY ACTIVE
DRIVE SAFELY
ADVANCETRAC
ALWAYS ON MYKEY SETTING
VEHICLE NEAR
TOP SPEED

129

Action / Description
The power steering system has detected a
condition that requires service. See your
authorized dealer.
The power steering system has detected a
condition within the power steering system
that requires service immediately. See your
authorized dealer.
The power steering system has disabled power
steering assist due to a system error. See your
authorized dealer.
Action / Description
Displayed when MyKey® is active.
Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and the
ESC cannot be deactivated.

Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
VEHICLE AT TOP
Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and the
SPEED - MYKEY
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is 80 mph (130 km/h).
SETTING
SPEED LIMITED TO Displayed when starting the vehicle and
MyKey® is in use and the MyKey speed limit
80 MPH
is on.
SPEED LIMITED TO Displayed when starting the vehicle and
MyKey® is in use and the MyKey speed limit
130 KM/H
is on
CHECK SPEED
Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and the
optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds
DRIVE SAFELY
a preselected speed.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

130

Information Displays

MyKey® Messages
BUCKLE UP TO
UNMUTE AUDIO
MYKEY COULD NOT
PROGRAM

Action / Description
Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and
Belt-Minder® is activated.
Displayed when an attempt is made to
program a spare key using two existing
MyKeys.

Park Aid Messages
CHECK REAR PARK
AID
REAR PARK AID
OFF
REAR PARK AID ON

Action / Description
Displayed when the transmission is in R
(Reverse) and the park aid is disabled.
Displayed when the rear park aid is disabled
by the driver.
Displayed when the rear park aid is enabled.

Off Road Messages
HILL DESCENT
CONTROL OFF
FOR HILL
DESCENT REDUCE
SPEED
FOR HILL
DESCENT SELECT
GEAR
HILL DESCENT DRIVER RESUME
CONTROL
HILL DESCENT
CONTROL FAULT
HILL DESCENT
CONTROL OFF
SYSTEM COOLING
HILL DESCENT
CONTROL READY

Action / Description
Displayed when hill descent control mode
becomes inactive.
Displayed when the vehicle speed requirement
for off-road mode entry has not been met.
Displayed when the driver is able to select a
transmission gear for hill descent mode.
Displayed when hill descent control mode is
deactivated and the driver must resume
control.
Displayed when a hill descent system fault is
present.
Displayed when the hill descent system is
cooling due to overuse.
Displayed when the hill descent control switch
is turned on.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays

131

Tire Messages
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITOR FAULT

Action / Description
Displays when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure.
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring
system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is
malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use.
SENSOR FAULT
For more information on how the system
operates under these conditions refer to the
Wheels and Tires chapter. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
TIRES NOT
Displayed when an error occurs while training
TRAINED - REPEAT the TPMS. Refer to the Wheels and Tires
chapter for more information.
TRAIN LEFT
Displayed when training the TPMS.
FRONT TIRE
TRAIN LEFT REAR Displayed when training the TPMS.
TIRE
TRAIN RIGHT
Displayed when training the TPMS.
FRONT TIRE
TRAIN RIGHT REAR Displayed when training the TPMS.
TIRE
TRAINING
Displayed when training of the TPMS system
is complete.
COMPLETE
Trailer Messages
TRAILER BRAKE
GAIN: XX.X
[OUTPUT]
TRAILER BRAKE
GAIN: XX.X NO
TRAILER

Action / Description
Displays the current gain setting for the trailer
brake.
Displays the current gain setting for the trailer
brake when a trailer is not connected.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

132

Information Displays

Trailer Messages
TRAILER BRAKE
MODULE FAULT
TRAILER
CONNECTED
TRAILER
DISCONNECTED

TRAILER SWAY
REDUCE SPEED
WIRING FAULT ON
TRAILER

4WD Messages
CHECK 4X4

4X4 SHIFT IN
PROGRESS
FOR 4X4 LOW
APPLY BRAKE

Action / Description
Displayed and accompanied by a single chime,
in response to faults sensed by the TBC. Refer
to the Towing chapter for more information.
Displayed when a correct trailer connection
(a trailer with electric trailer brakes) is sensed
during a given ignition cycle.
Displayed when a trailer connection becomes
disconnected, either intentionally or
unintentionally, and has been sensed during a
given ignition cycle. Disregard this status if
your vehicle is not equipped with a factory
installed trailer brake controller. This message
may appear when an aftermarket TBC is used
even when the trailer is connected.
Displayed when the trailer sway control has
detected trailer sway.
Displayed if there are certain faults in the
vehicle wiring and trailer wiring/brake system.
Refer to the Towing chapter for more
information.
Action / Description
Displayed when a 4X4 system fault is present.
For more information, refer to Four-wheel
drive chapter.
Displayed when the 4X4 system is making a
shift.
Displayed when trying to select 4X4 LOW.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Information Displays
4WD Messages
FOR 4X4 LOW
SHIFT TO N
FOR 4X4 LOW
SLOW TO 3 MPH
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW
APPLY BRAKE
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW
SHIFT TO N
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW
SLOW TO 3 MPH
SHIFT DELAYED
PULL FORWARD
REDUCE
ACCELERATOR TO
PREVENT WHEEL
SLIP

133

Action / Description
Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected and the
vehicle is stopped.
Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected while the
vehicle is moving.
Displayed when 2WD is selected from 4X4
LOW mode.
Displayed when 2WD is selected while the
vehicle has been stopped in 4X4 LOW.
Displayed when 2WD is selected while the
vehicle is operating in 4X4 LOW.
May display when shifting to or from 4X4
LOW.
Displayed when the vehicle senses that torque
to the drive wheels has overcome the available
traction.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

134

Audio System

GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Distance and
strength
Terrain

Station overload

Radio reception factors
The further you travel from an FM station,
the weaker the signal and the weaker the
reception.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with the reception.
When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result in the
audio system muting.

CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.75-inch (12 centimeter)
audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into
the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become
jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage
CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved
CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge.
Do not clean in a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Audio System

135

MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track
mode (system default) and MP3 folder mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. Note: The maximum
number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation
through the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is important to understand
how the system reads the structures you create. While various files
may be present, (files with extensions other than mp3), only files with
the .mp3 extension are played; other files are ignored by the system.
This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on
your work computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless of being in a specific
folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files in the
current folder.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

136

Audio System

AM/FM

A

B

CLK

G

AUDIO

F

C

D

E
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
A. CLK: Press this button to switch the display between the clock and
radio frequency. To set the time:
1. Press and hold CLK until the hours start to flash.
2. Press the arrow buttons to adjust the hours. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to
set the minutes.
3. Press CLK again to exit clock mode.
B. Tune: Press these arrow buttons to manually search through the radio
frequency band. Press and hold for a fast search. In AUDIO mode, press
the buttons to adjust different sound settings.
C. AUDIO: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass,
Fade and Balance.
D. SEEK: Press this button to go to the previous or next strong station
on the frequency band.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Audio System

137

E. Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until
sound returns.
F. AM/FM: Press this button to select a frequency band.
G. VOL-PUSH:
• Press this button to switch the system off and on.
• Turn the control to adjust the volume.
AM/FM/CD WITH SYNC®

WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
A. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
B. CD slot: Insert a CD.
C. Tune: Press this button to manually search through the radio
frequency band. Press and hold for a fast search.
D. Phone: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC®
system. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

138

Audio System

E. MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.
• If your vehicle is equipped with satellite radio, you can access
different menus by pressing OK.
• Set the time by pressing MENU until SET HOURS or SET
MINUTES appears and using the arrow buttons to adjust the time.
• Set the strongest stations on the radio frequency by pressing MENU
until AUTOSET appears. AUTOSET does not override your original
presets.
• RBDS displays text transmitted by certain radio stations and
searches for music categories. To search for music categories, turn on
RBDS (by using the SEEK buttons when RBDS ON/OFF appears).
Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through categories,
then use the SEEK buttons to begin the search.
• SPEEDVOL (speed compensated volume) allows you to adjust radio
volume to compensate for noise levels when vehicle speed increases.
• Track/Folder is only available on MP3 files when in CD mode. In
track mode, pressing the SEEK arrows allows you to scroll through
all the tracks on the disc. In folder mode, pressing the SEEK arrows
allows you to scroll through all the tracks within the selected folder.
Press the FOLDER buttons to access other folders.
• COMPRESS (Compression) is only available in CD and MP3 modes.
Switching compression on brings the soft and loud passages together
for a more consistent listening level. Use the SEEK buttons and up
and down arrow buttons to switch it on and off.
F. AUX: Press this button to access the media features of the SYNC®
system. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
G. SEEK:
• In radio mode, press and release these buttons to go to the next
(or previous) preset radio station or disc track.
• In CD and MP3 modes, press these buttons to select the next (or
previous) track, or press and hold to advance (or reverse) within the
same track.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Audio System

139

H. Play, Pause and OK:
• Play and Pause allow you to play or pause a track when listening
to a CD.
• OK allows you to confirm commands with phone and media features
of the SYNC system. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
I. SHUFFLE: Play music on the selected CD or MP3 folder in random
order.
J. Folder: Press this button to access the next folder on an MP3 disc.
K. Folder: Press this button to access the previous folder on an MP3
disc.
L. FF: Press this button to manually fast forward in a CD track or MP3
file.
M. REW: Press this button to manually rewind in a CD track or MP3 file.
N. Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until
sound returns.
O. TEXT/SCAN:
• In radio, CD and MP3 modes, press and hold to hear a brief sampling
of radio stations, CD tracks or MP3 files.
• In CD and MP3 modes, press and release to display track title, artist
name and disc title.
Note: In text mode, sometimes the display requires additional text to
show. When the < / > indicator is on, press TEXT and then use the
SEEK buttons to view the additional display text.
P. AM/FM: Press this button to select a frequency band.
Q. VOL-PUSH:
• Press this button to switch the system off and on.
• Turn it to adjust the volume.
R. CD: Press this button to enter CD or MP3 mode.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

140

Audio System

AM/FM/CD SONY AUDIO SYSTEM

A

B

VOL

1

C

2

TUNE

3

MEDIA

4

G

5

6

F

E

D

WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: The MyFord Touch system controls most of the audio features.
See the MyFord Touch chapter for more information.
A. VOL and Power:
• Press this button to switch the system off and on.
• Turn it to adjust the volume.
B. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
C. CD Slot: Insert a CD.
D. TUNE: Turn this control to manually search through the radio
frequency band.
E. Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until
sound returns.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Audio System

141

F. Seek, Reverse and Fast Forward:
• In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of these
buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
• In SIRIUS mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next
channel. If a specific category is selected (such as Jazz, Rock or
News), use these buttons to find the previous or next channel in the
selected category.
• In CD mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next track.
G. MEDIA: Press this button to access different audio modes, such as
AM, FM and A/V Input.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the
settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is
moving.
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location,
such as the center console or the glove box, when your vehicle is
moving. Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop,
which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension cable
must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely
stored while your vehicle is moving.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

142

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Audio System

The auxiliary input jack allows you
to connect and play music from
your portable music player through
your vehicle speakers. You can use
any portable music player designed
for use with headphones. Your audio
extension cable must have male
1⁄8-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors
at each end.
Switch off the engine, radio and portable music player. Set the
parking brake and put the transmission in position P.
Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the
auxiliary input jack.
Switch the radio on. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD.
Adjust the volume as desired.
Switch your portable music player on and adjust its volume to half its
maximum level.
Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display.
You should hear music from your device even if it is low.
Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the
volume level of the FM station or CD. Do this by switching back and
forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls.

USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
The USB port allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory sticks
and charge devices (if supported).
See the SYNC chapter for more
information.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Audio System

143

MEDIA HUB (IF EQUIPPED)
The media hub is located in a compartment on top of the instrument panel.
Push down on the top of the compartment to access the media hub.
A. A/V inputs
B. SD card slot
C. USB ports
C

A

B

For more information, see the MyFord Touch chapter.
SATELLITE RADIO INFORMATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Satellite Radio Channels
SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com
in the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos
is published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna
For optimal reception performance, keep the
obstructions
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

144

Audio System

Potential satellite radio reception issues
Station overload
When you pass a ground-based
broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to
interference
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed SIRIUS
satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of
sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite
radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio
account. When in satellite radio mode, you can view this number by
pressing SIRIUS and memory preset 1 at the same time. To access your
ESN, press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen, then SIRIUS >
Options.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Audio System

145

Troubleshooting
Radio display
Condition
Acquiring
Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
Sat
There is an internal
Fault/SIRIUS
module or system
system failure
failure present.

Possible action
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.

If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition
key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no
Tune to another channel or
longer available.
choose another preset.
Unsubscribed
Your subscription does Contact SIRIUS at
Channel
not include this
1–888–539–7474 to subscribe
channel.
to the channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal
The signal is lost from The signal is blocked. When
the SIRIUS satellite or you move into an open area,
SIRIUS tower to your the signal should return.
vehicle antenna.
Updating
Update of channel
No action required.
programming in
The process may take up to
progress.
three minutes.
Call SIRIUS
Your satellite service is Call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 no longer available.
1–888–539–7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
None Found.
All the channels in the Use the channel guide to turn
Check Channel selected category are off the Lock or Skip function
Guide.
either skipped or
on that station.
locked.
Subscription
SIRIUS has updated
No action required.
Updated
the channels available
for your vehicle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

146

Climate Control

MANUAL CLIMATE SYSTEM

A

B C

R

D

E

F

A/C

J

MAX A/C

I

G

H

A. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
B. Rear defrost and heated mirrors: Turns the heated rear window
and heated mirrors off and on. See Heated windows and mirrors later
in this chapter for more information.
C. Heated mirrors: Turns the heated mirrors off and on (if equipped
with heated mirrors, but not a heated rear window). See Heated
windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more information.
D. Air distribution control: Press to set the air distribution to a
position listed below:
Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
vents and floor vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Climate Control

147

Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
and demister vents.
Distributes air through the floor vents.

E. A/C: Press to turn air conditioning off and on. Air conditioning cools
the vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning when starting
your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three
minutes.
F. Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When the LED on the button is lit, the air currently in
the passenger compartment is being recirculated. Using recirculated air
can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
G. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This position is more economical and efficient
than normal A/C.
H. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated
in your vehicle. Turn to select the desired temperature.
I. Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your
vehicle. Turn to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you switch
the fan off, the windshield may fog up.
J. Power: Press to turn the system off and on. When the system is off,
outside air cannot enter the vehicle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

148

Climate Control

DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

A

B

C D E

A/C

G

F

H

MAX
A/C
PASS
TEMP

R

AUTO

K

J

I

Note: You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
See Menu features in the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch chapter.
A. Power/Driver temperature control: Press to turn the climate
control system off and on. When the system is off, outside air cannot
enter the vehicle.
Turn to increase or decrease the air temperature for the driver side of
the vehicle.
This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone
operation is disengaged.
B. Rear defrost: Turns the heated windows and mirrors off and on.
See Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more
information. If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, this button
turns them on also.
C. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Climate Control

149

D. Air distribution control: Press to set the air distribution to a
position listed below:
Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
vents and floor vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and floor
vents.
Distributes air through the floor vents.
E. A/C: Press to turn air conditioning off and on. Air conditioning cools the
vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning when starting your
vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes.
Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: A/C turns on automatically in MAX A/C, Defrost and Floor/Defrost.
F. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This position is more economical and efficient
than normal A/C.
G. Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When the LED on the button is lit, the air currently in
the passenger compartment is being recirculated. Using recirculated air
can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle. Even when this button is not selected,
air may still recirculate in some instances in order to reduce vehicle
warm-up time in cold conditions or to cool down time in hot conditions.
Note: Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected
or can be turned on manually in any airflow mode except Defrost.
Note: You may notice changes in sound between recirculated mode and
other airflow modes.
Note: For better cooling in hot conditions, recirculated air automatically
engages when the air distribution control is in panel or panel/floor modes
and the air conditioning is on. You can switch to fresh air by pressing the
recirculated air button again.
H. PASS TEMP: Press to switch between single and dual zone. Turn to
increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the
vehicle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

150

Climate Control

I. Fan speed control +: Press to increase the volume of air circulated in
your vehicle.
J. AUTO: Press to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically
determines fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or
recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected
temperature.
K. Fan speed control - : Press to decrease the volume of air circulated
in your vehicle.
GENERAL OPERATING TIPS
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather, select
Defrost. Temperature and fan speed can also be increased to improve
clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start-up or until the vehicle has been aired out.
• A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into position P to continue to receive
cool air from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance in AUTO or panel mode, press MAX A/C.
For maximum cooling performance in panel/floor mode:
1. Move temperature control to the coolest setting.
2. Select A/C and recirculated air to provide colder airflow.
3. Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
comfort.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Climate Control
To
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

151

aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold or humid weather:
Select Floor/Panel.
Select A/C.
Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the
vents located in the middle of the instrument panel.

Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather, select
Defrost. Temperature and fan speed can also be increased to improve
clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start-up or until the vehicle has been aired out.
• A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into position P to continue to receive
cool air from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance in AUTO or panel mode, press
MAX A/C.
For maximum cooling performance in panel/floor mode:
1. Choose the A/C and recirc buttons.
2. Set the temperature to LO.
3. Set the fan to the highest blower setting.
To aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold or humid weather:
1. Select Floor/Panel.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

152

Climate Control

5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
6. To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the
vents located in the middle of the instrument panel.
HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Heated Rear Window
Note: The engine must be running to use this feature.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a sliding rear window, the feature
still operates when the window is opened.
Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. Press
the button again within 10 minutes to switch it off. It switches off
automatically after 10 minutes, or when you switch the ignition off.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines.
Your warranty does not cover this damage.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass that has frozen in place. These actions could
cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Both mirrors heat to remove ice, mist and fog when you turn the rear
window defroster on.
REMOTE START CLIMATE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
The climate control system adjusts the cabin temperature during remote
start.
You cannot adjust the system during remote start operation. Turn the
ignition on to return the system to its previous settings. You can now
make adjustments. You will need to turn certain vehicle-dependent
features back on, such as:
• heated seats
• cooled seats
• heated steering wheel
• heated mirrors
• heated rear window.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Climate Control

153

Manual Climate Systems
In hot weather, the climate control system is set to MAX A/C.
In moderate weather, the system either heats or cools (based on
previous settings). The rear defroster and heated mirrors are not
automatically turned on.
In cold weather, maximum heat is provided in floor/defrost mode. The
rear defroster and heated mirrors are automatically turned on. If your
vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine and a supplemental heater, the
supplemental heater also turns on.
Automatic Climate Systems
Automatic Settings
The climate control system automatically sets the interior temperature to
72°F (22°C).
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C). Cooled seats are set to
high (if available, and selected to AUTO in the information display).
In moderate weather, the system either heats or cools (based on
previous settings). The rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated/cooled
seats are not automatically turned on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C). The heated seats and
heated steering wheel (if equipped) are set to high. The rear defroster
and heated mirrors are automatically turned on.
Heated and Cooled Devices
The climate control system controls other heated and cooled devices
inside the vehicle. These devices (if equipped) may also be switched
on during remote start. Heated devices are typically switched on during
cold weather, and cooled devices during hot weather. If your vehicle
is equipped with a diesel engine and a supplemental heater, the
supplemental heater also turns on.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

154

Seats

SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back
reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect
the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in a
crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat back as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the seat backs to
reduce the risk of injury in a crash or during heavy braking or
when stopping suddenly.
When you use them properly, the
seat, head restraint, safety belt and
airbags will provide optimum
protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow
these guidelines:

• Do not recline the seat back more than 30 degrees from vertical.
• Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as
possible.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of
your head and as far forward as possible, remaining comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel.
We recommend a minimum of 10 inches (250 millimeters) between
your breastbone and the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can
maintain full control of your vehicle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Seats

155

HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of
a crash, you and the passenger occupants should not sit in or
operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its proper
position. Never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
WARNING: Install the head restraint properly to minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seat back to an upright driving or riding position before
adjusting any head restraint. Properly adjust the head restraint so that
the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and
positioned as close as possible to the back of your head. For occupants
of extremely tall stature, adjust the head restraint to its full up position.
Front Seat Head Restraints

The head restraints consist of :
A. an energy absorbing head restraint
B. two steel stems
C. guide sleeve adjust and release button
D. guide sleeve unlock and remove button

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

156

Seats

Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raise: Pull up the head restraint.
Lower:
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push down on the head restraint.
Remove:
1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
Reinstall: Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head
restraint down until it locks.
Front Row Center, Outboard
(Crew Cab), and Rear Seat
Center (Crew Cab) Head
Restraints
Note: The SuperCab has rear
outboard head restraints that are
not removable and are bolted to
the back wall.

Your vehicle may be equipped with head restraints that are
non-adjustable.
The non-adjustable head restraints consist of :
A. an energy absorbing head restraint
B. two steel stems
C. guide sleeve unlock and remove button
Remove:
1. Press and hold buttons C.
2. Pull up the head restraint.
Reinstall: Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head
restraint down until it locks.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Seats

157

Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints may have a tilting feature for extra comfort.
To tilt the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seat back to an upright driving or
riding position.
2. Tilt the head restraint forward by gently pulling
the top of the head restraint.

Once it is in its forward-most position, tilt it forward once more to
release it to the upright position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head restraint backward after it is
tilted. Instead, continue tilting it forward until the head restraint releases
to the upright position.
MANUAL SEATS
Moving the Seats Backward and Forward

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

158

Seats

Recline Adjustment

Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)
The lumbar support control is
located on the outboard side of the
seat. Turn the control to adjust your
support.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Seats

159

POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Before returning the seat back to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seat back.
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seat back when the
vehicle is moving.
The control is located on the
outboard side of the seat. Move the
switch in the direction of the arrow
to raise or lower the seat cushion or
to move the seat forward, backward,
up or down.
Power Recline (if equipped)
Move the switch to recline the seat
back forward or rearward.

Power Lumbar (if equipped)
The control is located on the
outboard side of the seat. Press the
forward or rearward side of the
control for more or less support.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

160

Seats

MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)
This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat, power
mirrors, and adjustable pedals to two programmable positions.
The memory control is located on the driver’s door.
• To program position 1, move the memory features to the
1
desired positions using the associated controls. Press and
hold button 1 for at least two seconds. A chime will
sound confirming that a memory position has been set.
•
To program position 2, repeat the previous procedure
2
using button 2.

A memory position may be programmed at any time.
To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter, see
Remote entry system in the Locks chapter.
A programmed memory position can be recalled:
• in any gearshift position if the ignition is not on.
• only in position P or N if the ignition is on.
The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter unlock control (if the transmitter is programmed to
a memory position) or, when you enter a valid personal entry code
that is programmed to a memory position. The mirrors will move to the
programmed position and the seat will move to the easy entry position.
The seat will move to the final position when the key is in the ignition
(if easy entry feature is enabled).
Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If Equipped)
If the easy entry and exit feature is enabled, this feature automatically
moves the driver’s seat rearward 2 inches (5 centimeters) when the
transmission selector lever is in position P and the key is removed from
the ignition.
If the seat is located less than 2 inches (5 centimeters) from the rear of
the seat track, the seat travel will be less than 2 inches (5 centimeters)
rearward.
The driver’s seat will return to the previous position when the key is put
in the ignition.
This feature is enabled or disabled through the information display.
See the Information Displays chapter for more information.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Seats

161

REAR SEATS
Folding Up the Rear Seats (SuperCab)
1. Pull the control to release the
seat cushion.
2. Rotate the seat cushion up until
it locks into the vertical storage
position.

Returning the Seat to the Seating Position
WARNING: Make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
underneath the seat cushion before returning the seat cushion to
its original position, and that the seat cushion locks into place. Failure
to do so may prevent the seat from operating properly in the event of a
crash, which could increase the risk of serious injury.
1. Pull the control on the side of the seat to release the seat cushion
from the storage position.
2. Push the seat cushion down until it locks into the horizontal position.
Folding the Rear Seat Back (Crew Cab)
1. Pull forward on the control to
fold down the seatback.
2. Pull down on the handle and lift
up on the seatback to return it
to the original position.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

162

Seats

Folding up the Rear Seat Cushion
1. Pull the control to release the seat cushion.
2. Rotate the seat cushion up until it locks into the vertical storage
position.
Returning the Seat to the Seating Position
WARNING: Make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
underneath the seat cushion before returning the seat cushion to
its original position, and that the seat cushion locks into place. Failure
to do so may prevent the seat from operating properly in the event of a
crash, which could increase the risk of serious injury.
1. Pull the control on the side of the seat to release the seat cushion
from the storage position.
2. Push the seat cushion down until it locks into the horizontal position.
Rear Under Seat Storage (If Equipped) (Crew Cab)
The rear seat has storage space located under the seat cushion.
Lift up the lever and flip up the seat
cushion to access the storage space
and the power point (A).

A
To remove the storage space
divider, squeeze the sides and lift it
from the storage tub.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Seats

163

Use your vehicle key to lock the
storage space.

Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element
which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear door armrest.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

164

Seats

To operate the heated seats:
• Push the indicated side of the
control for maximum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.

• Push the indicated side of the
control for minimum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.

The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle. While the
ignition is in the on position, activate the high or low heated seat switch
to enable heating mode. When activated, they will turn off automatically
when the engine is turned off.
The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been
activated.
REAR SEAT ARMREST (IF EQUIPPED)
To use the armrest, rotate it
forward from the seat back.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Seats

165

HEATED AND COOLED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Heated Seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element
which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
• Do not place heavy objects on the seat.
• Do not operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled
on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the heated seats:
Press the heated seat button/symbol to cycle through the
various heat settings and off. Warmer settings are indicated
by more indicator lights.

Cooled Seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
Press the cooled seat button/symbol to cycle through the
various cooling settings and off. Cooler settings are
indicated by more indicator lights.

A/C

If the engine falls below 350 rpm while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

166

Seats

Heated and Cooled Seats Air Filter Replacement (If Equipped)
The heated and cooled seat system includes air filters. They must be
replaced periodically. See scheduled maintenance information.
The filter is located under each front seat. Access the filter from the
second row foot-well area. Move the front seats all the way to the full
front and full up positions to ease access.
To remove a filter:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Push up on the outside rigid
edge of the filter until the tabs are
released, then remove the filter.

To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in the
housing.
2. Push in on the center of the
outside edge of the filter and rotate
clockwise into the housing until it
clips into position.
FRONT SEAT ARMREST (IF EQUIPPED)
To release the armrest and gain
access to the cupholders and seat
back storage bin, press the button
on the right-hand side of the seat
and pull the seat back down.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Seats

167

Pull up on the tab to open the
storage bin.

Lift up on the seat back to return it to the upright position.
To gain access to the under-seat
storage compartment (if equipped)
in your seat cushion, lift the latch
to open the lid. The lid cannot be
opened when the armrest is down.

The under-seat storage compartment
(if equipped) has a programmable
lock. Use the ignition key to program
the lock to the compartment.
Electronics may be powered or
charged using the under-seat storage
compartment auxiliary power point.
See the Auxiliary Power Points
chapter.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

168 Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
The appearance of your vehicle’s universal garage door opener will vary
according to your option package. Before programing, make sure you
identify which transmitter you have by comparing it to the graphics
below.
HomeLink®

Car2U® Home Automation
System

Note: The programming of the two types of universal garage door
openers are different and have different instructions. Identify your
package and refer to the instructions listed in this chapter.
CAR2U® HOME AUTOMATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure that the garage door and security device
are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not
program the system with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener
that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as
required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage
door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 169
Note: Before you begin the programming process, park your vehicle in
front of the garage door opener motor or other device you want to
program.
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your
vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or
replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed,
you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section.
Note: Programming the system to a community gate will require a
unique set of instructions depending on the gate system model. Contact
the help line at 1-866-572-2728 for further information.
Note: If you accidently enter the program mode by pressing and
releasing the outer two buttons or all three buttons simultaneously, do
not press any button until the module times out after a few seconds and
resets to normal mode. When the module has timed out, all three LED
lamps will flash rapidly for a few seconds then turn off. Any settings
should remain as previously set.
The universal garage door opener
replaces the common hand-held
garage door opener with a
three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.

The system includes two primary features, a garage door opener and a
platform for remote activation of devices with the home. As well as being
programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be programmed
to operate security devices and home lighting systems.
Additional system information can be found on-line at
www.learcar2U.com or by calling the toll-free help line 1-866-572-2728.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

170 Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Rolling Code Programming
Note: If you do not follow the time-sensitive instructions, the device will
time out and you will have to repeat the complete procedure.
Note: It may be helpful to have another person assist you in
programming the transmitter.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the outer two
buttons for 1–2 seconds, then
release.
Note: You may need a ladder to
reach the unit and you may need to
remove the cover or lamp lens.
Note: If you cannot locate the learn
button, see the Owner’s Manual for
your garage door opener or call the
toll-free help line at 1-866-572-2728.
3. Press the learn button on the
garage door opener motor.
Note: You will have 10–30 seconds
to complete the following steps.
4. Return to your car.
5. Press and hold the function
button you would like to use to
control the garage door. You may
need to hold the button from
5–20 seconds, during which time
the selected button LED lamp will flash slowly.
6. When the garage door moves, release the button within one second.
The LED lamp will flash rapidly until programming is complete.
7. Press and release the button again. The garage door should move,
confirming that programming is successful. If your garage door does not
operate, repeat the previous steps.
The LED lamp above the selected button will illuminate to confirm that
the system is responding to the button command.
To program another rolling code device, repeat Steps 1 through 6,
substituting a different function button in Step 5.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 171
Fixed Code Programming
Note: It may be helpful to have another person assist you in
programming the transmitter.
To program units with fixed code
DIP switches, you will need the
garage door hand-held transmitter,
paper and a pen or pencil.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Open the battery cover and note
all the switch settings from left to
right.
When the switch is in the up, on, or + position, mark down “left button”.
When the switch is in the middle, neutral, or 0 position, mark down
“middle button”.
When the switch is in the down, off, or – position, mark down “right button”.
3. Press all three function buttons
simultaneously for a few seconds
and then release. The LED lamps
will flash slowly.
Note: The following step must be
completed within 2.5 minutes.
4. Enter the corresponding DIP switch settings from left to right into the
system by pressing and releasing the buttons corresponding to the
settings you noted.
5. Simultaneously press and release all three function buttons. The LED
lamps will illuminate.
6. Press and hold the function
button you would like to use to
control the garage door.
Note: You may need to hold the
button from 5–55 seconds before
observing movement of the garage
door.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

172 Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
7. When the garage door moves, release the button within one second.
When the button is released, the LED lamp will flash slowly.
8. The LED lamp will begin to flash rapidly until programming is
complete. If your garage door does not operate, repeat the previous
steps. Otherwise, call the toll-free help line at 1-866-572-2728.
The LED lamp above the selected button will illuminate to confirm that
the system is responding to the button command.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual
buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two
function buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
LED lamps above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the LED lamps flash, release the buttons. The codes for all
buttons are erased.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
HOMELINK® WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure that the garage door and security device
are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not
program the system with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener
that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as
required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage
door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 173
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your
vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons.
See Erasing the function button codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or
replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed,
you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the function
button codes later in this section.
The universal garage door opener
replaces the common hand-held garage
door opener with a three-button
transmitter that is integrated into
the driver’s sun visor.

The system includes two primary features, a garage door opener and a
platform for remote activation of devices with the home. As well as being
programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be programmed
to operate entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and
home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found online at www.homelink.com
or by calling the toll-free help line on 1-800-355-3515.
Programming
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held transmitter. This will ensure
quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the garage and your key in the
ignition, turn the key so that the ignition is in the on position.
2. Hold your hand-held, garage door
transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 centimeters)
away from the HomeLink button you want
to program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously press
and hold the desired HomeLink button and
the hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT
release either one until the HomeLink
indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates
successful training.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

174 Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for five
seconds, then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the
door. If your garage door does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete. Press and
release the programmed HomeLink button, and then begin programming
your garage door opener. See below for Steps 5 – 7.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for two seconds and then turns to
a constant light, the HomeLink button is not programmed yet. Do the
following:
Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release the
hand-held transmitter button every two seconds. The HomeLink
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly once the HomeLink
function button recognizes and accepts the hand-held transmitter’s
radio frequency signal.
After programming the HomeLink button, follow Steps 5 – 7 as listed
below to program your garage door opener.
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the unit
and you may need to remove the cover or
lamp lens on your garage door opener.
5. Press the learn button on the garage door
opener motor, and then you have 30 seconds
to complete the next step.
6. Return to your car.
7. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for two seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you may
need to repeat this sequence a third time.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink® at
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 175
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights above
the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a single button
To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, follow Step 1 in the Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com
or 1-800-355-3515.
Programming HomeLink to a Genie Intellicode 2 garage door opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter must already be programmed
to operate with the garage door opener.
Programing the transmitters
To program HomeLink to the transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode. To do this:
A. Red LED
B. Green LED

A

B

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

176 Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand-held transmitter for
10 seconds. The LED light will change from green to green and red.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change to Programming
mode. If done properly the LED light will appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches (2–8 centimeters) of the
button on the sun visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button on the sun visor you want to program. The
indicator light on the sun visor will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
Note: the Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds.
If HomeLink does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter
will need to be pressed again. If the Genie transmitter LED displays
green and red, release the button until the LED turns off before pressing
the button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed successfully, the Genie
transmitter must be changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The indicator light will change
from red to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change. If done correctly
the LED will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie Intellicode garage door
opener motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor.
To program HomeLink to the garage
door opener motor:
1. Press and hold the PROGRAM
button on the garage door opener
motor until both blue LED’s turn on.
2. Release the PROGRAM button.
Only the smaller round LED should
be on.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 177
3. Press and release the program button. The larger purple LED will flash
Note: The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand-held transmitter’s
previously programmed button. Both indicator lights on the garage door
opener motor unit should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously programmed button on the sun visor for
two seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink device
To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons, press and hold
the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash.
The LED will begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which time both
buttons should be released. Programming has now been erased, and the
LED should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any
one of the three HomeLink buttons is pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

178

Auxiliary Power Points

AUXILIARY POWER POINTS
WARNING: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the
cigarette lighter socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter
can cause damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: If used when the engine is not running, the battery will discharge.
There may be insufficient power to restart your engine.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power
point. This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12–volt
DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigarette lighter
element.
Note: Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the
battery from being discharged:
• Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is
parked for extended periods.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Auxiliary Power Points

179

Locations
Power points may be found:
• on the instrument panel (two locations).
• inside the center console storage compartment (if equipped).
• on the rear of the center console (if equipped).
• inside the 20-percent front seat console (if equipped).
• inside the rear under seat storage compartment (if equipped).
110 Volt AC Power Points (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power
point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any extension
cord with the 110–volt AC power point since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Do not power multiple devices from your power point.
Doing so may cause the power point to overload and could result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: Always close the protective cap after using the power point
outlets.
Note: The power points will turn off after 13 minutes if the ignition is on
without the engine running. Keep the engine running to use the power
points.
Your 110–volt AC power point outlets are used for powering electrical
devices that require up to 150 watts. Exceeding the 150–watt limit will
cause the power points to cut off the power temporarily to provide
overload protection.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

180

Auxiliary Power Points
Your vehicle may have more than
one power point, located:
• on the back of the center console
• on the instrument panel.

Your power points are not designed for the following electric appliances
and may prevent the appliances from working properly:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric
power tools, compressor-driven refrigerators, etc.
• Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical
equipment, measuring equipment, etc.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply:
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
Power points can switch to a fault mode when overloaded, overheated
or shorted. Unplug your device and turn the ignition off then on for
overloading and shorting conditions. Let the system cool off, then turn
the ignition off then on for an overheating condition.
Power points can provide power whenever the ignition is on and the
indicator lights are on. Each indicator light is located in the top left
corner of the power point.
When the indicator light is:
• on — power point is ready to supply power
• off — power point power supply is off; ignition is not on
• blinking — power point is in fault mode.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Storage Compartments

181

CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Stow items in the cupholder carefully as items may become loose during
hard braking, acceleration or collisions, including hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
• Locking storage compartment
with hanging file folder supports
• Storage for laptop computer, binder
or book between the hanging file
folder support and the passenger
side of the console bin
• One 12-volt power point inside
the storage compartment and one
on the rear of the console
• 110-volt AC power point outlet
on the rear of the console
• Rear cupholders
• Two removable front cupholder
modules
• Removable false bottom tray
for accessing hidden storage
compartment (also has space
for a large cup)

OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of the overhead console will vary according to your
option package.
Press near the rear edge of the door
to open it.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

182

Starting and Stopping the Engine

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle on dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately.
Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 kilometers) after
you connect it. This is because the engine management system must
realign itself with the engine. You may disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing
equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field
strength of radio noise.
When starting your vehicle, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before
and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have
difficulty starting the engine.
If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing snow
conditions, the engine air induction may become partially clogged with
snow and/or ice. If this occurs, the engine may experience a significant
reduction in power output. At the earliest opportunity, clear all the snow
and/or ice away from the air induction inlet. The following starting
instructions are for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine; if your
vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to Starting the engine in
your diesel supplement.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Starting and Stopping the Engine

183

IGNITION SWITCH
Note: To switch the engine off when your vehicle is moving, move the
transmission selector lever to position N. Use the brakes to bring your
vehicle to a safe stop. After your vehicle has stopped, switch the engine
off and move the transmission selector lever to position P. Turn the key
to the accessory or off position.
Note: Do not store the key in the ignition after the vehicle is turned off
and you have left the vehicle. This could cause a drain on the battery.

C
B
D
A

A. Off: The ignition is off.
B. Accessory: Allows the electrical accessories, such as the radio, to
operate while the engine is not running.
C. On: All the electrical circuits are operational. Warning lights are
illuminated. This is the key position when driving.
D. Start: Cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed increases, this helps to warm
up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Move the transmission selector lever to position P.
• Turn the ignition key to the on position.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

184

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Some warning lights briefly illuminate.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to start the engine. Release the key
when the engine starts.
Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it
starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the first try, wait for a short
period and try again.
If you have difficulty starting the engine when the temperature is below
-13°F (-25°C), press the accelerator pedal slightly and try again.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and
follow this procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary
1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P.
2. Turn the key to the off position.
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving
WARNING: When you switch off the engine when your vehicle is
still moving, this results in a loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering does not lock, but higher effort is required. When you
switch off the ignition, some electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off.
1. Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes
to bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, move the transmission selector lever
to position P and turn the key to the off position.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Starting and Stopping the Engine

185

Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Fuel Vehicles Only)
The starting characteristics of all grades of E-85 ethanol make it
unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C).
Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
should supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline).
If summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, 0°F to 32°F
(-18°C to 0°C), you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle
or hesitation until the engine has warmed up.
You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is
cold when operating on E-85 ethanol.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter
damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to off and
wait 30 seconds before trying again.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system. Such
fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible
personal injury.
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E-85 ethanol,
and neither an alternative brand of E-85 ethanol nor an engine block
heater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank improves
cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate on E-85
ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two.
If the Engine Fails to Start Using the Preceding Instructions
(Flexible Fuel Vehicles Only)
1. Press and hold down the accelerator 1/3 to 1/2 way to floor, then
crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up. If the engine still fails to
start, repeat Step 1.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,
have this checked immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you
smell exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

186

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods of
time, we recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 centimeters).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below
0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This
allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment
includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120–volt A/C
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified
by Underwriter’s Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association.
This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors; it could
result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Starting and Stopping the Engine

187

• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and the
heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could
cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of
combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly
connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving
your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Keep plug terminals clean and free of dirt and corrosion.
• Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use.
Clean them with a dry cloth, if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use.
The system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours of operation. Using the
heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance
and unnecessarily uses electricity.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

188

Fuel and Refueling

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if
misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never
allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped
into an ungrounded fuel container.
WARNING: Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded
gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable. If your vehicle
is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures,
damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Fuel and Refueling

189

Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling
your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before fueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuels such as
gasoline and ethanol are highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death
or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of
fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline and/or
ethanol vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In
sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result.
If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with
soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience
an adverse reaction.
• FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85% ethanol. Any fuel blends
containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as “Fuel
Ethanol.” To identify if your vehicle is an FFV, it may be equipped
with a yellow fuel cap with the text “E85/Gasoline”, or check if there
is a label on the fuel filler door.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

190

Fuel and Refueling

Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor, beer
and wine. It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field
corn and sugar cane. When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels,
a small amount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use.
The resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it
is denatured with 2% to 5% gasoline and is suitable for automotive use.
During the summer season, fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 85%
denatured ethanol (Ed85) and 15% unleaded gasoline. The fuel ethanol
has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline
and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power.
Winter blends may contain up to 75% denatured ethanol (Ed75) and up
to 25% unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts. Severely cold
weather may require additional measures for reliable starting. Refer to
the Starting chapter
Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline. It corrodes some metals
and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell, break down or
become brittle and crack, especially when mixed with gasoline. Special
materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles
and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers.
FUEL QUALITY
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage and a loss of vehicle performance; repairs may not be
covered under warranty.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Choosing the Right Fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 15% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel fuel, fuel-methanol,
leaded fuel or any other fuel because it could damage or impair the
emission control system.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. The use of leaded fuel
is prohibited by law.
Diesel engine (if equipped)
Refer to the diesel supplement for information regarding diesel fuel
recommendations and requirements of your diesel-powered truck.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Fuel and Refueling

191

Choosing the Right Fuel With a Flex Fuel Vehicle (If Equipped)
Note: If your vehicle is FFV capable, it will have a yellow colored fuel cap.
Flex fuel vehicles are designed to use only ethanol fuel blends which
contains 51 to 83% ethanol and UNLEADED FUEL Regular unleaded
gasoline or any mixture of the two fuels.
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do
switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible—at
least half a tank. Do not add less than five gallons (18.9 liters) when
refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 kilometers) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in
ethanol concentration. If you exclusively use E85 fuel, it is recommended
to fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline at each scheduled oil
change.
Octane Recommendations
Regular unleaded gasoline with a
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some stations offer
fuels posted as Regular with an
(R+M)/2 METHOD
octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not
recommended.
Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some stations offer fuels posted as “Regular” with an
octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with
octane levels below 87 are not recommended.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.

87

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

192

Fuel and Refueling

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The service engine soon indicator may come on. For more information
on the service engine soon indicator, refer to the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
See Settings in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on
calculating DTE (Distance to empty).
Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels the fuel system. This could damage the
fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto the ground
instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the fuel system
with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system and its
seal and cause injury to you or others.
Use the following directions when filling from a portable fuel container:
1. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counter clockwise.
2. Slowly insert the portable fuel container into the fuel filler opening.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.
4. When done, remove the portable fuel container nozzle and reinstall
fuel cap. Insert fuel cap into fuel filler opening and turn clockwise until a
click is heard.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Fuel and Refueling

193

REFUELING

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are refueling.
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle - this is against the law in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling.

Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive
pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in
possible personal injury.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

194

Fuel and Refueling

Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct
genuine Ford, Motorcraft® or other certified fuel filler cap is not used.
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4th turn on and
off feature. When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn clockwise until it clicks at
least once.
If the Check Fuel Cap light or a Check Fuel Cap message appears in the
instrument cluster and stays on after you start the engine, the fuel filler
cap may not be properly installed.
If the fuel cap light remains on, at the next opportunity, safely pull off of
the road, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall
it. The check fuel cap light or Check fuel cap message may not reset
immediately; it may take several driving cycles for the indicators to turn
off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after four or more
hours with the engine off) followed by normal city and highway driving.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Filling the Tank
The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve
combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a
full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve
is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle
after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
reserve still present in the tank.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Fuel and Refueling

195

For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the
engine is left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low–medium–high) each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click–offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers)
of driving (this is your engine’s break-in period); a more accurate
measurement is obtained after 2000 miles–3000 miles (3200
kilometers–4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or
fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy as follows:
Standard: Divide miles traveled by gallons used.
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving
(city or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

196

Fuel and Refueling

Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components
and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in Scheduled Maintenance
Information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft® or Ford-authorized parts are used
for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for complete emission warranty
information.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Fuel and Refueling

197

On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects
the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions
may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle
consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result
in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

198

Fuel and Refueling

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state, provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. See On-board
Diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the
OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered
not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle.
The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once the
engine is started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle
is complete. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above
driving cycle will have to be repeated.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Transmission

199

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Understanding the Shift Positions of the 5–Speed Automatic
Transmission (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not use the tow/haul feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause
the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Press the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

200

Transmission

D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul Off
D (Overdrive) with tow/haul off is the normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through five.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul On
The tow/haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using tow/haul.
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the end of the gearshift
lever.
TOW/HAUL

The TOW HAUL indicator light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster.
Tow/haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load conditions,
the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control the
vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the pedals being pressed.
The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based upon the
amount the pedal is depressed.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will
automatically return to normal D (Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).
3 (Third)
Transmission starts and operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Transmission

201

1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Overdrive) or D (Drive).
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Understanding the Shift Positions of a 6–Speed Automatic
Transmission (If Equipped)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the tow/haul feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause
the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.

P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

202

Transmission

To put your vehicle in gear:
1. Start the engine
2. Press the brake pedal
3. Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
1. Come to a complete stop
2. Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul Off
D (Overdrive) with tow/haul off is the normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul On
The tow/haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using tow/haul.
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the end of the gearshift
lever.
TOW/HAUL

The TOW HAUL indicator light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Transmission

203

Tow/haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load conditions,
the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control the vehicle
speed when descending a hill, without the pedals being pressed.
The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based upon the
amount the brake pedal is pressed.
Tow/haul may be automatically activated (without pressing the tow/haul
button). This provides engine braking to assist the vehicles braking
system when going downhill and repetitive braking is sensed. Once the
tow/haul mode has been automatically activated it will not automatically
deactivate.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The tow/haul light will
no longer be illuminated.
Tow/haul will also deactivate when the vehicle is powered down for a few
minutes.
M (Manual) without Overdrive
With the gearshift lever in M (Manual), the driver can change gears up
or down as desired. This is called SelectShift Automatic™ transmission
(SST) mode. By moving the gearshift lever from drive position D
(Overdrive) to M (Manual) you now have control of selecting the gear
you desire using buttons on the shift lever.
To return to normal D (Overdrive) position, move the shift lever back
from M to D.
• The transmission will operate in gears one through six.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

204

Transmission

Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Overdrive).
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Understanding your SelectShift Automatic® transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift Automatic™ transmission
gearshift lever. SelectShift Automatic™ transmission gives you the ability
to change gears up or down (without a clutch) as desired.
Use the buttons on the shifter to
lock or unlock gears and manually
select gears. Press the + button to
upshift or the – button to downshift.
TOW/HAUL

With the gearshift lever in D
(Drive), press the – button to
activate SelectShift. The available
and selected gears will be indicated
on the instrument cluster.

All available gears will be displayed with the current gear indicated.
Press the – button again to lock out gears beginning with the highest
gear. Example: press the – button twice to lock out 6th and 5th gears.
Only the available gears will be displayed and the transmission will
automatically shift between the available gears. Press the + button to
unlock gears.
By moving the gearshift lever from the D (Drive) position to the M
(Manual) position you may now manually select the gear you desire.
Only the current gear will be displayed. Press the + button or the –
button to upshift or downshift. If the – button is pressed at a vehicle
speed that would cause an engine overspeed, the requested gear will
flash then disappear and the transmission will remain in the current gear.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Transmission

205

Recommended shift speeds
Upshift according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel
economy)
Shift from:
Gasoline engines
Diesel engines
1–2
15 mph (24 km/h)
12 mph (19 km/h)
2–3
25 mph (40 km/h)
19 mph (31 km/h)
3–4
40 mph (64 km/h)
26 mph (42 km/h)
4–5
45 mph (72 km/h)
34 mph (55 km/h)
5–6
50 mph (80 km/h)
46 mph (74 km/h)
In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which may
cause it to stall, SelectShift will still automatically make some downshifts
if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time. Although
SelectShift will make some downshifts for you, it will still allow you to
downshift at any time as long as the SelectShift determines that the
engine will not be damaged from over-revving.
SelectShift will not automatically upshift, even if the engine is
approaching the RPM limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing
the + button.
Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held
without shifting.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning
This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent
shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may
have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This operation is considered normal
and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery
installed, the strategy must be relearned.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

206

Transmission

Brake-shift interlock
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brake lamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you will be taking
the vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely.
To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the 3 (on) position and the brake pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to
the Fuses chapter.
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P
(Park):
1. Apply the parking brake. Turn the ignition key to 1 (off), then remove
the key.
2. Move the steering column to the full down and full rearward position
(toward the driver’s seat).
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
4. Place fingers into hole where the gearshift lever boot was removed
from and pull top half of shroud up and forward to separate it from the
lower half of the shroud. There is a hinge at the forward edge of the top
shroud. Roll the top half of the shroud upward on the hinge point to
clear the hazard flasher button, then pull straight rearward toward the
driver’s seat to remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Transmission

207

6. Remove the three fasteners
under the column that secure the
lower shroud half to the column.

7. Pull the lock lever into the full
unlocked position and remove the
lower shroud cover by pulling the
lever handle through the slot in the
cover.

8. Apply the brake and move the gearshift lever into N (Neutral).
9. Start the vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order, making sure to engage the
hinge pivots between the upper and lower halves of the shroud. Keep
slight pressure in the forward direction as the halves are rotated
together.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

208

Transmission

HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The hill start assist feature does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave the vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).
WARNING: You must remain in the vehicle once you have
activated the hill start assist feature.
WARNING: During all times, you are responsible for controlling
the vehicle, supervising the hill start assist system and
intervening, if required.
WARNING: If the engine is revved excessively, or if a
malfunction is detected when the hill start assist feature is
active, the hill start assist feature will be deactivated.
Hill start assist keeps your vehicle stationary long enough to move your
foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal when your vehicle is
on a slope.
The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed
sufficient drive to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, (for example from a car
park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space).
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill.
Keep the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope, the hill start assist
feature will be activated automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle will
remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two or three
seconds. This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the
process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will be released
automatically.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

209

USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (IF EQUIPPED )
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see General Information in the Wheels
and Tires chapter.
Note: Do not use 4X4 mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will
produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive
components. 4X4 mode is only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
Note: If 4X4 low is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph
(5 km/h), the 4WD system will not perform a shift. This is normal and
should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 Low)
for proper operation.
Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4WD system (if equipped)
Note: Some vehicles may be equipped with wheel ornaments that cover
the 4x4 manual hub lock. These ornaments must be removed to access
the manual hub locks.
Note: The vehicle should not be driven in 4X4 High or 4X4 Low modes
with the hub locks set to FREE as this condition may damage driveline
system components.
The 4WD system is engaged or
disengaged by rotating the control
for both front wheel hub locks from
the FREE or LOCK position, then
manually engaging or disengaging
the transfer case with the
floor-mounted shifter. For increased
fuel economy in 2WD, rotate both
hub locks to the FREE position.

Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly (ESOF) 4WD system (if equipped)
Note: If 4X4 Low is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph
(5 km/h), the 4WD system will not perform a shift. This is normal and
should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 Low)
for proper system operation.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

210

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

Note: Auto-manual hub locks can be manually overridden by rotating the
hub lock control from AUTO to LOCK.
For proper operation, make sure
that each hub is fully engaged and
that both hub locks are set to the
same position (both set to LOCK
or both set to AUTO). To engage
LOCK, turn the hub locks
completely clockwise; to engage
AUTO, turn the hub locks
completely counterclockwise.
The ESOF 4WD system:
• provides 4x4 High engagement and disengagement while the vehicle is
moving.
• is operated by a rotary control located on the instrument panel that
allows you select 4x2, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low operation.
• uses auto-manual hub locks that can be engaged and disengaged
automatically based on the 4x4 mode selected.
• will increase fuel economy when used in the recommended AUTO lock
mode.
4WD Indicator Lights
The indicator lights illuminate in the message center in the
reconfigurable telltale (RTT) location under the following conditions.
Refer to Warning Lamps and Indicators in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present, the system will typically
remain in whichever 4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault condition
occurring. It will not default to 4X2 in all circumstances. When this
warning is displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
4X2 - Momentarily illuminates when 2H is selected.
4X4 HIGH - Continuously illuminates when 4H is selected.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

211

4X4 LOW - Continuously illuminates when 4L is selected.

CHECK 4X4 - Displays when a 4X4 fault is present.

Using a Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4wd system (if equipped)
Note: High shift efforts may be encountered when attempting to shift
into and out of 4x4 modes. It is recommended to allow the vehicle to roll
at a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h) when shifting between modes.
• 2H (2WD): For general on-road
driving. Sends power to the rear
wheels only and should be used
for street and highway driving.
Provides optimal smoothness and
fuel economy at high speeds.
• 4H (4x4 High): Used for extra
traction such as in snow or icy
roads or in off road situations.
This mode is not intended for
use on dry pavement.
• N (Neutral): Only used when towing the vehicle. No power to front
or rear wheels.
• 4L (4x4 Low): Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all
four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off road applications
such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects.
Shifting between system modes
Note: Do not perform these operations if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4x4 system shifts or engages.
This is normal. In order to reduce engagement noise, it is recommended
that all shifts be performed at speeds below 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: The vehicle should not be driven in 4X4 High with the hub locks
disengaged as this condition may damage driveline system components.
• Engage the locking hubs by rotating the hub lock control from FREE
to LOCK, then move the transfer case lever from 2H (2WD) to 4H
(4x4 High) at a stop or a vehicle speed below 3 mph (5 km/h).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

212

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

• Move the transfer case lever from 4H (4x4 High) to 2H (2WD) at a stop
or a vehicle speed below 3 mph (5 km/h), then disengage the locking
hubs (optional) by rotating the hub lock control from LOCK to FREE.
• For proper operation, make sure that both indicator arrows on the
hub are aligned, and that both hubs are set to either FREE or LOCK.
Shifting to/from 4L (4x4 Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
3. Move the transfer case shift lever through N (Neutral) directly to the
desired position.
4. If the transfer case does not, or only partially moves to the desired
position, perform a shift with the transmission in N (Neutral) and the
vehicle rolling at a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h).
5. If shifting to 2H (2WD) with the vehicle at a complete stop, disengage
the locking hubs (optional) by rotating the hub lock control from LOCK
to FREE.
Using the N (Neutral) position
WARNING: Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking
brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
The transfer case neutral position
overrides the transmission and puts
the vehicle in neutral regardless of
transmission gearshift lever position.
The vehicle can move forward or
backwards.
This position should only be used
when towing the vehicle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

213

Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD system (If Equipped)
2H (2WD) - For general on-road
2H
driving. Sends power to the rear
4H
wheels only and should be used
4L
for street and highway driving.
Provides optimal smoothness and
fuel economy at high speeds.
4H (4X4 HIGH) - Used for extra
traction such as in snow or icy
roads or in off road situations.
This mode is not intended for
use on dry pavement.
4L (4X4 LOW) - Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all
four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off-road applications
such as deep sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4x4 low)
will not engage while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is
normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from
4L (4x4 low) for proper operation.
Shifting between system modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator pedal while performing a
shift will improve engagement/disengagement times.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
You can move the control from 2H or 4H at a stop or while driving.
The information display may display a message indicating a 4X4 shift is
in progress. Once the shift is complete the message center will then
display the system mode selected.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is displayed in the information
display during the mode shift, transfer case gear tooth blockage is
present. To alleviate this condition, place the transmission in a forward
gear and move the vehicle forward approximately 5 feet (2 meters) to
allow the transfer case to complete the mode shift.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

214

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 low)
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4x4 low mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
1. Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired position.
The information display will display a message indicating a 4X4 shift is
in progress. The information display will then display the system mode
selected. If any of the above shift conditions are not met, the shift will
not occur and the information display will display information guiding the
driver through the proper shifting procedures.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is displayed in the information
display, transfer case gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate this
condition, place the transmission in a forward gear, move the vehicle
forward approximately 5 feet (1.5 m), and shift the transmission back
to neutral to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift.
Electronic Locking Differential (ELD) (If Equipped)
Note: The ELD is designed for off-road use only and is not intended for
use on dry pavement. Using the ELD on dry pavement will result in
increased tire wear, noise and vibration.
The electronic locking differential (ELD) is a device housed in the rear
axle which allows both rear wheels to turn at the same speed. It provides
added traction on slippery and/or off road surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. The ELD may be locked or
unlocked by the vehicle operator and can be engaged or disengaged on
the fly. When the axle is unlocked it will function like a standard rear
axle. When the axle is locked it will not allow the rear wheels to rotate
at different speeds when turning.
The ELD is affected by the following conditions:
• On 2WD vehicles and 4WD vehicles in 2H (4X2) or 4H (4X4 High), the
ELD will not engage if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• On 2WD vehicles and 4WD vehicles in 2H (4X2) or 4H (4X4 High), the
ELD will automatically disengage at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) and
will automatically reengage at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h).
• On 4WD vehicles in 4L (4X4 Low), the ELD can be engaged at any
speed and will not automatically disengage.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

215

Activating the Electronic Locking Differential (ELD)
Note: The ELD may have difficulty disengaging either by operator
command or automatically if the driveline is under torque. If driving
conditions allow, releasing the accelerator pedal or turning the steering
wheel in the opposite direction may assist in disengagement.
Note: The ELD is designed for off-road use only and is not intended for
use on dry pavement.
For vehicles equipped with an
2H
electronic shift 4WD system:
4H
Pull the 4WD control knob toward
4L
you.

For 2WD vehicles and vehicles
equipped with a manual shift
4WD system:
Turn the control to ON.

Once the indicator light is displayed in the information display,
both rear wheel axle shafts will be locked together providing
added traction.
If the indicator does not come on, or the indicator turns off while
driving, one of the following has occurred:
• The vehicle speed is too high.
• The left and right rear wheel speed difference is too high during an
engagement attempt.
• The system has malfunctioned and will be accompanied by a message
in the information display. See your authorized Ford dealer for
assistance.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

216

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

How Your Vehicle Differs From Other Vehicles
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility Vehicles
Note: On some models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to
four-wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary
clunk and ratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for
concern.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a front air dam that can
become damaged (due to reduced ground clearance) when taking your
vehicle off-road. This air dam can be taken off by removing two bolts.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

217

4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be
found in this chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance can be
found in the Maintenance chapter. You should become thoroughly
familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle.
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Basic Operating Principles In Special Conditions
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and
slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

218

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

If your vehicle gets stuck
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to
the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts,
in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid over-driving your vehicle, i.e., turn
the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, not
more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake
pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called
for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or
personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle
to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

219

Mud and water
Note: Driving through deep water may damage the vehicle.
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the
ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud.
As when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the
direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
Tread Lightly is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest
Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help
preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading
lightly.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

220

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills.
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. . A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turn around because you might roll over.
It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss
of vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application and
brake overheating. Do not descend in
neutral; instead, disengage overdrive
or manually shift to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. When you brake hard,
the front wheels can’t turn and if
they aren’t turning, you won’t be able
to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
pump the brakes.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

221

Driving on snow and ice
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require
tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle
slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you
regain control of the vehicle.
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Do not
pump the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional
information on the operation of the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

222

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

Parking
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic
transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral)
position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition
when leaving the vehicle.
Maintenance and modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor Company
strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement
parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Brakes

223

GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous
grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may
be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If your
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while
braking, you should take it to an authorized dealer for inspection.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal
driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does
not contribute to brake noise. See the Vehicle Care chapter for wheel
cleaning instructions.
See the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the
brake system warning light.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry
the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply
steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow your vehicle and
reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the engine off, shift to
position P and apply the parking brake, then inspect the accelerator
pedal for any interferences. If none are found and the condition persists,
have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake heavily by measuring the rate at
which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking efficiency
as long as you press the pedal. Brake assist can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.
Anti-Lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops
by keeping the brakes from locking.
The anti-lock brake system lamp momentarily illuminates when
the ignition is turned on. If the light does not illuminate during
start-up, remains on or flashes, the anti-lock brake system may
be disabled and may need to be serviced.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

224

Brakes
If the anti-lock brake system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective. If the brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking
brake released, have your brake system serviced immediately.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise
from the system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not eliminate the dangers inherent
when:
• you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you.
• your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• you take corners too fast.
• the road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that
the transmission selector lever is securely latched in position P.
To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down until the
pedal stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster will illuminate and
remains illuminated until the parking brake is released.
To release, pull the brake release lever located at the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade or with a trailer, press and hold
the brake pedal down, then set the parking brake. There may be a little
vehicle movement as the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle’s weight.
This is normal and should be no reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then try reapplying the parking brake.
Chock the wheels if required. If the parking brake cannot hold the weight
of the vehicle, the parking brake may need to be serviced or the vehicle
may be overloaded.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Traction Control

225

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of
traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual
wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the
wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system
reduces engine power in order to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
(Dual rear wheel vehicles only)
In certain situations (for example, stuck in snow or mud), turning the
traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin
with full engine power.
Turn the traction control system off by pressing the
stability control button located on the instrument
panel.
If the system cannot be turned off, see the MyKey chapter for more
information.
If traction control is on when your vehicle is put into four-wheel drive
mode (if equipped), the traction control system will be automatically
disabled. Traction control operation will resume when your vehicle is
placed back into two-wheel drive mode.
Engine Only Traction Control
(Dual rear wheel vehicles only)
Button functions
TCS OFF indicator
Default at start-up
Not illuminated
Button pressed
Illuminated
momentarily
Button pressed again
Not illuminated
after deactivation
Transfer case switched to
Illuminated
4WD 1
1

Engaging 4WD automatically disables TCS.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

TCS
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

226

Traction Control

System indicator lights and messages
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the Traction
Control System, the stability control light will illuminate steadily.
Verify that the Traction Control System was not manually disabled
using the stability control button. If the stability control light still
illuminates steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with Traction Control disabled
could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and flashes when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and stays on when the traction control system is
turned off or if a problem occurs in the stability system.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Stability Control

227

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction or wheel and tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac® system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac®
system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible
from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order
to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac® sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac® system could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac® system is an indication that at least
some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting
in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
If your AdvanceTrac® system activates, SLOW DOWN.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

228

Stability Control

The AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™ system helps you keep
control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface. The electronic stability
control portion of the system helps avoid skids and lateral slides and roll
stability control helps avoid a vehicle rollover. The traction control system
helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. See the Traction Control
chapter for details on traction control system operation.
A Vehicle without AdvanceTrac®
with RSC® skidding off its intended
route.
B Vehicle with AdvanceTrac® with
RSC® maintaining control on a
slippery surface.

USING ADVANCETRAC® WITH RSC®
(Single rear wheel vehicles only)
The system automatically activates when you start your engine.
The electronic stability control and roll stability control portions of the
system can be turned off below 35 mph (56 km/h) and are disabled
when the transmission is in position R.
Turn off the traction control system by pressing
the stability control button located on the
instrument panel.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Stability Control
AdvanceTrac® with RSC® Features
(Single rear wheels only)
Stability
Button functions
control
RSC®
ESC
light
Illuminated
Default at start-up
during bulb Enabled
Enabled
check
Button pressed
Illuminated
Enabled
Enabled1
momentarily
solid
Button pressed and
held for more than
Flashes then
Disabled
5 seconds at vehicle
illuminated Disabled
speed under 35 mph
solid2
(56 km/h)
Vehicle speed
exceeds 35 mph
Illuminated
(56 km/h) after
Enabled
Enabled1
button is pressed
solid
and held for more
than 5 seconds
Button pressed again
Not
Enabled
Enabled
after deactivation
illuminated
Transfer case
Illuminated Disabled
Disabled
switched to 4WD
Low 3
1

229

TCS

Enabled
Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled
Disabled

Electronic stability control has reduced sensitivity compared to fully
active system.
2
Lamp light starts blinking for four seconds after entering the press and
hold state.
3
Engaging 4WD Low locked automatically disables roll stability control,
electronic stability control and the traction control system.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

230

Terrain Response

Hill descent control (if equipped)
Hill descent control allows the driver to set and maintain vehicle speed
while descending steep grades in various surface conditions.
WARNING: Hill descent control cannot control descent in all
surface conditions and circumstances, such as ice or extremely
steep grades. Hill descent control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver. Failure to do so may result
in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious injury.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle speeds on downhill grades
between 2 mph (3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system remains armed, but descent speed cannot
be set or maintained.
WARNING: Hill descent control does not provide hill hold at
zero mph (0 km/h). When stopped, the parking brake must be
applied and/or the vehicle must be placed in P (Park) or it may roll
away.
Hill descent control requires a cooling down interval after a period of
sustained use. The amount of time that the feature can remain active
before cooling varies with conditions. The system will provide a warning
in the message center and a chime will sound when the system is about
to disengage for cooling. At this time, manually apply the brakes as
needed to maintain descent speed.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Terrain Response

231

Enabling hill descent control and setting the descent speed
1. Press and release the hill descent button located
on the instrument panel. A light in the cluster will
illuminate and chime will sound when this feature is
activated.

2. To increase descent speed, press the accelerator pedal until the
desired speed is reached. To decrease descent speed, press the brake
pedal until the desired speed is reached.
Whether accelerating or decelerating, once the desired descent speed is
reached, remove your feet from the pedals and the chosen vehicle speed
will be maintained.
Note: Noise from the ABS pump motor may be observed during hill
descent control operation. This is a normal characteristic of the ABS and
should be no reason for concern.
Hill descent modes
• At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h): When the HDC switch is pressed
and HDC is active, the HDC telltale will flash.
• At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h): When the HDC switch is pressed
and conditions are not correct for hill descent activation, the HDC
system will be enabled, the light in the cluster will be on solid and HILL
DESCENT CONTROL READY will be displayed in the message center.
• At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h): When the HDC switch is pressed,
the HDC system will be enabled, the light in the cluster will not be
illuminated and FOR HILL CNTRL, 20 MPH OR LESS will be displayed
in the message center.
Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for hill
descent control messages.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

232

Parking Aids

SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed)
objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, and external
motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in R (Reverse) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors (located on the bumper/fascia) free from snow,
ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the
system’s accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper/fascia, leaving it
misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey®, it is possible to prevent
turning the sensing system off. Refer to the MyKey® chapter.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a fully integrated electronic
trailer brake controller (TBC) and a trailer with electric trailer brakes is
connected to your vehicle, the RSS will be disabled. When the vehicle is
shifted into reverse, the message center display will remain in the Rear
Park Aid Off selection. For more information on the TBC, refer to the
Towing chapter.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Parking Aids

233

The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range
of the bumper area. The system turns on automatically whenever the
ignition is switched on.
When receiving a detection warning, the radio volume is reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio volume
returns to the previous level.
Using the Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible warning
increases. When the obstacle is fewer than 12 inches (30 centimeters)
away, the warning sounds continuously. If a stationary or receding object
is detected farther than 12 inches (30 centimeters) from the side of the
vehicle, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the system detects
an object approaching, the warning sounds again.
A. Coverage area of up to 6 feet
(2 meters) from the rear bumper
(with a decreased coverage area at
the outer corners of the bumper).

A

The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R:
• and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h)
or less.
• but not moving, and a moving object is approaching the rear of the
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than
3 mph (5 km/h).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

234

Parking Aids

REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid
supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum
coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off
while in R (Reverse). Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind
the vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your
vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle.
The camera is located on the
tailgate.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Parking Aids

235

Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when
you place the transmission in R (Reverse). The system uses two types of
guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle:
1. Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path the vehicle is moving in while
reversing in a straight line, which can be helpful when backing into a
parking space or aligning the vehicle with another object behind the
vehicle.
2. Centerline: Helps align the center of the vehicle with an object
(i.e. a trailer).
Note: If the image comes on while the transmission is not in R
(Reverse), have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees what is being towed behind
the vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually
provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen.
In some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow
connector is engaged.
Note: The default setting for the camera delay is off. Press the Settings
button found on the navigation screen (if equipped) to set the camera
delay feature to on or off.
Note: The camera may not operate correctly under the following
conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not
operating.
• The camera’s view is obstructed by mud, water or debris. Clean the
lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

236

Parking Aids

Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: The centerline is only available if fixed guidelines are on.
A. Rear bumper
B. Fixed guideline: Red zone
D
C. Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
C
E
D. Fixed guideline: Green zone
E. Centerline
A
B

The fixed guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel
position.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away. Objects
are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to
the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror
to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle.
Selectable settings for this feature are FIXED and OFF.
Visual Park Aid Alert
Note: Visual park alert is only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph
(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
The visual park aid alert allows the driver to view the area that is being
detected by the reverse sensing system. The system uses red, yellow
and green highlights which appear on top of the video image when an
object is detected by the reverse sensing system. The alert highlights the
closest object detected. The reverse sensing alert can be disabled and if
visual park aid alert is enabled, highlighted areas are still displayed.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Parking Aids

237

Rear Camera Delay
Navigation display
When shifting the transmission out of R (Reverse) and into any gear
other than P (Park), the camera image remains in the display until the
vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h). This occurs when the rear
camera delay feature is on, or until a radio button is selected.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default setting
for the rear camera delay is OFF.
Rearview mirror display
When shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any other gear, the image in
the rearview mirror will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off
to assist in parking or trailer hookup.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

238

Cruise Control

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot
on the accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Note: Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up or down a
steep hill. Apply the brakes if your vehicle speed increases above the set
speed while driving downhill.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more
than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed while driving uphill.
The speed controls are located on
the steering wheel.
/
ON
CNCL
RSM

OFF

- SET +

Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
The indicator will turn on in the instrument cluster.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Cruise Control

239

Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET +.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator will change colors in the instrument cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed
will not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, you will return
to the speed that you previously set.
• Press and hold SET + or SET –. Release the control when you reach
the desired speed.
• Press and release SET + or SET –. The set speed will change in
approximately 1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired
speed. Press and release SET +.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. You will not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RSM.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch the ignition off.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

240

Driving Aids

Steering
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than three to five seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If excessive, check for low
power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your dealer.
• Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused by low power steering fluid.
Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service
by your dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
If any steering components are serviced or replaced, install new
fasteners (many are coated with thread adhesive or have prevailing
torque features which may not be re-used). Never re-use a bolt or nut.
Torque fasteners to specifications in Workshop Manual.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Load Carrying

241

LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading – With and Without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked
it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door (vehicles
exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label). Look for
“THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD
NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum payload. The
payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle
as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket or authorized-dealer
installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of the
equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in
order to determine the new payload.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

242

Load Carrying

WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle
can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control
and vehicle rollover.
Example only:

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Load Carrying

243

Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue
load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position. The total load on each axle
must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide provided by your authorized dealer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position.
The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

244

Load Carrying

• Example only:

WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage,
serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Load Carrying

245

GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation
at GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of
a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

246

Load Carrying

WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and
GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry
you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends average
220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb.
(13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) =
1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kg.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Load Carrying

247

• Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from
the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been
planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with
the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags
of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement
to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry
that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kg. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove
3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) (9 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position.
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and
Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

248

Load Carrying

TAILGATE
Tailgate Lock
The tailgate lock is designed to help
prevent theft of the tailgate.
Insert the ignition key into the
tailgate lock. Turn it to the right
to lock or to the left to unlock the
tailgate.

Tailgate Removal
WARNING: Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting
cargo or cargo falling from vehicle, which could result in
compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle
occupants or others.
Your tailgate is removable to allow more room for loading.
Note: If equipped with a rearview camera system, do Steps 1 through 3
before removing the tailgate.
1. Before removal of the tailgate,
locate and disconnect the tailgate
in-line connector under the pickup
box on the passenger side of the
vehicle near the spare tire.
2. Install a protective cap (tethered
to the wire assembly) onto the
in-line rearview camera system
connector that remains under the
pickup box.
3. Partially lower tailgate and carefully feed tailgate harness up through
the gap between the pickup box and the bumper. Place the tailgate
harness out of the way under the pickup box.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Load Carrying

249

4. Lower the tailgate.
5. Using a screwdriver, gently pry
the spring clip (on each connector)
past the head of the support screw.
Disconnect cable.
6. Disconnect the other cable.
7. Lift tailgate to a 45-degree angle
from horizontal.
8. Lift right side off of its hinge.
9. Lift tailgate to a 80-degree angle from horizontal.
10. Remove tailgate from left side hinge by sliding tailgate to the right.
To install, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Tailgate Step (If Equipped)
This feature allows easier entry into the truck bed.
Note: To reduce risk of falling:
• Operate the step only when the vehicle is on a level surface.
• Operate the step only in areas with sufficient lighting.
• Always open the flip panel to widen step.
• Always use the grab handle when stepping up and down.
• Do not use the step with bare feet.
• Keep the step clean from contamination before use (e.g. snow, mud).
• Keep the step load (you plus the load) below 350 pounds
(159 kilograms).
• Never drive with the step deployed.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

250

Load Carrying

Opening the Tailgate Step
1. Flip down the tailgate.
2. Pull the yellow latch lever to the unlock position to release
the grab handle from its stowed position.
3. Raise the handle upright until
you feel it latch and see the
latch lever in the lock position.
The yellow lever only needs to be
used when releasing the grab
handle.

4. Rotate the center molding to
unlatch the tailgate step and pull it
toward you to extend it.
5. Flip open the step panel to widen
the step.

Close the Tailgate Step
1. Close the step panel, then lift and fully close the tailgate step into the
tailgate.
2. Slide the latch at the bottom of the handle, then lower the handle.
Note:
• Fully close and latch the tailgate step before moving the vehicle.
•
•
•
•

Never drive with the step or grab handle deployed.
Replace the slip resistance tape (serviceable item) if worn out.
Replace the handle molding (serviceable item) if damaged.
Do not tow with the grab handle or step frame.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Load Carrying

251

BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: This feature is not intended for off-road usage.
Note: Make sure the locking pins and knobs are fully engaged when the
vehicle is in motion.
Note: Make sure all cargo is secured.
Note: The tailgate load must not exceed 150 pounds (68 kilograms)
when the vehicle is in motion.
Note: The bed extender should always be kept in the grocery mode or
stowed position with the tailgate closed when not being used for the
purpose of restraining cargo in the tailgate mode.
To open the bed extender into tailgate mode:
1. Pull the locking pin toward the
center of the vehicle.

2. Open the latches to release the
panels.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

252

Load Carrying
3. Rotate the panels toward the
tailgate.

Repeat Steps 1–3 for the other side of the bed extender.
4. Connect the two panels, then
rotate both knobs a quarter-turn
clockwise to secure the panels.

5. Make sure the latch rod is
inserted into the tailgate hole and
the locking pins on both sides are
engaged into their holes in the
pick-up box.
6. Reverse steps for storage of the
bed extender.

To open the bed extender into
grocery mode, follow Steps 1–4 by
rotating the panels away from the
tailgate. Close the tailgate.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Towing

253

TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Note: For information on electrical items such as fuses or relays, see the
Fuses chapter.
Your vehicle’s load capacity designation is by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an extra load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during, and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when
driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side
trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight.
• Select a tow bar with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward your vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or
shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. You can
find more information about proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing under Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter
and in the RV & Trailer Towing Guide, available at an authorized
dealer.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

254

Towing

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of
loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Ford does not
recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver has
significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and
maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer sway, but reduces it once it
begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too high, the system may turn
on multiple times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at individual wheels and, if
necessary, reduces engine power. If the trailer begins to sway, the
stability control light flashes. The first thing to do is slow your vehicle
down, then pull safely to the side of the road and check for proper
tongue load and trailer load distribution. See the Load Carrying chapter
for specific loading information.
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5000 pounds (2268 kilograms)
when towing with, or by, bumper only.
Note: The total area in square feet (meters) exposed to air resistance of
a moving vehicle and its trailer is the trailer frontal area. Do not exceed
60 feet2 (5.57 meters2) trailer frontal area.
Note: Exceeding this limitation may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low
aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance
and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1000 feet (300 meters) starting at the 1000 foot (300 meter)
elevation point.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Towing

255

Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a
specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified
weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this
specified weight, as your vehicle’s electrical system may not include
the wiring connector needed to use electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II, III and IV trailer or fifth-wheel trailer
provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum
trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following
chart.
To calculate the maximum loaded trailer weight for your vehicle:
1. Start with the gross combined weight rating for your vehicle model
and axle ratio. See the following chart.
2. Subtract all of the following that apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight
• Hitch hardware weight, such as a draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing
• Driver weight
• Passenger(s) weight
• Payload, cargo and luggage weight
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
3. This equals the maximum loaded trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load figures into the payload for your vehicle.
Reduce the total payload by the final trailer tongue weight.
Consult an authorized dealer to determine the maximum trailer weight
allowed for your vehicle if you are not sure.
Further trailer and hitch restrictions exist depending on the type of
trailer and hitch listed. This information follows the table listing the
maximum gross combined weight ratings.
Vehicle type

Rear axle ratio

F–250, F–350 single
rear wheel
F–350 dual rear wheel

3.73
4.30
3.73
4.30
4.88

F–450 and F-550

Maximum GCWR lb. (kg)
19000 (8617)
22000 (9977)
19500 (8844)
22500 (10204)
26000 (11791)

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

256

Towing

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See your
scheduled maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency
gives you.
For load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety
Compliance label and for instructions on calculating your vehicle’s load,
refer to Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter.
Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your
vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
WARNING: On pick-up trucks, the trailer hitch provided on this
vehicle enhances crash protection for the fuel system. Do not
remove!
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10–15% for
conventional towing or 15–25% for fifth wheel towing of the total weight
of the trailer is on the tongue.
Weight-Distributing Hitches
WARNING: Do not adjust a weight-distributing hitch to any
position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it
was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and
could result in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch, always use
the following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle’s front wheel opening
on the fender. This is H1.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Towing

257

3. Securely attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle without the
weight-distributing bars connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle’s front wheel opening
on the fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight-distributing bars so that
the height of your vehicle’s front wheel opening on the fender is
approximately halfway between H1 and H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward your
vehicle. If not, adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat
Steps 2–6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely attaches and locks onto the
hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer brake controls as required by
law or the trailer manufacturer.
Fifth-Wheel Trailer Hitch (If Equipped)
WARNING: The mounting pads in the bed are specifically
designed for certain fifth-wheel trailer hitches and gooseneck ball
hitches. Do not use these mounting pads for other purposes. Doing so
could result in vehicle structural damage, loss of vehicle control, and
personal injury. Contact an authorized dealer to purchase gooseneck
and fifth-wheel hitches that are compatible with your vehicle.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum limit of the
towing system could result in vehicle structural damage, loss of
vehicle control and personal injury.
WARNING: The hitch rating listed on the trailer hitch label is
the maximum possible trailer rating. To find the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your specific vehicle, consult an authorized dealer or
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide provided by an authorized dealer.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a fifth-wheel prep package. This
package enables your vehicle to accept certain fifth-wheel trailer hitches
and gooseneck ball hitches. The fifth-wheel trailer hitch attaches to the
four mounting pads in the pick-up bed. An optional 7–pin trailer wiring
connector may be in the bed as well. The gooseneck ball hitch is a separate
mounting pad from the fifth-wheel hitch, located in the center of the bed.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

258

Towing

Shorter pick-up boxes, such as a 61⁄2-foot box on the F-250 and F-350,
provide less clearance between the cab and the fifth-wheel and
gooseneck trailer compared to longer box pick-ups, such as an 8–foot
box on the F-250 and F-350. When selecting a trailer and tow vehicle, it
is critical to check that this combination provides clearance between the
front of the trailer and tow vehicle for turns up to 90 degrees. Failure to
follow this recommendation could result in the trailer contacting the cab
of the tow vehicle during tight turns that are typical during low-speed
parking and turning maneuvers. This contact could result in damage to
the trailer and tow vehicle.
To find the maximum trailer weight allowed for your vehicle, consult an
authorized dealer or see the RV & Trailer Towing Guide provided by an
authorized dealer.
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the
chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle’s braking system operation is at
the gross vehicle weight rating, not the gross combined weight
rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control
of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds
(680 kilograms) when loaded.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Towing

259

Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
WARNING: The Ford TBC has been verified to be compatible with
trailers having electric-actuated drum brakes (one to four axles)
and some electric-over-hydraulic (EOH) brakes. It will not activate
hydraulic surge-style trailer brakes. It is the responsibility of the customer
to ensure that the trailer brakes are adjusted appropriately, functioning
normally and all electric connections are properly made. Failure to do so
may result in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious injury.
When used properly, the trailer brake controller assists in smooth
and effective trailer braking by powering the trailer’s electric or
electric-over-hydraulic brakes with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
Ford has tested the trailer brake controller to be compatible with several
major brands of electric-over-hydraulic trailer brakes. Contact an
authorized dealer for information on which brands you can use.

A

B

The controller user interface consists of the following:
A. + and - (Gain adjustment buttons): Pressing these buttons adjusts
the controller’s power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments.
You can increase the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer braking) or
decrease it to 0 (no trailer braking). Pressing and holding a button raises
or lowers the setting continuously. The gain setting displays in the
message center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
The controller shows gain setting, output bar graph, and trailer
connectivity status in the information display. They appear in the
information display as follows:
• TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER: Shows the current gain setting
during a given ignition cycle and when adjusting the gain. This also
displays if you use the manual control lever or make gain adjustments
with no trailer connected.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

260

Towing

• TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT = / / / / / /: Displays when you push
your vehicle’s brake pedal, or when you use the manual control. Bar
indicators illuminate in the information display to indicate the amount
of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or
manual control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output;
six bars indicate maximum output.
• TRAILER CONNECTED: Displays when the system senses a
correct trailer wiring connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes)
during a given ignition cycle.
• TRAILER DISCONNECTED: Displays, accompanied by a single
audible chime, when the system senses a trailer connection and then
a disconnection, either intentional or unintentional, during a given
ignition cycle. It also displays if a truck or trailer-wiring fault occurs
causing the trailer to appear disconnected. This message can also
display if you use the manual control lever without a trailer
connected.
B. Manual control lever: Slide the control lever to the left to turn
on the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle’s brakes.
See the following Procedure for adjusting gain section for instructions
on proper use of this feature. If you use the manual control while the
brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs determines the power
sent to the trailer brakes.
• Stop lamps: Using the manual control lever illuminates both the
trailer brake lamps and your vehicle brake lamps except the center
high-mount stop lamp, if you make the proper electrical connection
to the trailer. Pressing your vehicle brake pedal also illuminates both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a traffic-free environment at
speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
The gain setting sets the trailer brake controller for the specific towing
condition. You should change the setting as towing conditions change.
Changes to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road
conditions and weather.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Towing

261

The gain should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking assistance
while making sure the trailer wheels do not lock when using the brakes.
Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition,
functioning normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to
the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric or electric-over-hydraulic
brakes, TRAILER CONNECTED appears in the information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -) buttons to increase or decrease
the gain setting to the desired starting point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a
good starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at
a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual control
lever completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated by squealing tires, reduce the
gain setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the gain setting.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a point just below
trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock-up
may not be attainable even with the maximum gain setting of 10.
Explanation of Information Display Warning Messages
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose the trailer brake controller to
determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred. However, your Ford
warranty does not cover this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT: Displays in response to faults
sensed by the trailer brake controller, accompanied by a single chime.
If this message appears, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair. The controller may still function, but
performance may be degraded.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER: Displays when there is a short circuit
on the electric brake output wire. If the WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER
message displays, accompanied by a single chime, with no trailer
connected, the problem is with your vehicle wiring between the trailer
brake controller and the 7–pin connector at the bumper. If the message
only displays with a trailer connected, the problem is with the trailer
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for assistance. This can be a short to
ground (such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage (such as a pulled pin
on trailer emergency breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes may be
drawing too much current.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

262

Towing

Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer brake controller without
consulting the Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may result.
• Adjust gain setting before using the trailer brake controller for the
first time.
• Adjust gain setting, using the procedure above, whenever road,
weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions change from when
the gain was initially set.
• Only use the manual control lever for proper adjustment of the gain
during trailer setup. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway,
could cause instability of trailer or tow vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The trailer brake
controller does not provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels.
Trailer wheels can lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced
stability of trailer and tow vehicle.
• The trailer brake controller is equipped with a feature that reduces
output at vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) so trailer and
vehicle braking is not jerky or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your vehicle’s brake pedal, not the
controller.
• The controller interacts with the brake control system and powertrain
control system of your vehicle to provide the best performance on
different road conditions.
• Your vehicle’s brake system and the trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing the gain setting on the
controller does not affect the operation of your vehicle’s brakes
whether you attach a trailer or not.
• When you turn the engine off, the controller output is disabled and
the display and module shut down. The controller module and display
turn on when you turn the ignition on.
• The trailer brake controller is only a factory-installed or
dealer-installed item. Ford is not responsible for warranty or
performance of the controller due to misuse or customer installation.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Towing

263

Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the
vehicle’s tail lamp wiring; this may damage the electrical system
resulting in a fire. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible for
assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation. Additional electrical
equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.
Using a Step Bumper (If Equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a
ball with a one-inch (25.4 millimeter) shank diameter. The bumper has a
5000-pound (2268 kilogram) trailer weight and a 500-pound (227 kilogram)
tongue weight capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the hitch ball position, you must install a
frame-mounted trailer hitch.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to get the feel of your
vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning,
make wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts
thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles (80 kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place
the gearshift in position P to aid engine and transmission cooling and
to help A/C performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain.
The speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing
on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not
apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less
effective.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

264

Towing

• If your transmission is equipped with the Tow/Haul feature, use this
when towing. This provides engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac™ with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering maneuvers with a heavily loaded
trailer. This is normal. Turning the corner at a slower speed while
towing may reduce this tendency.
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly conditions,
at the gross combined weight rating (or any combination of these
factors), consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant
(if the axle is not already filled with it). See the Capacities and
Specifications chapter for the lubricant specification.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. Anticipate
stops and brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from
traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels.
(Chocks not included with vehicle.)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare
tire. A “temporary” spare tire is different in size (diameter or width),
tread-type (All-Season or All-Terrain) or is from a different manufacturer
than the road tires on your vehicle. Consult information on the tire label
or Safety Compliance label for limitations when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into
the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from
the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 centimeters)
above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Towing

265

Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle submerges in
water. Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant, which does
not normally require checking or changing unless it is leaking or other
axle repair is required.
Recovery Hooks
WARNING: Using recovery hooks is dangerous and should only
be done by a person familiar with proper vehicle recovery safety
practices. Improper use of recovery hooks may cause hook failure and/or
separation from the vehicle and could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Always slowly remove the slack from the recovery
strap prior to pulling. Failure to do so can introduce significantly
higher loads which can cause the recovery hooks to break off, or the
recovery strap to fail which can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never link two straps together with a clevis pin.
These heavy metal objects could become projectiles if the strap
breaks and can cause serious injury or death.
Your vehicle comes equipped with frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
These hooks should never have a load applied to them greater than the
gross vehicle weight rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
• Never use chains, cables or tow straps with metal hook ends.
• Only use recovery straps that have a minimum breaking strength two
to three times the gross vehicle weight of the stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good condition and free of visible
cuts, tears or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp, heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help absorb the energy in the event
the strap breaks.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

266

Towing

• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not loaded heavier than its gross
vehicle weight rating specified on the certification label.
• Always align the tow vehicle and stuck vehicle in a straight line
(within 10 degrees).
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the vehicle, at a distance of at least
twice the length of the recovery strap. This helps avoid injury from
the hazard of a recovery hook or strap breaking, or a vehicle lurching
into their path.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Towing

267

We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment
to tow your vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company
has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle damage may
occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel drive vehicle towed with the
front wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the
ground.
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive vehicle with all wheels off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment.
However, it is acceptable to use a wheel lift to raise the rear of your
vehicle so long as, depending on vehicle configuration, you perform the
following before towing:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a manual-shift transfer case, make
sure the front wheel hub locks are in the FREE position before
towing.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift-on-the-fly transfer
case, make sure you turn the four-wheel drive control to the 2L
position before towing.
Note: Towing an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel drive vehicle with
the front wheels on the ground without disengaging the front hubs may
cause damage to the automatic transmission.
Note: Towing a two-wheel drive vehicle or an electronic shift-on-the-fly
four-wheel drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground for more
than 50 miles (80 km) or faster than 35 mph (56 km/h) may cause
damage to the automatic transmission.
Note: Using wheel lift equipment to tow a dual rear wheel vehicle
requires removing an outer rear wheel before towing.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

268

Towing

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be flat-towed
(all wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission
configuration) under the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in position N. See Automatic transmission in
the Transmission chapter if you cannot move the transmission into N.
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle. See the Climate
Control chapter.
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing,
such as towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed these
guidelines to prevent damage to your transmission.
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Equipped with a Manual-shift Transfer
Case
1. Put the transmission in position N.
2. Put the transfer case in position N.
3. Put the hub locks in the FREE position. Always make sure that both
hub locks are set to the same position.
Two-wheel Drive Vehicles and Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Equipped
with an Electronic-shift Transfer Case
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as vehicle or
transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle
with all four (4) wheels off the ground, such as when using a car-hauling
trailer. Otherwise, you cannot tow your vehicle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Driving Hints

269

BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles
(480 kilometers). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unique
driving characteristics. Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers). Vary your speed frequently and change up through
the gears early. Do not labor the engine. Do not tow during the first
1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel
economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
There are also some things you may not want to do because they may
reduce your fuel economy:
• Sudden or hard accelerations.
• Rev the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

270

Driving Hints

• Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for
every 400 pounds [180 kilograms] of weight carried).
• Add particular accessories to your vehicle (e.g.; bug deflectors,
rollbars or light bars, running boards, ski racks).
• Drive with the wheels out of alignment.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive with the tonneau cover installed
(if equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Note:If you drove through deep water, check the transmission and
engine fluid. If water is found, replace the fluid.
Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is
unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition
system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Driving Hints

271

If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of
the hubs (for trucks) or the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars).

Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
FLOOR MATS

WARNING: Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the
footwell of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle.
Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to
ensure mats do not shift out of position.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

272

Driving Hints
WARNING (Continued)

• Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle footwell
that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and
interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already
installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of the
vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other
covering. Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the
pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.
• Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning
or replacement.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell
while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become
trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation
causing loss of control of vehicle.
• To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over
the retention post and press down to lock in.
• To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.
SNOWPLOWING
Ford recommends that the Super Duty F-Series used for snow removal
includes the snow plow package option.
Installing the Snowplow
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting and installing the snowplow can
be found in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book, snowplow
section, found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. A typical installation
affects the following:
• Certification to government safety laws such as occupant protection
and airbag deployment, braking, and lighting. Look for an Alterer’s
Label on the vehicle from the snowplow installer certifying that the
installation meets all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Driving Hints

273

• The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity (TARC) is shown on the lower
right side of the vehicle’s Safety Compliance Certification Label. This
applies to Ford-completed vehicles of 10,000 pounds (4,536 kilograms)
GVWR or less. This is the weight of permanently-attached auxiliary
equipment, such as snowplow frame-mounting hardware, that can be
added to the vehicle and satisfy Ford compliance certification to
FMVSS. Exceeding this weight may require the auxiliary equipment
installer additional safety certification responsibility. The Front
Accessory Reserve Capacity (FARC) is added for customer
convenience.
• Rear ballast weight behind the rear axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide front-to-rear weight balance for
proper braking and steering.
• Front wheel toe may require re-adjustment to prevent premature
uneven tire wear. Specifications are found in the Ford Workshop
Manual.
• Headlight aim may require re-adjustment.
• The tire air pressures recommended for general driving are found on
the vehicle’s Safety Certification Label. The maximum cold inflation
pressure for the tire and associated load rating is imprinted on the
tire sidewall. Tire air pressure may require re-adjustment within these
pressure limits to accommodate the additional weight of the snowplow
installation.
• Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps
for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your authorized dealer for
additional information.
Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow Attached
Note: Do not use your vehicle for snow removal until it has been driven
at least 500 miles (800 kilometers).
Ford recommends vehicle speed does not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
when snowplowing.
The attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to the radiator, and may
cause the engine to run at a higher temperature: Attention to engine
temperature is especially important when outside temperatures are
above freezing. Angle the blade to maximize airflow to the radiator and
monitor engine temperature to determine whether a left or right angle
provides the best performance.
Follow the severe duty schedule in your scheduled maintenance
information for engine oil and transmission fluid change intervals.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

274

Driving Hints

Snowplowing with your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your
Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
WARNING: Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment
may effect the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the
risk of injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for
instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger air bag
supplemental restraint system. The supplemental restrain system is
designed to activate in certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when
the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in
sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the air bag. Such driving also
increases the risk of accidents.
Never remove or defeat the tripping mechanisms designed into the snow
removal equipment by its manufacturer. Doing so may cause damage to
the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as possible air bag
deployment.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Driving Hints

275

Transmission operation while plowing
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Operate the vehicle with the transmission in D (Drive with Overdrive)
and tow/haul off.
• Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low) when plowing in small areas at
speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High) when plowing larger areas or
light snow at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R (Reverse) until
the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped.
• If the vehicle is stuck, shift the transmission in a steady motion
between forward and reverse gears. Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a minute. The transmission and tires may be damaged or the
engine can overheat.
VEHICLE USED AS A STATIONARY POWER SOURCE
Auxiliary equipment called power take-off, or PTO, is often added to the
engine or transmission to operate utility equipment. Examples include a
wheel-lift for tow trucks, cranes, tools for construction or tire service,
and pumping fluids. PTO applications draw auxiliary horsepower from
the powertrain, often while the vehicle is stationary. In this condition,
there is limited cooling air flow through the radiator and around the
vehicle that normally occurs when a vehicle is moving. The aftermarket
PTO system installer, having the most knowledge of the final application,
is responsible for determining whether additional chassis heat protection
or powertrain cooling is required, and alerting the user to the safe and
proper operation.
Ford Super Duty Vehicles are approved for use as a stationary (including
split shaft capability) or mobile power source, within limits and operating
guidelines detailed in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book,
found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas, and through the Ford Truck
Body Builders Advisory Service.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

276

Roadside Emergencies

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the U.S.: Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your owner’s manual portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit).
• battery jump start.
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility).
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters)
of gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9 liters) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Fuel delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 kilometers) of the disablement location or
to the nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to
an authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 kilometers) from the
disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 miles (56 kilometers).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

277

Vehicles Sold in the U.S.: Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the owner’s manual
portfolio in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 kilometers). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers
will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In Canada, the card is found in the warranty
information in the glove box.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S.
coverage. Please see your warranty information or visit our website at
www.ford.ca for information on Canadian services and benefits.
Canadian customers who need to obtain roadside information, call
1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

278

Roadside Emergencies

HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
Note: The hazard warning flashers will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in the ignition. If used when the engine
is not running, the battery will lose charge. As a result, there may be
insufficient power to restart your engine.
In some models, the hazard flasher control is located on the
instrument panel.
In other models, this feature is
located on the steering column, just
behind the steering wheel.
Use your hazard warning flashers
when your vehicle is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all
front and rear direction indicators
flash.
• Press the flasher control again to
turn them off.
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by
an authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your
vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to re-enable fuel pump.
Note: If your vehicle has the push button start system, press the
stop/start button twice to reactivate the fuel system.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

279

JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if exposed
to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle.
Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting
to push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may exhibit a combination of firm and soft shifts. This
operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability
of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully
update transmission operation.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
1. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
2. Check all battery terminals. Remove the positive terminal cover
(if equipped) and any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery
cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
3. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

280

Roadside Emergencies

Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
positive (+) cable to the positive
1
(+) terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
3
4
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed
2
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s
engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor or fuel injection
system.

Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

281

Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at a
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from
the ground metal surface.
4
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from
1
the positive (+) terminal of the
2
disabled vehicle’s battery.

3

After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

282

Customer Assistance

GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training,
equipment or both, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the
warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to
another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing Address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.fordowner.com.
These are some of the items that can be found online:
• U.S. Dealer Locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Manuals
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

283

• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center.
In order to help serve you better, please have the following information
available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

284

Customer Assistance

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to
the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18000 mi (29 000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
(a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety
of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
resorting to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

285

THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services
You Need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting
before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
within 40 days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound
by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where
all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in
the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE
decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the
decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

286

Customer Assistance

UTILIZING THE MEDIATION or ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
This pertains to vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers.
In those cases, where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle
service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in
an impartial third party mediation or arbitration program administered by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straightforward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce
a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact our Customer
Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford
of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the United States.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

287

If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804 Email: expcac@ford.com
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern
Mariana Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin
Islands, please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800)
841-FORD (3673)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804 Email: www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470 Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number of Kuwait: 24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

288

Customer Assistance

If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global
Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. In the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. If you require
additional assistance or clarification, please contact the
respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
A French owner’s manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
previously in this section.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

289

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

290

Fuses

CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse with one that has the
specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire.
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse
may have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.

15

Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
COLOR
Fuse
rating

Mini
fuses

Standard
fuses

Maxi
fuses

2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A

Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—

Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural

Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
Natural
Natural
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
—
Brown
Black
Black

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Fuses

291

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, see Changing the
Vehicle Battery in the Maintenance chapter.

The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse or relay
location
1
2
3
4
5

Fuse amp
rating
Relay
—
Relay
—
Relay

6

—

Protected circuits
Blower motor
Not used
Urea heaters (diesel engine)
Not used
Rear window defroster, Heated
mirrors
Not used

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

292

Fuses

Fuse or relay
location
7

Fuse amp
rating
50A*

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

30A*
30A*
—
—
30A*
—
—
Diode
—
15A**
—
—
—
—
30A*
40A*
—
30A*
30A*
25A*
—
Relay
Relay
Relay
—
15A**
15A**
20A**
10A**

35

Protected circuits
Rear window defroster, Heated
mirrors
Passenger seat
Driver seat
Not used
Not used
Smart window motor
Not used
Not used
Fuel pump (diesel engine)
Not used
Heated mirror
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Trailer tow electric brake
Blower motor
Not used
Wipers
Trailer tow park lamps
Urea heaters (diesel engine)
Buss bar
Trailer tow park lamps
A/C clutch
Wipers
Not used
Vehicle power 1
Vehicle power 2 (diesel engine)
Vehicle power 2 (gas engine)
Vehicle power 3

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Fuses
Fuse or relay
location
36
37
38

Fuse amp
rating
15A**
20A**
10A**
Relay

39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46

10A**
15A**
—
20A**
—
—
10A**
10A**

47
48
49
50
51
52

10A**
Relay
10A**
10A**
—
10A**

53
54
55

10A**
10A**
10A**

56

20A**

57
58

Relay
—

293
Protected circuits

Vehicle power 4 (diesel engine)
Vehicle power 4 (gas engine)
Vehicle power 5 (diesel engine)
Powertrain control module
(diesel engine), Electronic
control module (gas engine)
4x4 hub lock
4x4 electronic lock
Not used
Rear heated seats
Not used
Not used
Run/start relay coil
Transmission control module
keep-alive power (diesel engine)
A/C clutch feed
Run/start
Rearview camera system
Blower motor relay coil
Not used
Powertrain control module /
Electronic control module /
Transmission control module
run/start
4x4 module
Anti-lock brake system run/start
Rear window defroster coil,
Battery charge coil
Passenger compartment fuse
panel run/start feed
Fuel pump
Not used

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

294

Fuses

Fuse or relay
location
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72

Fuse amp
rating
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
20A**
—
10A**
—
10A**
10A**
10A**

73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87

—
Relay
Relay
Relay
—
—
—
—
—
20A*
20A*
30A*
30A*
25A*
20A*

Protected circuits
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Fuel pump
Not used
Fuel pump relay coil
Not used
Trailer tow backup lamp
Canister vent (gas engine)
Powertrain control module /
Electronic control module relay
coil feed keep-alive power
Not used
Trailer tow left-hand stop/turn
Trailer tow right-hand stop/turn
Backup lamp
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Auxiliary power point #2
Auxiliary power point #1
4x4 shift motor
Heated/cooled seats
Anti-lock brake system coil feed
Auxiliary power point #5

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Fuses
Fuse or relay
Fuse amp
location
rating
88
20A*
89
40A*
90
25A*
91
—
92
20A*
93
20A*
94
25A*
95
25A*
96
50A*
97
40A*
98
—
99
40A*
100
25A*
101
Relay
102
Relay
103
—
104
—
105
—
106
—
107
—
* Cartridge fuses ** Mini fuses

295
Protected circuits

Auxiliary power point #6
Starter motor
Trailer tow battery charge
Not used
Auxiliary power point #4
Auxiliary power point #3
Upfitter #1
Upfitter #2
Anti-lock brake system pump
Inverter
Not used
Instrument panel power inverter
Trailer tow turn signals
Starter
Trailer tow battery charge
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

296

Fuses

Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is located in the
passenger’s footwell. Remove the
panel cover to access the fuses.

To remove the fuse panel cover, pull
the panel toward you. When the
clips of the panel disengage, let the
panel fall easily.

To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Fuses

297

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

19

30

20

31

21

32

48

8
9
40

49
10
22

33

41

23

34

42

24

35

43

25

36

44

26

37

45

11
12
13
14
15
16

27

17

28

38

46

18

29

39

47

The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse or relay
location
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Fuse amp
rating
30A
15A
30A
10A
20A
5A
7.5A

8
9
10

10A
10A
10A

11

10A

Protected circuits
Not used (spare)
Upfitter relay #4
Smart window motor
Interior lights, Hood lamp
Moonroof
Driver seat module
Driver seat switch, Driver lumbar
motor
Power mirror switch
Upfitter relay #3
Run/accessory relay, Customer
access feed
Instrument cluster

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

298

Fuses

Fuse or relay
location
12

Fuse amp
rating
15A

13

15A

14

15A

15

15A

16
17
18

10A
10A
10A

19
20
21
22
23
24

20A
20A
10A
20A
15A
15A

25
26
27
28
29

15A
5A
20A
15A
20A

Protected circuits
Interior lighting, Lighted running
board lamps
Right turn signals and brake
lamps, Right trailer tow stop turn
relay
Left turn signals and brake lamps,
Left trailer tow stop turn relay
High-mounted stop lamps, Backup
lamps, Trailer tow backup relay,
Reverse signal interior mirror
Right low beam headlamp
Left low beam headlamp
Keypad illumination, Passive
anti-theft indicator, Powertrain
control module, Brake shift
interlock
Subwoofer, Amplifier
Power door locks
Brake on/off switch
Horn
Not used (spare)
Steering wheel control module,
Diagnostic connector, Power fold
mirror relay, Remote keyless
entry, Electronic finish panel
Not used (spare)
Steering wheel control module
Not used (spare)
Ignition switch
SYNC, GPS module, Radio
faceplate

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Fuses
Fuse or relay
location
30

Fuse amp
rating
15A

31

5A

32

15A

33
34

10A
10A

35

5A

36
37
38
39
40

10A
10A
10A
15A
10A

41

7.5A

42
43
44
45
46
47

5A
10A
10A
5A
10A
15A

299
Protected circuits

Parking lamp relay, Trailer tow
parking lamp relay
Trailer brake controller (brake
signal), Customer access
Moonroof motor, Telescoping
mirror switch, Auto dimming
mirrors, Power inverter, Driver
and passenger door lock switch
illumination, Rear heated seat
switch illumination
Restraint control module
Heated steering wheel module,
Rear heated seats module
Select shift switch, Reverse park
aid module, Trailer brake control
module
Fuel tank select switch
PTC heater
AM/FM radio faceplate
High beam headlamps
Parking lamps (in mirrors), Roof
marker lamps
Passenger airbag deactivation
indicator
Not used (spare)
Wiper relay
Upfitter switches
Not used (spare)
Climate control
Fog lamps, Fog lamp indicator
(in switch)

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

300

Fuses

Fuse or relay
location
48
49

Fuse amp
rating
30A Circuit
Breaker
Relay

Protected circuits
Power windows switch, Power
rear sliding window switch
Delayed accessory

UPFITTER CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
The upfitter option package
provides four switches, mounted in
the center of the instrument panel.
AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
These switches will only operate
while the ignition is in the on
position, whether the engine is
running or not. However, it is
recommended that the engine
remain running to maintain battery charge when using the upfitter
switches for extended duration or higher current draws. (This is even
more important for vehicles with diesel engines since the glow plugs are
also draining battery power when the ignition key is in the on position.)
When switched on, they provide 8 amps, 12 amps or 20 amps of
electrical battery power for a variety of personal or commercial uses.
There will also be a relay box located on the driver side end of the
instrument panel. See your authorized dealer for service.
The relays are coded as shown.
RELAY
4

RELAY
3

RELAY
2

RELAY
1

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Fuses

301

There will also be one power lead
for each switch found as a blunt-cut
and sealed wire located below the
instrument panel and to the left of
the steering column.

They are coded as follows:

AUX 1
AUX 2

Circuit
Number
CAC05
CAC06

AUX 3

CAC07

AUX 4

CAC08

Switch

Wire Color
Yellow
Green with
Brown Trace
Violet with
Green Trace
Brown

Fuse Amp
Rating
25A
25A
10A
15A

More detailed information about upfitter switches can be found at
https://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

302

Maintenance

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Turn off the power running boards, if equipped,
before working under the vehicle, jacking or placing any object
under the vehicle. Never place your hand between the extended
running board and the vehicle. A moving running board may cause
injury.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness
and resale value. There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers
that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise.
We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your
vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer
can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty
information to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

303

Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key (if equipped).
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage or personal
burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to positionP.
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom left corner of the instrument
BRAKE
panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle to
release the auxiliary latch located
at the top center of the grille.
Slide the handle left to release
the auxiliary latch.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
HOOD

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

304

Maintenance

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
Refer to the diesel supplement for diesel engine component locations.
6.2L V8 Gasoline Engine

A

J

B C

D

I

A. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
B. Engine oil dipstick
C. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
D. Brake fluid reservoir
E. Engine coolant reservoir
F. Power distribution box
G. Air filter assembly
H. Power steering fluid reservoir
I. Engine oil filler cap
J. Battery

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

H

E F

G

Maintenance

305

6.8L V10 Gasoline Engine

A

B

C

D

E

F

A. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
B. Battery
C. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
D. Engine oil filler cap
E. Engine oil dipstick
F. Power steering fluid reservoir
G. Brake fluid reservoir
H. Engine coolant reservoir
I. Air filter assembly
J. Power distribution box

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

G

H

I

J

306

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
A. – MIN
B. – MAX

A

B

ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: For diesel engine information, refer to the diesel supplement.
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick. See the
Under Hood Overview in this chapter for location of dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes, the oil level is
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
If the oil level is below the lower hole, add enough oil to raise the level
within the lower and upper holes.
Oil levels above the upper hole may cause engine damage. Some oil must
be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

307

Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the engine oil level dipstick or the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Note: Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark. Oil levels above
the MAX mark may cause engine damage.
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the
American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this
trademark symbol conforms to the current engine
and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of
U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers.
1. Check the engine oil level.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add engine oil
that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications for
more information. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to
pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the Engine Coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information.
The coolant concentration should be maintained within 48% to 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool 300-ROB75240 available from your
dealer. Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test
strips for measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

308

Maintenance

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the
MAX mark.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add coolant immediately. See Adding
Engine Coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants or additives,
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the engine coolant may change
color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the engine coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the engine
coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be
drained, the system to be flushed, or the engine coolant to be replaced.
• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make
sure the correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine coolants may harm
your engine’s cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may
harm engine and cooling system components and may void the
warranty.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

309

• In case of emergency, a large amount of water without engine coolant
may be added in order to reach a vehicle service location. In this
instance, the cooling system must be drained, chemically cleaned with
Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush, and refilled with engine
coolant as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can
cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with
alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can
cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be
harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification.
See Capacities and Specifications for more information.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle.
If necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease
the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may
cause engine damage.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

310

Maintenance

If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% will provide improved overheat
protection. Engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the
corrosion and freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant
and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use
prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe Cooling (If Equipped)
WARNING: If fail-safe cooling activates, pull off the road as soon
as safely possible and turn the engine off. The engine may
automatically shut off while driving without further indication.
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The information display will indicate the engine is overheating.
• The service engine soon indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be restarted. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

311

When Fail-Safe Mode is Activated
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases
the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage; therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Engine Fluid Temperature Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of collision and injury, be
prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may
not be able to accelerate with full power until the fluid temperatures
reduce.
Your vehicle has been designed to pull a trailer, but because of the added
load, the vehicle’s engine may temporarily reach higher temperatures
during severe operating conditions such as ascending a long or steep
grade while pulling a trailer in hot ambient temperatures.
At this time, you may notice your engine coolant temperature gauge
needle move toward the H and the POWER REDUCED TO LOWER
TEMP message may appear in the information display.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

312

Maintenance

You may notice a reduction in the vehicle’s speed caused by reduced
engine power. Your vehicle has been designed to enter this mode if
certain high temperature/high load conditions take place in order to
manage the engine’s fluid temperatures. The amount of speed reduction
will depend on the vehicle loading, towing, grade, ambient temperature,
and other factors. If this occurs, there is no need to pull off the road.
The vehicle can continue to be driven while this message is active.
The air conditioning may also cycle on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect overheating of the engine. When the engine coolant
temperature decreases to a more normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
If you notice any of the following:
• the engine coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red (hot)
area
• the coolant temperature warning light illuminates
• the service engine soon indicator illuminates
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and place the vehicle in P
(Park).
2. Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the H range. After several minutes, if this does not
happen, follow the remaining steps.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for it to cool before checking the coolant
level.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
4. If the coolant level is normal, you may restart your engine and
continue on.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, restart the engine and take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer. See Adding engine coolant in this
chapter for more information.
Refer to fail-safe cooling for additional information.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

313

TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK
Checking Automatic Transmission Fluid (If Equipped)
Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips
or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 20 miles [30 km]). Verify that the
transmission fluid temperature gauge, located on the instrument
cluster, is within normal range.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the engine running, parking brake engaged and your foot on the
brake pedal, move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges.
Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag.
If necessary, refer to Under Hood Overview in this chapter for the
location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be
in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Your vehicle is equipped with one of the following dipsticks.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

314

Maintenance

Low Fluid Level
Type A
ADD

COLD

HOT

DO NOT ADD

Type B

Do not drive the vehicle if there is no indication of fluid on the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is above 50°F (10°C).
Correct Fluid Level
For vehicles equipped with 5-speed transmissions, the fluid should be
checked at normal operating temperature 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on
a level surface. For vehicles equipped with 6-speed transmissions, the
fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 196°F-216°F
(91°C-102°C) on a level surface. The normal operating temperature
can be reached after approximately 20 miles (30 km) of driving.
Type A

Type B

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

315

High Fluid Level
Type A

Type B

Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting Automatic Transmission Fluid Levels
Note: Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick handle and also in the
Capacities and Specifications chapter.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
Type A

Type B

If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified
technician.
Note: An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

316

Maintenance

Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID CHECK (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.

3. Add only enough fluid
through the filler opening so
that the fluid level is at the
bottom of the opening.

Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Capacities
and Specifications section .

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

317

BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance
Information. If adding fluid is necessary, use only MERCON® V ATF.
Note: This procedure is for vehicles with gasoline engines. Vehicles with
diesel engines are similar. Refer to Under Hood Overview in your diesel
supplement.
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature, 20°F–80°F
(-7°C–25°C):
1. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range.
2. If the fluid level is low. Add fluid to bring fluid level up to be between
the MIN and MAX range.
3. Start the engine.
4. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
5. Turn the engine off.
6. Recheck the fluid level in the reservoir. Do not add fluid if the level is
between the MIN and MAX range.
7. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it is between the MIN and MAX range. Refer to Capacities
and Specifications for the proper fluid type. Be sure to put the cap
back on the reservoir.
FUEL FILTER
If equipped with a gasoline engine, your vehicle is equipped with a
lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular
maintenance or replacement is not needed.
If equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the diesel supplement.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

318

Maintenance

WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid
that meets Ford specifications. See the technical specifications chart in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict
the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING: This vehicle may be equipped with more than
one battery, removal of cable from only one battery does not
disconnect the vehicle electrical system. Be sure to disconnect cables
from all batteries when disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property damage.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

319

WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after
the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require additional water during its life of
service.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the ethanol
content of the fuel for optimum driveability and performance. To begin
this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

320

Maintenance

RN

TU

LE
AD

RE

3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 kilometers) or more
to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy along with the ethanol
content for flexible fuel vehicles.
• For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are operating on E85, you may
experience poor starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and ethanol content
have been relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

321

Battery Management System (If Equipped)
The battery management system (BMS) monitors battery conditions
and takes actions to extend battery life. If excessive battery drain is
detected, the system may temporarily disable certain electrical features
to protect the battery. Those electrical accessories affected include the
rear defrost, heated/cooled seats, climate control fan, heated steering
wheel, audio and navigation system. A message may be shown in the
information displays to alert the driver that battery protection actions
are active. These messages are only for notification that an action is
taking place, and not intended to indicate an electrical problem or that
the battery requires replacement.
Electrical accessory installation
To ensure proper operation of the BMS, any electrical devices that are
added to the vehicle should not have their ground connection made
directly at the negative battery post. A connection at the negative
battery post can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system operation.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories added to the vehicle by the
dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and
durability, and may also affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
When a battery replacement is required, the battery should only be
replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery which matches
the electrical requirements of the vehicle. After battery replacement,
or in some cases after charging the battery with the external charger,
the BMS requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time (key off with doors
closed) to relearn the new battery state of charge. Prior to relearning the
state of charge, the BMS may disable electrical features (to protect the
battery) earlier than normal.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade
to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water
applied with a soft sponge or cloth.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

322

Maintenance

CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES

A
B

1. To remove the wiper blade,
pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Pry open the lock cover (A)
with your thumb to release the
blade.

C
2. Press the retaining clip to
disengage the wiper blade, then pull
the wiper blade down (C) toward
the windshield to remove it from
the arm.
3. To install the new wiper blade,
insert the wiper blade into the
wiper arm hook (B).

4. While holding the wiper arm, push the wiper blade up and away from
the windshield.
5. Close the lock cover.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield. Refer to Cleaning the windows and wiper blades in the
Vehicle Care chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers.
The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro
edge of the wiper rubber element.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

323

AIR FILTER CHECK
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance Information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft® air filter
element listed. Refer to the Motorcraft® Part Numbers.
The following procedure is for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine.
If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the diesel
supplement.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
Changing the Air Filter Element
1. Locate the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector on the air
outlet tube. This connector will
need to be unplugged.

2. Reposition the locking clip on the
connector (connector shown from
below for clarity), squeeze the
connector and pull it off of the air
outlet tube.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

324

Maintenance
3. Clean the area around the air
tube to air cover connection to
prevent debris from entering the
system and then loosen the bolt on
the air tube clamp so the clamp is
no longer snug to the air tube. It is
not necessary to completely remove
the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air
cleaner housing.
5. Release the three clamps that secure
the cover to the air filter housing. Push
the air filter cover toward the center of
the vehicle and up slightly to release it.

6. Remove the air filter element
from the air filter housing.
7. Install a new air filter element.

8. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps.
Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover and ensure that
the tabs on the edge are properly
aligned into the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air
filter housing and tighten the
air-tube clamp bolt snugly,
but do not overtighten it.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

325

10. Reconnect the mass air flow
sensor electrical connector to the
outlet tube. Make sure the locking
tab on the connector is in the
“locked” position (connector shown
from below for clarity).

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (A) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
A
• (B) Center height of lamp to
ground
D
• (C) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (D) Horizontal reference line

C

B

2. Measure the height from the center of your headlamp (indicated by
a 3.0 millimeter circle on the lens) to the ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at
this height (a piece of masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light from that lamp
hits the wall.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

326

Maintenance
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a distinct
horizontal edge towards the right.
If this edge is not at the horizontal
reference line, the beam will need
to be adjusted so the edge is at the
same height as the horizontal
reference line.

5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Use a number 2
Phillips screwdriver to turn the
adjuster either counterclockwise
or clockwise in order to adjust
the vertical aim of the headlamp.
The upper edge of the light pattern
should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. Repeat Steps 3–5 for the other
headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NOT ADJUSTABLE.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
These are examples of acceptable condensation:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

327

These are examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp
water leak):
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Replacing Headlamps, Park Lamps, Turn Lamps
1. Make sure that the exterior lamps are off, then open the hood.
2. Using masking tape or a marker,
make an alignment mark between
one of the grille brackets and the
vehicle radiator support to ensure
correct grille alignment during the
installation procedure. Do not
scratch the black coating from the
radiator support.

3. Remove the two grille to headlamp assembly push pins and the four
bolts attaching the top of the grille to the radiator support.
4. Pull the top of the grille forward to gain access to the lower grille
spring clips.
5. Depress the spring clips through the lower inner grille access openings
using a flat head screwdriver.
6. Pull the grill straight out to remove.
7. Remove the four bolts from the
headlamp assembly.
8. Pull the assembly straight out
disengaging one snap clip from the
fender.
9. Disconnect the electrical
connector by squeezing the release
tab and pushing the connector
forward, then pulling it rearward.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

328

Maintenance
10. For the headlamp bulb,
remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it
straight out.

11. For the park or turn lamp bulb,
remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it
straight out.

WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

329

Replacing Front Clearance and Identification Lamp Bulbs
(If Equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the screw and lens from
the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.

Install the bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
fog lamp by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb.

Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing Brake/Tail/Turn/Reverse Lamp Bulbs (Pickups Only)
1. Make sure the headlamps are off,
then open the tailgate to expose the
lamp assemblies.
2. Remove the two bolts from the tail
lamp assembly and carefully pull the
lamp assembly from the tailgate pillar
by releasing the two retaining tabs.
3. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

330

Maintenance

Replacing Brake/Tail/Turn/Reverse Lamp Bulbs (Chassis Cabs only)
(If Equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the four screws and the
lamp lens from lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in the
new bulb.

Replacing Cargo Lamp and High-mount Brake Lamp Bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the screws and lamp
assembly from the vehicle as wiring
permits.
3. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating it counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.

Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper. To change
the license plate lamp bulbs:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise and carefully pull
to remove it from the lamp assembly.
3. Pull out the old bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Maintenance

331

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
Function

Number Trade number
of bulbs
Headlamps
2
H13/9008
Park/Turn lamp
2
3157NA
Side marker
2
W5W
Tail/stop/turn/side marker (pickups only)
2
3157
Tail/stop/turn/side marker (chassis cabs
2
3157
only; if equipped)
Reverse (pickups only)
2
921
Reverse (chassis cabs only)
2
3157
High-mount brake lamp
1
912
Fog lamp
2
9145
License plate lamp
2
194
Cargo lamp
2
912
Map lamp
2
12V6W
Dome/reading lamps
3
578
Interior visor lamp (if equipped)
4
194
Mirror turn signal
2
2825
Mirror clearance lamp
2
2825
* Front clearance lamps (2) and front
5
194
identification lamps (3)
* Rear fender clearance
4
LED**
* Rear identification
3
193**
Underhood Lamp
1
LED**
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
* Dual rear wheels, or if equipped.
** See your authorized dealer to replace the lamp assembly.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

332

Vehicle Care

GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent
quality:
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft® Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft® Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only)
[CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Vehicle Care

333

• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft, terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface;
if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash off as
soon as possible.
• If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, use Motorcraft Detail
Wash (ZC-3-A), and, as required, Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), both as per the directions on the products’ labels. To manually
dry, use a clean, dry, lint-free towel. Do not use rubber, plastic and vinyl
protectant products on the running board surface, as the area may
become slippery.
Exterior Chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from
your authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to
clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a
few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials, such as steel wool or plastic pads, as
they can scratch the chrome surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Rear suspension components may require regular cleaning with a power
washer or a thorough rinse with a strong stream of water if the vehicle is
operated in dusty or muddy environments. Rear leaf springs or other
suspension components may emit squeak or popping noises while operating
the vehicle if particles, such as dirt, rocks, or other debris, are present in
the components.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

334

Vehicle Care

Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft® Detail Wash.
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will grey or stain the parts over time.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles, such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout, before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that
require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft®
Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to
prevent water damage when cleaning the engine.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Vehicle Care

335

CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers
do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass or the wiper
blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and
streaking and smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow
these tips:
• The windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate in the U.S., or
Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada. Be sure to
replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function
properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Note: Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause damage
to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the
side airbag in a crash.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

336

Vehicle Care

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft® Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area
first with Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp, white,
cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry, white, cotton cloth to dry these
areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products, such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion, in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior
surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be
covered by your warranty.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Vehicle Care

337

If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white, cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area;
allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
Instrument Panel, Door Panels and Console (FX appearance package)
Your vehicle’s instrument panel, door panels and console are uniquely
painted with both high and low gloss paints that require special care.
The high gloss area is similar to that of the vehicle’s exterior; the low
gloss area is designed to help protect the driver from undesirable
windshield reflection.
High gloss paint area
In order to maintain the finish, the high gloss areas should be treated
similar to the that of exterior paint or glossy plastic surfaces. When
cleaning the high gloss areas:
• Do not use paper towels or newspaper.
• Do not use silicone or Teflon® (PTFE)-based products.
Dust the high gloss areas with a clean, dry cloth, or use Motorcraft
Dusting Cloth (ZC-24).
For general cleaning, use mild, soapy water and a soft, damp cloth, then
dry with a clean, dry cloth.
For removal of fine scuffs and scratches, use Scotch-Brite® Microfiber
Cloth or cheese cloth along with Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax
(ZC-53-A), Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45), or Motorcraft Custom Clear
Coat Polish (ZC-8-A). Note: Removal of deep scuffs and scratches should
be performed by an authorized dealer or an experienced repair facility.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

338

Vehicle Care

Low gloss paint area
The low gloss area of the instrument panel’s upper dash should be
cleaned with mild, soapy water and a soft, damp cloth, then dried with a
clean, dry cloth. When cleaning the low gloss areas:
• Do not use paper towels or newspaper.
• Do not use silicone or Teflon® (PTFE)-based products.
• Do not use exterior paint waxes or sealants.
Dust the low gloss areas with a clean, dry cloth, or use Motorcraft
Dusting Cloth (ZC-24).
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH® EDITION)
Note: For the King Ranch® Edition leather seats, refer to a separate
section in this chapter.
• Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the
area with a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
• To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing or
damage to the leather.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED WITH THE KING RANCH® EDITION)
Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain
leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and
maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the
leather.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Vehicle Care

339

Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft
brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution.
• Clean spills as quickly as possible.
• Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the
leather as cleaners may darken the leather.
• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based
products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics.
Scratches
Natural Markings - Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine
steer hides, there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings, such
as small scars. These markings give character to the seating covers and
should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product.
In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear
marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same
instructions as in the Conditioning section.
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch® Leather Conditioner are available at the King
Ranch® Saddle Shop. Visit the website at www.krsaddleshop.com, or
telephone (in the United States) 1–800–282–KING (5464). If you are
unable to obtain King Ranch® Leather Conditioner, use another premium
leather conditioner.
• Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section.
• Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of
conditioner to a clean, dry cloth.
• Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior.
If a film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

340

Vehicle Care

CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Heavy dirt
and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge.
Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or
cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time
(30 days or more), read the following maintenance recommendations to
make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for
reliable, regular driving. Long-term storage under various conditions may
lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are
taken to preserve the components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Vehicle Care

341

Body
• Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
• Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax
to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is
washed.
• Lubricate hood latch, all door latches and trunk lid hinges with a light
grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Engine
• The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contains contaminates that may cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the
engine is running.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff
of the fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of vehicle storage (30 days or more),
fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality gas stabilizer
product to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage
periods exceed 30 days. Follow the instructions on the additive label.
The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the
additive throughout the fuel system.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the
recommended level.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

342

Vehicle Care

Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure
battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset
memory features.
Brakes
• Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 meters) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle from Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
• Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters)
back and forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there
are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

343

GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to Utility Vehicle, Van and Truck Owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts. Children and infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Utility vehicles, vans and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles, vans and
trucks are not designed for cornering
at speeds as high as passenger cars
any more than low-slung sports cars
are designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions.
Four-Wheel Drive System (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of
four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low-traction
situations, it will not stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles.
Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive (when selected) has the ability
to use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

344

Wheels and Tires

Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you to select different drive
modes as necessary. You can find information on transfer case operation
and shifting procedures in the Transmission chapter. You can find
information on transfer case maintenance in the Maintenance chapter.
You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you
operate your vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive
to four-wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary
clunk and ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal as the front
drivetrain comes up to speed and are not cause for concern.
How Your Vehicle Differs from Other Vehicles
Sport-utility vehicles, vans and
trucks can differ from some other
vehicles in a few noticeable ways.
Your vehicle may be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow
it to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody
components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

345

• Narrower – to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, sport-utility vehicles,
vans and trucks often will have a
higher center of gravity and a
greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.

TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The Tire
Quality Grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the
United States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

346

Wheels and Tires

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 11⁄2 times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C.
The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
by law.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

347

Glossary of Tire Terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each
tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant,
tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load-carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load-carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been
stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to
the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position) or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

348

Wheels and Tires

INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard
certification and in case of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires

C D
B

E

F

G
H

A

I

P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)

J

M

L

K

A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that
may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter, this may mean it is
designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization
or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

349

F. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 (130)
N
87 (140)
Q
99 (159)
R
106 (171)
S
112 (180)
T
118 (190)
U
124 (200)
H
130 (210)
V
149 (240)
W
168 (270)
Y
186 (299 )
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR.
For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h),
tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards.
The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to
four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers
in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is
used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

350

Wheels and Tires

I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the
vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure, which can
be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings, such
as standard load or radial tubeless.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

351

Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type
Tires
LT type tires have some additional
B
information beyond those of P type
C
tires. These differences are described
A
below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
B. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
D
B
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual, defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single,
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

352

Wheels and Tires

Information on T Type Tires

B
A

C

D
E

T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires. These differences are
described below.
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.

A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport-utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio, which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. See the payload description and graphic in the Load
Carrying chapter .

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

353

INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased
risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire.
It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure and not appear to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of
a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

354

Wheels and Tires

Note: Do not reduce tire pressure to change the ride characteristics of
the vehicle. If you do not maintain the inflation pressure at the levels
specified by Ford, your vehicle may experience a condition known as
shimmy. Shimmy is a severe vibration and oscillation in the steering
wheel after the vehicle travels over a bump or dip in the road that
does not dampen out by itself. Shimmy may result from significant
under-inflation of the tires, improper tires (load range, size, or type),
or vehicle modifications such as lift-kits. In the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should slowly reduce speed by either lifting off
the accelerator pedal or lightly applying the brakes. The shimmy will
cease as the vehicle speed decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s maximum
permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot (for example,
driven more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or reduce air
pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures
to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below
recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

355

3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type or mini-spare tires, see the Dissimilar spare tire
and wheel assembly information section. Store and maintain at 60 psi
(4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see Dissimilar spare
tire and wheel assembly information under Changing a Road Wheel
in this section. Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Tire Inflation Information
WARNING: An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if
improperly used, serviced or maintained. To reduce the risk of
serious injury, never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat
or seriously under-inflated without first removing the tire from the
wheel assembly for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or
replace tires or wheels without first taking precautions to protect
persons and property.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

356

Wheels and Tires

All tires with Steel Carcass Plies (if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and
Health Administration regulations. For example, during any procedure
involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must utilize a remote
inflation device, and make sure that all persons are clear of the
trajectory area.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

357

WARNING: Stay out of the trajectory (1) as indicated in the
illustration.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

358

Wheels and Tires

Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 millimeters),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which look
like narrow strips of smooth rubber
across the tread will appear on the
tire when the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars,
the tire is worn out and must be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and separation
in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected, have the tire
inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged during off-road use,
so inspection after off-road use is also recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (such as load,
speed, inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

359

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard
certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code
and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week
of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on
either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle, transfer case, or power transfer unit failure. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

360

Wheels and Tires

WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads
without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (138 kPa)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, take the
following precautions to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (138 kPa) greater than
the maximum pressure, an authorized dealer or other tire service
professional should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the
tire wheel assembly.
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires should generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels are not designed to be
used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system
(if equipped).
If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, the system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your
tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may
be damaged(if equipped).
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

361

WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
•
•
•
•

Observe posted speed limits.
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
Avoid potholes and objects on the road.
Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking.

Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove the wheel and replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle
seems to pull to one side when you are driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized
dealer. Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

362

Wheels and Tires

Tire Rotation
WARNING: If the tire label shows different tire pressures for
the front and rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system, then the settings for the system sensors
need to be updated. Always perform the system reset procedure after
tire rotation. If the system is not reset, it may not provide a low tire
pressure warning when necessary. See the TPMS reset procedure in
this chapter.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire and
wheel assembly. A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as
a spare tire or wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from
the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel
assembly, it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used
in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information) will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
• Rear-wheel drive vehicles/
Four-wheel drive vehicles
(front tires at top of diagram)

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

363

• Dual rear wheel vehicles – six
tire rotation
If your vehicle is equipped with dual
rear wheels, it is recommended that
the front and rear tires (in pairs) be
rotated only side to side. We do not
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a pair. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be adjusted
for the tires new positions in
accordance with vehicle
requirements.

Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure.
Note: Do not use snow chains on vehicles with 20 inch wheels and tires.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

364

Wheels and Tires

Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using
snow tires and chains.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and retighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge.
See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

365

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

366

Wheels and Tires

Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Note: Each road tire is equipped
with a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire and wheel assembly
cavity. The pressure sensor is
attached to the valve stem.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible unless
the tire is removed. Take care when
changing the tire to avoid damaging
the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate
tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the tire pressure monitoring system will continue to identify an
issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel or tire needs to be
repaired and put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have
the damaged road wheel or tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
For additional information, see Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System in this section.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

367

When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for
information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system:
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Solid warning
light

Possible cause

Customer action required

Tire(s)
under-inflated

1. Make sure tires are at the proper
pressure. See Inflating your tires in
this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
pressure as shown on the Tire Label
(located on the edge of driver’s door
or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be
driven for at least two minutes over
20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system function. For a
description on how the system
functions, see When your
temporary spare tire is installed in
this section.
Tire pressure
If the tires are properly inflated and
monitoring
the spare tire is not in use but the
system
light remains on, contact your
malfunction
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire rotation
On vehicles with different front and
without sensor
rear tire pressures, the system must
training
be retrained following every tire
rotation. See Tire rotation in this
chapter.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

368

Wheels and Tires

Low tire
Possible cause Customer action required
pressure
warning light
Flashing warning Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and
light
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system function. For a
description on how the system
functions, see When your
temporary spare tire is installed in
this section.
Tire pressure
If the tires are properly inflated and
monitoring
the spare tire is not in use but the
system
light remains on, contact your
malfunction
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each
pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger tire
inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa)
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature, the
tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F
(17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower pressure value may be detected
by the system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning light for low tire pressure. If the
low tire pressure warning light is on, visually check each tire to verify that
no tire is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check air
pressure in the road tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the
vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate
all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

369

Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset Procedure
WARNING: To determine the required pressure(s) for your
vehicle, see the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See Load
Carrying for more information.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system reset procedure needs to be
performed after each tire rotation on vehicles that require different
recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear
tires.
Overview
To provide the vehicle’s load carrying capability, some vehicles require
different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to
the rear tires. The tire pressure monitoring system equipped on these
vehicles is designed to illuminate the low tire pressure warning light at
two different pressures; one for the front tires and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and
maximum tire life, the tire pressure monitoring system needs to know
when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this information, the system can
detect and properly warn of low tire pressures.
System reset tips:
• To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, the
system reset procedure should be performed at least three feet (one
meter) away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing
the system reset procedure at the same time.
• Do not wait more than two minutes between resetting each tire sensor
or the system will time-out and the entire procedure will have to be
repeated on all four wheels.
• A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

370

Wheels and Tires

Performing the System Reset Procedure
Read the entire procedure before attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) for at least two minutes
and then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires
and have access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off three times. This must be
accomplished within 10 seconds.
If the reset mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound
once, the system indicator will flash and a message is shown in the
information display (if equipped). If this does not occur, please try again
starting at Step 2.
If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the system indicator does not flash and no message is shown in the
information display (if equipped), seek service from your authorized dealer.
5. Note: Train the tire pressure monitoring system sensors in the tires
using the following system reset sequence starting with the left front tire
in the following clockwise order:
• Left front (Driver’s side front tire)
• Right front (Passenger’s side front tire)
• Right rear (Passenger’s side rear tire)
• Left rear (Driver’s side rear tire)
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code
has been learned by the module for this position. If a double horn is
heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and must be repeated.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained
(driver’s side rear tire), the system indicator stops flashing, and a
message is shown in the information display (if equipped).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

371

10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated.
If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the
ignition is turned to off, seek assistance from your authorized dealer.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position) or Tire Label located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See Load Carrying for more
information.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tire
pressure monitoring system and should not be used. However, if
you must use a sealant, the tire pressure monitoring system sensor and
valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
WARNING: See Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this
chapter for important information. If the tire pressure monitor
sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring system,
the indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore
the full function of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with
tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring system,
have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the system sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this
chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible.
During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the system sensor for damage.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

372

Wheels and Tires

Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, then it is intended
for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire and wheel assembly that is
the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally
provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it
should be replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or
wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires
and wheels and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire
size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire
has a label on the wheel that states: THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label.
• tow a trailer.
• use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time.
• use commercial car washing equipment.
• try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

373

3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
do not:
• exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• use more than one dissimilar spare tire and wheel at a time.
• use commercial car washing equipment.
• use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire and wheel.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly can lead
to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
additional caution should be given to:
• towing a trailer.
• driving vehicles equipped with a camper body.
• driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel,
and seek service as soon as possible.
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire, jack and associated tools,
refer to the following table for their locations:
Tool
Spare tire (pick-up trucks only)
Jack

Location
Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper
Regular cab and Crew Cab:
Fastened to floor pan behind
rearmost seat on passenger side
SuperCab: Under rear bench seat
on passenger side

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

374

Wheels and Tires

Tool
Jack handle, lug wrench, lug
wrench extension (only available
on Dual Rear Wheel [DRW]
vehicles) and wheel chock (only
available on Single Rear Wheel
[SRW] vehicles equipped with a
diesel engine)
Key and spare tire lock

Location
Regular cab: Fastened to floor
behind driver seat
SuperCab: Fastened to floor under
rear seat
Crew Cab: Fastened to floor
behind rear seat at driver side
In the glove box

Removing the Spare Tire (With Spare Tire Carrier Only)
1. The following tools are required to remove the spare tire:
• one handle extension and two
typical extensions. To assemble,
align the button with the hole
and slide the parts together.

To disconnect, press the button and pull apart.
• one wheel nut wrench. Slide over
the square end of the jack
handle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

375

• Note: For vehicles equipped with
dual rear wheels, insert the lug
wrench extension into the lug
wrench to reach the lug nuts.

2. Attach the spare tire lock key
(A) to the jack handle (B).

B

A

B

A

3. Fully insert the jack handle (with
one extension) through the bumper
hole and into the guide tube. The
key and lock will engage with a
slight push and counterclockwise
turn. Some resistance will be felt
when turning the jack handle
assembly.

4. Turn the handle counterclockwise and lower the spare tire until you
can slide the tire rearward and the cable is slack.
5. Remove the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Note: If equipped with a tether, perform the following steps:

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

376

Wheels and Tires
6. Lift the spare tire on end to
access the tether attachment.
7. Use the lug wrench to remove
the lug nut from the spare tire
tether.
8. If not replacing the spare or flat
tire to the underbody storage area,
raise the wheel retainer up into the
installed position.

9. Use the attached fastener strap (on the spare tire tether) to attach the
tether end to the winch retainer prior to raising to the installed position.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission selector lever is in
position P.
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure to place the transmission selector lever in
position P, set the parking brake and block (in both directions) the
wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to
the tire being changed.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported
only by a jack. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone
else could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

377

WARNING: Always use the jack provided as original equipment
with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided as
original equipment with your vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or
modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Turn the engine off and block the
wheel that is diagonally opposite of
the flat tire using the wheel chock, if
equipped. Note: If the vehicle is a
4x4, lock the manual hub on the
wheel.
2. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug wrench and spare tire from the
stowage locations.
3. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim.
4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.
The following steps apply to F-250 and F-350 single rear wheel vehicles
only:
5. Insert the hooked end of the jack
handle into the jack and use the
handle to slide the jack under the
vehicle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

378

Wheels and Tires

6. Position the jack according to the following guides:
• Front (4x2)

• Front driver side (4x4)
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto
the flat area on the outboard side of
the differential.

• Front passenger side (4x4)
Note: View shown from the rear of
the vehicle to clearly identify the
jack point. Place the jack directly
under the axle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

379

• Rear

Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle.
7. Turn the jack handle clockwise
until the wheel is completely off the
ground and high enough to install
the spare tire.
8. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
9. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward for all front
wheels and single rear wheel
vehicles. If replacing an inboard rear tire on dual rear wheel vehicles, the
valve stem must be facing outward. If replacing the outboard wheel, the
valve stem must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel
is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
Go to Step 19.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

380

Wheels and Tires

The following steps apply to F–350 Dual Rear Wheel, F-450 and F-550
vehicles only:
11. Slide the notched end of the
jack handle over the release valve
and use the handle to slide the jack
under the vehicle. Make sure the
valve is closed by turning it
clockwise.
12. Position the jack according to
the following guides:

• Front (4x2): F-350 dual rear
wheel
Note: Place the jack directly under
the I-beam.

• Front driver side (4x4): F-350
dual rear wheel
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto
the flat area on the outboard side of
the differential housing.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

381

• Front passenger side (4x4):
F-350 dual rear wheel
Note: View shown from the rear of
the vehicle to clearly identify the
jack point.
Note: Place the jack directly under
the axle and inboard of the radius
arm so that the jack clears the
radius arm.
• Front: F-450 and F-550

• Rear: F-350 dual rear wheel

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

382

Wheels and Tires
• Rear: F-450 and F-550

13. Insert the jack handle into the
pump linkage.
14. Use an up-and-down motion
with the jack handle to raise the
wheel completely off the ground.

Note: Hydraulic jacks are equipped with a pressure release valve that
prevents lifting loads which exceed the jack’s rated capacity.
15. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
16. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem
is facing outward on all front an inboard rear wheels. If replacing the
outboard wheel, the valve stem must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug
nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug
nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
17. Lower the wheel by slowly turning the release valve
counterclockwise. Opening the release valve slowly will provide a more
controlled rate of descent.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

383

Note: The following steps apply to all vehicles:
1
18. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
6
7
shown. See Wheel Lug Nut Torque
Specifications in this chapter for
the proper lug nut torque
4
3
specification.
8-lug nut torque sequence
5

8
2
10

1

3

10-lug nut torque sequence
8

5

6
7

4
2

9

19. Stow the flat tire. See Stowing the flat or spare tire if the vehicle is
equipped with a spare tire carrier.
20. Stow the jack, jack handle and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is
securely fastened so it does not rattle when driving.
21. Unblock the wheels.
The following step applies to F-250 and F-350 Single Rear Wheel vehicles
only:
22. When installing the wheel center
ornaments, ensure that the ornament
retention towers on the back side of
the ornament are aligned with the
studs or lug nuts. The retention
towers are designed to be installed
over the studs or nuts and retain to
the flange on the lug nut.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

384

Wheels and Tires
If the ornament retention towers
are aligned between the studs or lug
nuts, the ornament is improperly
installed. This improper installation
may appear and sound correct, but
will not keep the ornament on the
vehicle. Ornaments improperly
installed in this manner will fall off
or become loose with minimal force
or impact.

Installing Dual Rear Wheel Ornaments
1. Align the ornament with the lug
nuts.
• (A) is the clip and (B) is the flange.

A

B
2. Hold the ornament so that all of
the retention clips are sitting on the
flange of the lug nuts.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

A
C

D

385

3. Use your hand or rubber mallet
to tap the ornament in a star
pattern. There should be an even
gap between the ornament and the
wheel.

B

4. Be sure to install all the clips on the nuts over the flanges so that
there is an even gap all around and the retention clips are fully seated.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

386

Wheels and Tires

Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
Note: If you are stowing a tire that requires reattaching it to the vehicle
with a tether, perform these steps first, then proceed with the steps
following.
1. Place the tire on end with the
valve stem facing toward the front
of the vehicle.
2. Place the tether into the bolt
holes in the wheel and attach the
lug nut using the lug winch.

3. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up.
4. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
5. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.
6. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
7. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, per scheduled maintenance information),
or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other
components.
8. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper
drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Wheels and Tires

387

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to
the specified torque at 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel
disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts
to the specified torque at 100 miles (160 kilometers), and again at
500 miles (800 kilometers) of new vehicle operation and after any wheel
disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

388

Wheels and Tires
Bolt size

Wheel lug nut torque*
ft-lb
N•m
M14 x 1.5
165
224
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
It is important to follow the proper wheel mounting and lug nut torque
procedures.
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts, apply one drop of motor oil
between the flat washer and the nut.

Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to
installation. Remove any visible
corrosion or loose particles.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Capacities and Specifications

389

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
Spark plug gap
Ignition system
Compression ratio

6.2L V8 engine
6.8L V10 engine
378
413
Minimum 87 octane or Minimum 87 octane
Ethanol (E85)
1-5–4–8–6–3–7–2
1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9
0.041–0.047 inch
0.039–0.043 inch
(1.04–1.20 mm)
(1.0–1.1 mm)
Coil on plug
Coil on plug
9.8:1
9.2:1

Engine Drivebelt Routing
6.2L V8 engine

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

390

Capacities and Specifications
6.8L V10 engine with A/C

6.8L V10 engine - without A/C

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

—

6.9 pints (3.3L)

8.5 pints (4.0L)

14.0 pints (6.6L)

Spindle bearing
Rear axle - F-250/350
(10.50 inch axle)1
Rear axle - F-350
(Dana M80)
Rear axle - F-450/550
(Dana S110/S130)

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)
Engine coolant
(6.2L V8 engine)2
Engine coolant
(6.8L V10 engine)2

Brake fluid

5.8 pints (2.8L)

Front axle

Between
MIN/MAX on
brake fluid
reservoir
21.3 quarts
(20.2L)
26.7 quarts
(25.3L)

Capacity

Item

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcraft® Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant
Prediluted

Motorcraft® SAE
80W-90 Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
High Temperature 4X4
Front Axle and Wheel
Bearing Grease
Motorcraft® SAE
75W-140 Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft® SAE
75W-90 Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft® SAE
75W-140 Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft® High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid

Ford part name

VC-3DIL-B (US) /
CVC-3DIL-B (Canada) /
WSS-M97B44-D2

PM-1–C / WSS-M6C62-A
or WSS-M6C65-A1

XY-75W140–QL /
WSL-M2C192-A

XY-75W90–QLS /
WSS–M2C918–A

XY-75W140–QL /
WSL-M2C192-A

XG-11 /
WSS-M1C267-A1

XY-80W-90–QL /
WSP-M2C197–A

Ford part number /
Ford specification

Capacities and Specifications
391

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)
—

40 gallons (151L)

—
—

Transmission / parking
brake linkages and
pivots, brake pedal shift

XG-1-C or XG-1-K /
WSD-M1C227-A

XL-1 / None

Motorcraft® Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
Motorcraft® Premium
Long-Life Grease

XG–4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93–B

—

—

Multi-Purpose Grease

Refer to the diesel supplement.

—

35 gallons (132L)

—

WSS-M2C945-A

Refer to the diesel supplement.

Motorcraft® or
equivalent SAE 5W-20
motor oil

—

—

Ford part number /
Ford specification

Refer to the diesel supplement.

Ford part name

28 gallons (106L)

7.0 quarts (6.6L)

Capacity

Lock cylinders

Engine and fuel coolant
(diesel engine)
Engine oil (6.2L V8 and
6.8L V10 gasoline
engines)5,6
Engine oil
(diesel engine)
Fuel tank (incomplete
vehicle, steel tank,
middle location)
Fuel tank (pickup with
gasoline engine)
Fuel tank (incomplete
vehicle, steel tank,
aft axle location)
Fuel tank
(diesel engine)
Hinges, latches, striker
plates, fuel filler door
hinge and seat tracks

Item

392
Capacities and Specifications

17.5 quarts
(16.6L)
18.5 quarts
(17.5L)
16.7 quarts
(15.8L)

Automatic transmission
fluid
(5–speed)3,4,7
Automatic transmission
fluid
(6-speed)3,4,8

Motorcraft® Premium
Windshield Washer
ZC-32–A (US)
CXC-37-(A, B, D, and F)
Concentrate (US)
Windshield washer fluid
Fill as required
Premium Quality
(Canada) /
Windshield Washer Fluid
WSB-M8B16–A2 /- (Canada)
1
Add 8 oz. (236 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford Specification
EST-M2C118–A for complete refill of limited slip Ford axles. Ford design rear axles contain a
synthetic lubricant that does not require changing unless the axle has been submerged in water.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
3
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are
indicated on the dipstick blade or the dipstick handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being
added is of the correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance information to determine the
correct service interval.

XT-10–QLV /
MERCON® LV

XL-12 / —

Motorcraft® Transfer
Case Fluid

2.0 quarts (1.9L)

Transfer case fluid

Motorcraft®
MERCON® LV ATF

XT-5-QM /
MERCON® V

Motorcraft®
MERCON® V ATF

Keep fluid level
between MIN and
MAX on reservoir

Power steering fluid

Ford part number /
Ford specification

Ford part name

Capacity

Item

Capacities and Specifications

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

393

Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV should only use MERCON® LV fluid.
Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
4
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and
if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set
by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
5
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil must meet or exceed the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C945-A, SAE 5W-20, and display the API Starburst
Certification Mark.
6
If the Ford specification is not shown on the oil container, the oil container must display the API
Starburst Certification Mark and the correct viscosity.
7
Refer to Checking automatic transmission fluid in this chapter for the correct dipstick type.
Fill to the proper capacity according to dipstick Type A.
8
Refer to Checking automatic transmission fluid in this chapter for the correct dipstick type.
Fill to the proper capacity according to dipstick Type B.

394
Capacities and Specifications

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Capacities and Specifications

395

MOTORCRAFT® PART NUMBERS
Component
Air filter element
Oil filter
Battery (standard)
Battery (optional)
Spark plugs-platinum
Seat filter
Windshield wiper
blade

6.2L V8 engine
FA-1883
FL-820-S
BXT-65-650
BXT-65-750

6.8L V10 engine
FA-1883
FL-820-S
BXT-65-650
BXT-65-750
1

FS-107
WW-2201-PF

1

For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to the
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Note: Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft® or equivalent
replacement parts. The customer warranty may be void for any damage
to the engine if such spark plugs are not used.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number
is located on the driver’s side
instrument panel.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

396

Capacities and Specifications

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
A. World manufacturer identifier
B. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
C. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D. Engine type
E. Check digit
F. Model year
G. Assembly plant
H. Production sequence number.
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance Certification
Label be affixed to a vehicle and
prescribe where the Safety Compliance
Certification Label may be located. The
Safety Compliance Certification Label
shall be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, the door latch post, or the edge
of the door near the door latch, next to
the driver’s seating position.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Capacities and Specifications

397

TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.

Description
Five-speed manual (TR4050)
Five-speed automatic (5R110W)
Six-speed automatic (6R140) (gasoline engines)
Six-speed automatic (6R140W) (diesel engines)

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Code
2
T
P
W

398

Accessories

ACCESSORIES
For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your
vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online store at:
Accessories.Ford.com (U.S. only).
Ford Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your
local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Ford Custom Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides
you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12000 miles (20000 kilometers) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
•Bug shields
•Bright metallic exhaust tips
•Deflectors
•Running boards
•Splash guards

•Step bars
•Fog lamps
•Custom graphics*
•Stainless steel wheel covers*
•Wheel well liners

Interior style
•Floor mats
•Cargo organizers

•Custom seat covers*

Lifestyle
•Ash cup / smoker’s package
•Racks and carriers*
•Bedliners and bedmats
•Truck bed camping tent*
•Rear seat entertainment*
•Sportliner cargo liner*
•Tonneau covers*
•Bed extender
•Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Accessories

399

Peace of mind
•Keyless entry keypad
•Back up alarm*
•Remote start
•Cable lock*
•Vehicle security systems
•Bed hooks*
•Wheel locks
•Tool/Cargo boxes*
•Protective seat covers*
•Speed/cruise control
•Bumper and hitch mounted parking sensors*
*Ford Licensed Accessories (FLA) are warranted by the accessory
manufacturer’s warranty. Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed
and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been
designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements.
Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer’s limited
warranty and/or a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms — that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the amateur radio antennas in the
area of the driver’s side hood.
• Any non-Ford custom electrical or electronic accessories or
components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or
the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability,
and may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

400

Ford Extended Service Plan

FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS
WITH A FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. only)
More than 32 Million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the
powerful protection Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides peace of mind protection
beyond the expiration of the New Vehicle Warranty coverage.
Ford ESP can quickly pay for itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Coverage for up to 500+ covered components
There are four, Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage.
Ask your dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE – Covers 113 components, and includes many high tech
items
3. BaseCARE – Covers 84 components
4. PowertrainCARE – Covers 29 critical components
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the
United States and Canada. It is the only Extended Service Plan
authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go
• Repairs performed by factory trained technicians, using Genuine Ford
and Lincoln parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit – You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at the dealership for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits – If your vehicle is kept overnight for
covered repairs, you are eligible for rental car coverage, including
Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs, or Field Service Actions.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Ford Extended Service Plan

401

Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance
• Travel Expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Extended Service Plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner.
Whenever you sell your vehicle, prospective buyers may have a higher
degree of confidence that vehicle was properly maintained with Ford
ESP, thereby improving resale value!
Avoid the Rising cost of vehicle maintenance
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and select items that routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventative care and replacement items that require periodic attention
for normal wear:
• Windshield Wiper Blades
• Spark Plugs (except in California)
• The clutch Disc
• Brake pads and linings
• Shock Absorbers
• Belts and Hoses
• Diesel Exhaust Fluid Replenishment
Contact your selling dealership today so they can customize a Genuine
Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

402

Ford Extended Service Plan

Interest Free Financing Options Available
Take advantage of our interest free installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program.
Complete the information below and mail to:
Ford ESP
PO Box 8072
Royal Oak Michigan 48068-0039
To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists at 800-367-3377. Don’t
forget to ask about our interest free payment program, allowing you all
the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time.
You are pre-approved with no credit checks, no hassles!
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford
Extended Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending
on the plan you purchase, Ford Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
• Rental reimbursement
• Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items
• Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
• Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford Extended Service Plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your
own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental.
When you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada and the United States,
provided by a network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers.
The Lincoln Maintenance Protection Plan is honored at authorized
Lincoln dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are
not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change.
For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance

403

GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and
may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or
trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with the vehicle.
Regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle have been established
based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle
serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your
cost of owning the vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is
performed and that the materials used meet the specifications identified
in the Capacities and Specifications chapter. Failure to perform
scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected
by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored
certification training to help them become experts on the operation of
your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification
their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft® and Ford-authorized branded
remanufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed Ford
Motor Company’s specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry
a nationwide, 12 month/12000 mile (20000 kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty. If you do not use Ford authorized parts, they may not
meet Ford specifications and, depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping.
They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or bodyshops. Please contact
your dealer for details.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

404

Scheduled Maintenance

Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of
improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper
performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is
imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple, complex,
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for
various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing.
Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most
appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your
vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance
information.
Ford strongly recommends the use of only genuine Ford, Motorcraft® or
Ford-authorized remanufactured replacement parts because they are
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
Ford Motor Company recommended additives and chemicals are listed
in the owner manual and in the Ford Workshop Manual. Additional
chemicals or additives, not approved by Ford Motor Company, are not
recommended as part of normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic
and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid
needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs
of overheating and foreign material contamination should be inspected
immediately by a qualified expert, such as the factory-trained technicians
at your dealership. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the
specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid
that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system, or using
a Ford-approved flushing chemical.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance

405

Owner Checks and Services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed
every month or at six month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if
necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag, safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as
necessary.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

406

Scheduled Maintenance

Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have
the systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company
recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every
scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point inspection
Horn operation
Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Suspension component for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkage
Exterior lamps and hazard
Tires (including spare) for wear and
warning system operation
proper pressure**
*
Fluid levels ; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
For oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operation
Accessory drive belt(s)
Battery performance
Engine air filter

*

Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission, power
steering and window washer.
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire
sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle. It is your checklist that gives you
immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You will
know what has been checked, what is okay, as well as those things that
may require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle
inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

407

408

Scheduled Maintenance

NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
Normal scheduled maintenance – 6.2L and 6.8L engines only*
Every 7500 miles
Change engine oil and filter.
(12000 km) or
Rotate tires**, inspect tire wear and measure
six months
tread depth.
(whichever comes
Inspect wheels and related components for
first)
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Perform multi-point inspection
(recommended).
Every 15000 miles
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level.
(24000 km) or
Consult dealer for requirements.
12 months (whichever Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
comes first)
brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system strength and
hoses.
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if
equipped with grease fittings (Four–wheel
drive vehicles).
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints,
suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and
U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings.
*

Scheduled maintenance for the 6.7L diesel engine can be found in the
diesel supplement.
**
Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels
when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)

Every 97500 miles
(156000 km)
Every 105000 miles
(168000 km)
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)

409

Other maintenance items
Replace climate-controlled (heated and
cooled) seat filter (if equipped).
Replace engine air filter.
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
on 5–speed transmission. Consult dealer for
requirements.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
seal if non-sealed bearings are used.
Replace spark plugs.
Change engine coolant.*
Change rear axle fluid (Dana axles).
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).**
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
on 6–speed transmission. Consult dealer for
requirements.
Change front axle fluid (Four–wheel drive
vehicles).
Change rear axle fluid (non-Dana axles).
Change transfer case fluid (Four–wheel drive
vehicles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced
within the last 100000 miles (160000 km).
Replace front wheel bearings and seals if
non-sealed bearings are used.

*

Initial replacement at six years or 105000 miles (168000 kilometers),
then every three years or 45000 miles (72000 kilometers).
**
If not replaced, inspect every 15000 miles (24000 kilometers).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

410

Scheduled Maintenance

Maintenance Schedule Log
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

411

412

Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance

413

SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS – 6.2L AND 6.8L ENGINES
ONLY
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the 6.7L diesel engine, see the
diesel supplement for special operating condition maintenance.
If you operate your vehicle primarily in one of the more demanding
conditions listed below, you need to have some items maintained more
frequently. If you only occasionally operate your vehicle under these
conditions, it is not necessary to perform the additional maintenance.
For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or
technician.
Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier
Inspect frequently, Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
service as required See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 5000 miles
Inspect the wheels and related components for
(8000 km)
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
Change engine oil and filter.
(8000 km) or
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
six months
Every 30000 miles
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
(48000 km)
seals if non-sealed bearings are used.
*

Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels
when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

414

Scheduled Maintenance

Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances as in
heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Inspect frequently, Replace engine air filter.
service as required
Every 5000 miles
Inspect brake system.
(8000 km)
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if
equipped with grease fittings.
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
Change engine oil and filter.
(8000 km) or
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
six months
Every 30000 miles
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
(48000 km)
seals if non-sealed bearings are used.
Every 60000 miles
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).
(96000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
*

Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels
when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted.
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions such as unpaved or
dusty roads
Inspect frequently, Replace engine air filter.
service as required
Every 5000 miles
Inspect the wheels and related components for
(8000 km)
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
Change engine oil and filter.
(8000 km) or
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
six months
Every 30000 miles
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
(48000 km)
seals if non-sealed bearings are used.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance

415

Operating in dusty or sandy conditions such as unpaved or
dusty roads
Every 50000 miles
Change rear axle fluid (F-450/550 only).
(80000 km)
Every 60000 miles
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).
(96000 km)
*

Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels
when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted.
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km) or
six months

Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Every 50000 miles
(80000 km)
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)

Off-road operation
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints,
Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings.
Replace engine air filter.
Change engine oil and filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
seals if non-sealed bearings are used.
Change rear axle fluid (F-450/550 only).
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).

*

Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels
when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted.
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
Every oil change
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
interval
with regular unleaded fuel.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

416

Scheduled Maintenance

Special Operating Condition Log
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

417

418

Scheduled Maintenance

EXCEPTIONS
Normal vehicle axle maintenance: Rear axles and power take-off units
with synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks equipped with Ford-design axles
are lubricated for life; do not check or change fluid unless a leak is
suspected, service is required or the assembly has been submerged in
water. During long periods of trailer towing with outside temperatures
above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open throttle for long periods above
45 mph (72 km/h), non-synthetic rear axle fluids should be changed every
3000 miles (4800 kilometers) or three months, whichever comes first. This
interval can be waived if the axle is filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid
meeting Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number F1TZ-19580-B or
equivalent. Add friction modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for
complete refill of Traction-Lok rear axles (see Technical specifications in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter for details).
Police/Taxi/Livery vehicle axle maintenance: Change rear axle fluid
every 100000 miles (160000 km). Rear axle fluid change may be waived
if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number FITZ-19580-B or equivalent.
Add four ounces (118 mL) of additive friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles. The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle has been
submerged in water.
California fuel filter replacement: If the vehicle is registered in
California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all
recommended maintenance services performed at the specified
intervals and to record all vehicle service.
Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles operating in the Middle
East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates
using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline
Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil
change interval is 5000 miles (8000 kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change
service interval is 3000 miles (4800 kilometers).
Engine air filter replacement: Engine air filter life is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air
filter.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
Initial change
After initial change

Six years or 105000 miles (168000 km)
(whichever comes first)
Every three years or 45000 miles (72000 km)

Engine Coolant Change Log
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

419

420

SYNC®

SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows
you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services
(Traffic, Directions & Information) (if equipped).
• Use applications, such as Pandora and Stitcher, via SYNC AppLink™
(if applicable).
• Access phonebook contacts and music via voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected phone.
• Text message.
• Use the advanced voice recognition system.
• USB device charging (if your device supports this).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

421

GENERAL INFORMATION
Make sure you review your device’s manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you
cannot answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
In the United States, call: 1–888–270–1055.
In Canada, call: 1–800–565–3673.
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Required to activate Vehicle Health Report and to view the reports
online.
• Required to activate the subscription-based SYNC Services and to
personalize your Saved Points and Favorites.
• Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available
for SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted
when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

422

SYNC®

Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of
the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are
broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way,
so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions
as it could cause them damage. See your device’s manual for further
information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See your authorized
dealer.
For your safety, some SYNC functions are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device’s manual before using it with SYNC.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile
within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is
created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your
cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the
system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and
retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a
short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system
activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems that may occur.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

423

The cellular profile, media device index, and development log remain in
the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in
the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you
no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you
perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to
the vehicle’s SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent
consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford
Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further privacy information, see
the sections on 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic, Directions
and Information.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands.
This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in
front of you.
Initiating a Voice Session
Push the voice icon; a tone sounds and Listening appears in the
display. Say any of the following:
Say:

If you want to:

“Phone”
“USB”
“Bluetooth Audio”
“Line in”

Make calls.
Access the device connected to your USB port.
Stream audio from your phone.
Access the device connected to the auxiliary
input jack.
“Cancel”
Cancel the requested action.
“SYNC”
Return to the main menu.
Adjust the level of voice interaction and
“Voice settings”
feedback.
“Vehicle Health Report” Run a vehicle health report.*
“Services”
Access the SYNC Services portal.*
“Mobile apps”
Access mobile applications.*
“Help”
Hear a list of voice commands available in the
current mode.
*

If equipped, U.S. only.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

424

SYNC®

System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions
and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings). You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you
learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
Push the voice icon; when prompted, say “Voice settings”, then
any of the following:
When you say:
“Interaction mode standard”
“Interaction mode advanced”

The system:
Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance.
Provides less audible interaction and
more tone prompts.

The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not
sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your
request. (For example, the system may ask “Phone, is that correct?”) If
turned off, the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested
and you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings.
“Confirmation prompts on”
“Confirmation prompts off”
The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level
of several options based on your voice command. When turned on, you
may be prompted with as many as four possibilities for clarification.
For example, “Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home. Say 2 after
the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after the tone to call Jane
Doe at home.” Or, “Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe, Say 2 after the
tone to play Johnny Doe.”
“Phone candidate lists on”
“Phone candidate lists off”
“Media candidate lists on”
“Media candidate lists off”

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

425

Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system
from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
• At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
USING SYNC WITH YOUR PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular
phone’s functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth
wireless technology support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call
• Ending a call
• Using privacy mode
• Dialing a number
• Redialing
• Call waiting notification
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your
phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

426

SYNC®

Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 2000 entries
per Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the
transmission is in position P.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
1. Press the phone button; when the display indicates no phone is
paired, press OK.
2. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
3. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
4. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
Depending on your phone’s capability and your market, the system may
prompt you with questions such as setting the current phone as the
primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first
upon vehicle start-up), downloading your phone book, etc.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and that
the transmission is in position P.
1. Press the phone button and scroll until System Settings is selected.
2. Press OK and scroll until Bluetooth Devices is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll until Add Bluetooth Device is selected and press OK.
4. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
5. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
6. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display. The display indicates when
the pairing is successful.
7. The system then prompts with questions such as if you would like to
set the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC
automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up),
download your phone book, etc.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

427

Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and say “Phone”. Say any of the following:

“PHONE”
“Call ”1,2
“Call  on mobile OR cell”1,2
“Call  on other”1,2
“Phone book  at home”2
“Phone book  on mobile OR cell”2
“Call history outgoing”2
“Phone book  on Other”2
“Call history missed”2
“Menu”2,3
“Join”
“Call  at home”1,2
“Call  at work” OR “Call  in office”1,2
“Dial”1,4
“Phone book ”2
“Phone book  at work” OR “Phone book  at office”2
“Call history incoming”2
“Connections”2
“Go to privacy”
“Hold”
1

These commands do not require you to say “Phone” first.
These commands are not available until phone information is completely
downloaded using Bluetooth.
3
See “MENU” table below.
4
See “DIAL” table below.
2

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

428

SYNC®
“MENU”
“(Phone) connections”*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification off”*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification on”*
“(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer”*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1”*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 2”*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 3”*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer off”*
“Battery”
“Phone name”
“Signal”
“Text message inbox”

*
Words in ( ) are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system
to understand the command.

Phone book commands: When you ask SYNC® to access a phone book
name, number, etc., the requested information appears in the display to
view. Press the phone button and say “Call” to call the contact.
“DIAL”
“411” (four-one-one), “911” (nine-one-one)
“700 (seven hundred)” (seven hundred)
“800 (eight hundred)” (eight hundred)
“900 (nine hundred)” (nine hundred)
“#” (pound)
“ 0–9”
“Asterisk” (*)
“Clear” (deletes all entered digits)
“Delete” (deletes one digit)
“Plus”
“Star”
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press
MENU to go to the PHONE menu.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

429

Making Calls
Press the voice icon and when prompted say:
1. Say “Call ” or “Dial”, then the desired number.
2. When the system confirms the number, say “Dial” again to initiate the
call.
To erase the last spoken digit, say “Delete” or press the left arrow
button. To erase all spoken digits, say “Clear” or press and hold the left
arrow button.
To end the call, press and hold the phone button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
• Answer the call by pressing the phone button.
• Reject the call by pressing and holding the phone button.
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active Call
During an active call, you have additional menu features which become
available such as putting a call on hold, joining calls, etc. Use the arrow
buttons to scroll through the menu options.
To access:
1. Press MENU during an active call.
2. When Active Call Menu is selected, press OK.
3. Scroll to cycle through the following options:
When you select:
Mute Call?
Privacy

Call Hold

You can:
Mute the call.
Switch a call from an active hands-free
environment to your cellular phone for a more
private conversation.
Press OK when Privacy on/off appears.
(The display indicates In Privacy and the
system transfers your call.)
Put an active call on hold.
Press OK when Place Call on Hold? appears.
To answer another call at this time, press the
phone button.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

430
When you select:
Join Calls

Enter Tones

Phonebook

Call History

Return

SYNC®
You can:
Join two separate calls.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC
or use voice commands to place the second
call. Once actively in the second call, press
MENU.
3. Scroll until Join Calls appears and press
OK. Press OK again when Join Calls? appears.
Note: SYNC supports a maximum of three
callers on a multiparty/conference call.
Enter “tones” such as numbers for passwords.
Scroll until the desired number appears in the
display, then press OK; a tone sounds as
confirmation. Repeat as necessary.
Access your phonebook contacts.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through
your phonebook contacts.
2. Press OK again when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button.
Access your call history log.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through
your call history options (incoming, outgoing
or missed).
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the
selection.
Exit the current menu.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

431

Accessing Features through the Phone Menu
SYNC’s phone menu allows you to redial a number, access your call
history and phone book and send text messages as well as access phone
and system settings. You can also access advanced features, such as 911
Assist, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select:
Phone Redial

Call History1

Phonebook1,2

You can:
Redial the last number called (if available).
Press OK to select, then press OK again to
confirm.
Allows you to access any previously dialed,
received or missed calls while your phone has
been connected to the system.
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select from Call History Incoming,
Call History Outgoing or Call History Missed.
Press OK make your selection.
3. Press OK or the phone button to call the
desired selection.
Note: The system attempts to automatically
re-download your phone book and call history
each time your phone connects to SYNC
(if the auto download feature is on and your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone supports
this feature).
Allows you to access your downloaded
phonebook.
1. Press OK to confirm and enter. If your
phonebook has fewer than 255 listings, they
appear alphabetically in flat file mode. If there
are more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
2. Scroll until the desired contact appears,
then press OK.
3. Press OK or the phone button.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

432
When you select:
Text Message1
Phone Settings1

SYNC Services3

911 Assist4

Vehicle Health
Report3
Mobile Apps3
System Settings

Exit Phone Menu

SYNC®
You can:
Enables you to send, download and delete
text messages.
Allows you to view your phone’s status, set
ring tones, select your message notification,
change phone book entries and automatically
download your cellular phone among other
features.
Access the SYNC services portal where you
can request various types of information,
traffic reports and directions.
Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for
you after an accident (if the feature is used
properly).
Create and receive a diagnostic report card on
your vehicle.
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile
applications on your smartphone.
Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings
(add, connect, set as primary, on/off, delete)
as well as Advanced menu listings (prompts,
languages, defaults, master reset, install
application and system information).
Exit the phone menu by pressing OK.

1

This is a phone-dependent feature.

2

This is a phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.

3

If equipped, United States only.

4

If equipped, United States and Canada only.

Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages.
The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do
not have to take your eyes off the road.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

433

Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text
messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a speed-dependent feature and can
only be done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text message.
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the display
indicates you have a new message. You have these options:
1. Press the voice button, wait for the prompt and say “Read Message”
to have SYNC read the message to you.
2. Press OK to receive and open the text message or do nothing and
the message goes into your text message inbox. Press OK again and
SYNC reads your message aloud as you are not able to view the
message. You can then also choose whether you’d like to reply or
forward the message.
3. Press OK and scroll to choose between:
• Reply to Text Message: Press OK to access and then scroll
through the list of pre-defined messages to send.
• Forward Text Message: Press OK to forward the message to
anyone in your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose
Enter Number.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone is
compatible, SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text
messages.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Text Message appears and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Send Text Message? enables you to send a new text message based on
a pre-defined set of 15 messages.
Download Unread Msgs allows you to download your unread messages
(only) to SYNC. To download the messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates your messages are being downloaded. When complete,
SYNC takes you to your inbox.
Delete All Messages? allows you to delete current text messages from
SYNC (not your phone). To delete the messages, press OK to select.
The display indicates when all your text messages have been deleted and
SYNC returns you to the text message menu.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

434

SYNC®

Note: SYNC does not automatically download all of your unread text
messages at every ignition cycle (as it does with call history and
phonebook if automatic download is set to on).
Return exits the current menu when you press OK.
If you select Send Text Message?:
1. Press OK to select. If the system detects your phone does not
support this feature, Unsupported appears in the display and SYNC
returns to the main menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through the message options in the following chart.
3. Press OK when the desired selection is in the display. The system
now needs to know who to send the message to.
4. Scroll to cycle through Phonebook or Call History entries. You can
also select Enter Number to audibly enter a desired number.
5. Press OK to enter the desired menu and scroll to select the specific
contact.
6. Press OK when the contact appears and press OK again to confirm
when the system asks if you would like to send the message. Each
text message is sent with the following signature: “This message was
sent from my ”.
Pre-defined text message options
Can’t talk right now
Call me
Call you later
Be there in 10 minutes
Be there in 20 minutes
Yes
No
Why?
Thanks
Where R you?
I need more directions
I love you
Too funny
Can’t wait to see you
I’m stuck in traffic

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

435

Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to
access and adjust features such as your ring tone, text message
notification, modify your phone book and also set up automatic
download.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Phone Settings appears, then press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
When you select:
Phone Status

You can:
See the provider, name, signal power, battery
power and roaming status of your connected
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to view the
information. When done, press OK again to
return to the phone status menu.
Select which ring tone sounds during an
Set Ringer
incoming call (one of the system’s or your
phone’s).
1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear
Ringer 1, Ringer 2, Ringer 3 and Phone
Ringer.
2. Press OK to select.
Note: If your phone supports in-band ringing,
your phone’s ringer sounds when Phone
Ringer is chosen.
Message Notification Have the option of hearing an audible tone to
notify you when a text message arrives.
1. Press OK to select and scroll between
Message Notification On or Message
Notification Off.
2. Press OK to select.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

436
When you select:
Modify Phonebook

Auto Download

Return

SYNC®
You can:
Modify the contents of your phone book
(i.e., add, delete, download). Press OK to
select and scroll between:
Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts
from your phone book. Push the desired
contact(s) on your phone. See your phone’s
user guide on how to push contacts.
Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the
current phone book and call history. When
Delete Phonebook appears, press OK to
confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
Download Phonebook: Press OK to select
and press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.
Automatically download your phone book
each time your phone connects to SYNC.
Press OK to select. When Auto Download
On? appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded each
time.
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook
every time your phone connects to SYNC.
Your phonebook, call history and text
messages can only be accessed when your
specific phone is connected to SYNC.
Note: Downloading times are phone- and
quantity-dependent.
Note: When auto download is on, any
changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download are deleted.
Exit the current menu.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

437

System Settings
System Settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the
menu options.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect, delete and set a
phone as primary as well as turn your Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect, delete, set a phone as primary,
and turn Bluetooth on or off.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select:
Add Bluetooth
Device*
Connect Bluetooth
Device

You can:
See Using SYNC with your phone earlier in
this chapter for pairing instructions.
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
previously paired phones.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen,
then press OK to connect the phone.
Note: Only one device can be connected at a
time. When another phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

438

SYNC®

If you select:
Set Primary Phone

You can:
Set a previously paired phone as your primary
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to select the
desired phone. Press OK to confirm.
Note: SYNC attempts to connect with the
primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a
phone is selected as primary, it appears first
in the list and is marked with an asterisk (*).
Set Bluetooth On/Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK.
Note: Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all
Bluetooth devices and deactivates all
Bluetooth features.
Delete a paired phone.
Delete Device
Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete all previously paired phones (and all
Delete All Devices
information originally saved with those
phones).
Press OK to select.
Exit the current menu.
Return
*

This is a speed-dependent feature.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

439

Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select:
Prompts

Languages

Factory Defaults

You can:
Get help from SYNC by using questions,
helpful hints or asking you for a specific
action. To turn these prompts on or off:
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
Choose between English, Espanol and
Francais. Once selected, all of SYNC’s radio
displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. If you change the
language setting, the display indicates that
the system is updating. When complete, SYNC
takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Return to the factory default settings.
This selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

440
If you select:
Master Reset

Install Application

System Info

MAP Profile

Return

SYNC®
You can:
Completely erase all information stored on
SYNC (phonebook, call history, text messages
and paired devices) and return to the factory
default settings.
Press OK to select. The display indicates
when complete and SYNC takes you back to
the Advanced menu.
Install applications you have downloaded.
Press OK and scroll to select. Press OK to
confirm.
Access the Auto Version number as well as
the FPN number.
Press OK to select.
This is a Bluetooth component which can
further help your phone with the exchange of
text messages.
Exit the current menu.

SYNC APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone
must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone’s compatibility, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
• SYNC Services (if equipped, United States only): Provides access to
traffic, directions and information such as travel, horoscopes, stock
prices and more.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency.
• Vehicle Health Report (if equipped, United States only): Provides a
diagnostic and maintenance report card of your vehicle.
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications
such as Pandora and Stitcher (if your phone is compatible).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

441

911 Assist®
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on prior to a
crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency
call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911
Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in the
vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a
crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure that you read the 911 Assist
privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any user, that setting applies
for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, a voice message plays
and/or a display message/icon comes on when the vehicle is started after
a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works
with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable
safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC
equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing
911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. For more
information about 911 Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
• For information on airbag deployment, see the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter.
• For information on the fuel pump shut-off, see the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

442

SYNC®

Setting 911 Assist On
Perform the following:
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until 911 Assist is selected.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.
4. Scroll to select between On and Off selections.
5. Press OK when the desired option appears in the radio display.
Set On or Set Off appears in the display as confirmation.
Off selections include: Off with reminder and Off without reminder.
Off with reminder provides a display and voice reminder at phone
connection at vehicle start. Off without reminder provides a display
reminder only without a voice reminder at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist works properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use.
• SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
• A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and
connected to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the
United States, Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency
number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off
(which would activate 911 Assist); however, if 911 Assist is triggered,
SYNC tries to contact emergency services. If a connected phone is
damaged or loses connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to
connect to, any available previously paired phone and tries to make the
call to 911.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the
call. Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC attempting to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar message: “SYNC will attempt to
call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and
hold the phone button on your steering wheel.”

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

443

If the call is not cancelled and a successful call is made, a pre-recorded
message is played for the 911 operator, then the occupant(s) in the
vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your
name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware was damaged in a crash.
• The vehicle’s battery or SYNC system has no power.
• The phone(s) paired and connected to the system was thrown from
the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist is set on, it may disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators the vehicle location, and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the
feature on.
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot
replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health
Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored
by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other
system, (i.e., brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle
damage and serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to
use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or
subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review the
Vehicle Health Report privacy notice.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

444

SYNC®

Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not
be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering, you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for
SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage
intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your vehicle’s overall health in the form
of a diagnostic report card. The vehicle health report contains valuable
information such as:
• Vehicle Diagnostic Information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
• Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer.
You can run a report (after the vehicle has been running a minimum of
60 seconds) by pressing the voice button and saying “Vehicle health
report”, or pressing the phone button.
To run a report using the phone button:
1. Press the phone button to enter Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Vehicle Health is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Vehicle Health Report options
User Preferences:
Automatic Reports: Press OK and select on
Press OK to select
or off. Select On to have SYNC automatically
and enter the menu. prompt you to run a health report at certain
Scroll to select from: mileage intervals. Note: You must first turn
this feature on before you can select the
mileage intervals at which you would like to
be prompted.
Mileage Intervals: Press OK. Scroll to select
between 5000, 7500 or 10000 mile intervals
and press OK to make your selection.
Return: Press OK to exit the menu.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®
Run Report?

445

Vehicle Health Report options
Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of
your vehicle’s diagnostic systems and send the
results to Ford where it is combined with
scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls and other field service actions and
unserviced vehicle inspection items from your
authorized dealer.

Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may
collect your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and
diagnostic information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates
to Vehicle Health Report may also collect additional vehicle information.
Ford may use the vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you
do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information,
do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See www.SYNCMyRide.com - Vehicle Health Report
Terms and Conditions, and Privacy Statement - for more information.
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions & Information (TDI)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC
Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. See Using SYNC
with your phone for pairing instructions.
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not
blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing
so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in
an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of
errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

446

SYNC®

Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction
and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or
business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you
request and for continuous improvement, the service may collect and
record call details and voice communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you
do not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel
information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions,
do not activate or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology
and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic
reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports,
weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say “Services”. This initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone.
3. Once you are connected to the service, follow the voice prompts to
request the desired service, such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can
also say “What are my choices?” to receive a complete list of available
services from which to choose.
4. Say “Services” to return to the services main menu or for help, say
“Help”.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Services appears in the display.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the Services menu. The display
indicates the system is connecting.
4. Press OK. SYNC initiates the call to the Services portal.
5. Once connected, follow the voice prompts to request your desired
Service, such as Traffic or Directions. You can also say “What are my
choices?” to receive a complete list of available services from which
to choose.
6. To return to the Services menu, say “Services” or for help, say
“Help”.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

447

Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say “Directions” or “Business
search”. To find the closest business or type of business to your
current location, just say “Business search” and then “Search near
me”. If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say
“Operator” at any time within a Directions or Business search to
speak with a live operator. You may also be prompted to speak with
an operator when the automatic system has difficulty matching your
voice request. The live operator can assist you by searching for
businesses by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections. Operator Assist is
a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more information
on Operator Assist visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your destination. Once your
destination is selected, your current vehicle location is uploaded and
a route based on current traffic conditions is calculated and sent
back to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the
phone call is automatically ended. You then receive audible and
visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destination.
3. While on an active route, you can select or say “Route summary” or
“Route status” to view the Route Summary turn list or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the
route or update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Just say, “Yes” when prompted and a new route will be
delivered to your vehicle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

448

SYNC®

Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Good-bye” from the SYNC Services main menu.
Personalizing

Push to interrupt

Portable

SYNC Services quick tips
You can personalize your Services feature to
provide quicker access to your most used or
favorite information. You can save address
points such as work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or
a news category. To learn more, log onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Press the voice button at any time (while you
are connected to SYNC TDI Services) to
interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip
(such as a sports report), wait for the
listening tone, and say your voice command.
Your subscription is associated with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number,
not your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).
You can pair and connect your phone to any
vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and
Information and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
You can even access your account outside the
vehicle. Just use the number on your phone’s
call history. Traffic and Directions features do
not function properly but information services
and the 411 connect and text message
features are available.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

449

SYNC AppLink™
Note: This feature is only available in the United States.
Note: Your smartphone must be paired and connected to SYNC to access
AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port in order
to start the application. It is recommended to lock your iPhone after
starting an application.
Note: The AppLink feature is not available if your vehicle is equipped
with the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch system.
Depending on your display type, you can access AppLink from the media
menu, the phone menu, or by using voice commands. Once an app is
running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering wheel controls.
To Access Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the phone button to access the SYNC phone menu on-screen.
2. Scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to access a list of available
applications.
3. Scroll through the list of available applications and press OK to
select a particular app.
4. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
5. Select “SYNC-Media” by pressing OK.
6. Scroll until “ Menu” is displayed (such as Pandora
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s
features, such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more
information, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using the Media Menu
1. Press AUX button on the center console.
2. Press MENU to access the SYNC menu.
3. Select “SYNC-Media” by pressing OK.
4. Then scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to access a list of available
applications.
5. Scroll through the list of available applications and press OK to
select a particular app.
6. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
7. Select “SYNC-Media” by pressing OK.
8. Scroll until “ Menu” is displayed (such as Pandora
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s
features, such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more
information, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

450

SYNC®

To Access Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice icon.
2. When prompted, say “Mobile Apps”.
3. Say the name of the application after the tone.
4. The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can
press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, such
as “Play Station Quickmix”. Say “Help” to discover available voice
commands.
USING SYNC WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your digital music player over
the vehicle’s speaker system using the system’s media menu or voice
commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories,
such as artists, albums, etc.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including:
iPod, Zune™, Plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC also
supports audio formats such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media Player via the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, ensure that the
device is turned on.
To connect using voice commands:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press the voice icon and when prompted, say “USB”.
3. You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice
commands. See the media voice commands.
To connect using the system menu:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
3. Scroll until Select Source appears and press OK.
4. Scroll to select USB and press OK.
5. Depending on how many digital media files are on your connected
device, Indexing may appear in the radio display. When indexing is
complete, the screen returns to the Play Menu.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

451

6. Press OK and scroll through selections of:
• Play All
• Artists
• Albums
• Genres
• Playlists
• Tracks
• Explore USB
• Similar Music
• Return
When the desired selection appears in the display, press OK to build
your desired music selection.
What’s Playing?
At any time when a track is playing, you can press the voice
icon and ask the system, “What’s playing?”. The system reads
the metadata tags (if populated) of the playing track to you.
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and, when prompted, say “USB” then any
of the following:
“USB”
“Autoplay off”
“Autoplay on”
“(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play album ”1,3
“Play all”
“Play artist ”1,3
“Play genre ”1,3
“Play next folder”2

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

452

SYNC®
“USB”
“Play next track”
“Play playlist ”1,3
“Play previous folder”2
“Play previous track”
“Play song ”1,3
“Play track ”1,3
“Refine album ”1,3
“Refine artist ”1,3
“Refine song ”1,3
“Refine track ”1,3
“Repeat off”
“Repeat on”
“Search album ”1,3
“Search artist ”1,3
“Search genre ”1,3
“Search song ”1,3
“Search track ”1,3
“Shuffle off”
“Shuffle on”
“Similar music”
“What’s playing?”

1
“” is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of any
desired group, artist, etc.
2

Voice commands which are only available in folder mode.

3

Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

453

Voice command guide
Turn on to listen to music which has already
been randomly indexed during the indexing
process.
Turn off and the system does not begin to
play any of your music until all media has all
been indexed. Indexing times can vary from
device to device and also with regard to the
number of songs being indexed.
“Search/Play Genre” The system searches all the data from your
indexed music and, if available, begins to play
the chosen type of music. You can only play
genres of music which are present in the
GENRE metadata tags that you have on your
digital media player.
“Similar Music”
The system compiles a playlist and then plays
similar music to what is currently playing
from the USB port using indexed metadata
information.
“Search/Play
The system searches for a specific
Artist/Track/Album” artist/track/album from the music indexed
through the USB port.
“Refine”
This allows you to make your previous
command more specific. For example, if you
asked to search and play all music by a
certain artist, you could then say “refine
album” and choose a specific album from the
list to view. If you then select Play, the system
only plays music from that specific album.
“Autoplay”

Press the voice icon and when prompted say “Bluetooth Audio” and then
any of the following:
“BLUETOOTH AUDIO”
“(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play next track ”
“Play previous track ”

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

454

SYNC®

Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your media source, how to play
your music (by artist, genre, shuffle, repeat, etc.), and also to add,
connect or delete devices.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select:
Play Menu

Select Source

You can:
Play your music by artist, album, genre,
playlists, tracks, similar music or to simply,
play all. You can also choose to Explore USB
to view the supported digital music files on
your playing device.
See Play Menu later in this section for more
information.
SYNC USB: Press OK to access music
plugged into your USB port. You can also plug
in devices to charge them (if supported by
your device). Once connected, the system
indexes any readable media files. (The time
required to complete this depends on the size
of the media content being indexed.) If
Autoplay is on, you can access media files
randomly as they are indexed. If turned off,
indexed media is not available until the
indexing process is complete. SYNC is capable
of indexing thousands of average size media
and notifies you if the maximum indexing file
size is reached.
Bluetooth Audio: This is a phone-dependent
feature which allows you to stream music
playing on your Bluetooth-enabled phone.
If supported by your device, you can press
SEEK to play the previous or next track.
SYNC Line In: Press OK to select and play
music from your portable music player over
the vehicle’s speakers.
Note: If you have already connected a device
to the USB port, you cannot access the line in
feature. Some digital media players require
both USB and line in ports to stream data and
music separately.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®
When you select:
Media Settings

Mobile Apps

System Settings

Exit Media Menu

455

You can:
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and
select your Autoplay settings. Once these
selections are turned on, they remain on until
turned off. Press SEEK to play the previous
or next track.
Note: Some digital media players require
both USB and line in ports to stream data and
music separately. Press OK to select and then
scroll to choose from:
Shuffle: Press OK to shuffle available media
files in the current playlist. Note: To shuffle
all media tracks, you must select Play All in
the Play Menu and then select Shuffle.
Repeat: Press OK to repeat any song.
Autoplay: Press OK to listen to music which
has already been randomly indexed during
the indexing process.
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile
applications on your smart phone. See SYNC
AppLink earlier in this chapter for more
information.
Access Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well
as Advanced menu listings (prompts,
languages, defaults, master reset, install
application and system information).
Note: See System Settings for more
information.
Press OK to exit the media menu.

Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist, album,
genre, playlist, track, similar music or even to explore what is on your
USB device.
1. Make sure that your device is plugged into the USB port and is
turned on.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
3. Scroll to select the Play Menu and press OK.
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no
media. If there are media files, you have the following options to scroll
through and select from:

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

456
When you select:
Play All

Artists

Albums

Genres

Playlists

SYNC®
You can:
Play all indexed media (tracks) from your
playing device in flat file mode, one at a time
in numerical order.
Press OK to select. The first track title
appears in the display.
Sort all indexed media by artist. Once
selected, the system lists and then play all
artists and tracks alphabetically. If there are
less than 255 indexed artist, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are categorized in alphabetical
categories.
1. Press OK to select. You can select to play
All Artists or any indexed artist.
2. Scroll until the desired artist is chosen and
press OK.
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are
less than 255 indexed albums, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
1. Press OK to enter the album menu and
select from playing all albums or from any
individual indexed album.
2. Scroll until the desired album is chosen and
press OK.
Sort indexed music by genre (category) type.
SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file
mode. If there are more than 255, SYNC
automatically organizes them into alphabetical
categories.
Press OK to select and then scroll to select
the desired genre and press OK.
Access your playlists (from formats such as
ASX, .M3U, .WPL, .MTP.). The system lists
your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode.
If there are more than 255, they are organized
into alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired playlist and press OK.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®
When you select:
Tracks

Explore USB

Similar Music

Return

457

You can:
Search for and play a specific track which
has been indexed. SYNC lists your tracks
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more than 255, SYNC automatically organizes
them into alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired track and press OK.
Explore all supported digital media on your
media device connected to the USB port.
You can only view media content which is
compatible with SYNC; other files saved are
not visible.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to explore
indexed media on your flash drive.
Play music similar to what is currently playing
from the USB port. The system uses the
metadata information of each song to compile
a playlist for you.
Press OK to select. The system creates a new
list of similar songs and begins playing. The
metadata tags must be populated for this
feature to include each track.
Note: With certain playing devices, if your
metadata tags are not populated, the tracks
won’t be available in voice recognition, play
menu or similar music. However, if you place
these tracks onto your playing device in “Mass
Storage Device Mode”, they are available in
voice recognition, play menu browsing and
similar music. Unknowns are placed into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Exit the current menu.

System Settings
System settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete a
device as turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Your Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults and perform a master reset.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

458

SYNC®

Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as turn
Bluetooth on and off.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from:
When you select:
Add Bluetooth
Device*

You can:
Allows you to pair additional devices to the
system.
1. Press OK to select and press OK again
when Find SYNC appears in the display.
2. Follow the directions in your phone’s user
guide to put your phone into discovery mode.
A six-digit PIN appears in the display.
3. When prompted on your phone’s six-digit
display, enter the PIN.
Connect Bluetooth
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
Device
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen
and press OK to connect the device.
Set Bluetooth On/Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK. Turning Bluetooth off disconnects
all Bluetooth devices and deactivates
Bluetooth features.
Delete a paired media device.
Delete Device
Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete all previously paired devices.
Delete All Devices
Press OK to select.
Exit the current menu.
Return
*

This is a speed-dependent feature

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

459

Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, language,
performing a master reset as well as returning to factory defaults.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to access the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from the following:
When you select:
Prompts

Languages

Factory Defaults

Master Reset

Application

Return

You can:
Have SYNC guide you via questions, helpful
hints or ask you for a specific action.
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
Choose from English, Francais and Espanol.
The displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the
display indicates that the system is updating.
When complete, SYNC takes you back to the
Advanced menu.
Return to the factory default settings.
This selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
Completely erase all information stored on
SYNC (all phonebook, call history, text
messages and all paired devices) and return
to the factory default settings.
Download new software applications
(if available) and then load the desired
applications through your USB port.
See the web site for more information.
Exit the current menu.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

460

SYNC®

TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see
the tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your phone’s compatibility,
register your account and set preferences as well as access a
customer representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for
more information.
Phone issues
Possible
Possible solution(s)
cause(s)
Excessive
The audio control Review your phone’s user guide
background noise settings on your
regarding audio adjustments.
during a phone
phone may be
call.
affecting SYNC
performance.
During a call, I can Possible phone
Try turning off the device,
hear the other
malfunction.
resetting the device, removing the
person but they
device’s battery, then trying again.
cannot hear me.
SYNC is not able
• This is a
• Go to the website to review
phone-dependent your phone’s compatibility.
to download my
• Try turning off the device,
phonebook.
feature, OR
• Possible phone resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
malfunction.
again.
• Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
• Use the SYNCmyphone feature
available on the website.
Issue

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

461

Phone issues
Possible
Possible solution(s)
cause(s)
The system says
Limitations on
• Try pushing your phonebook
Phonebook
your phone’s
contacts to SYNC by using the
Downloaded but
capability.
Add Contacts feature.
my phonebook in
• If the missing contacts are
SYNC is empty or
stored on your SIM card, try
is missing
moving them to the device
contacts.
memory.
• Remove any pictures or special
ring tones associated with the
missing contact.
• Go to the website to review
• This is a
I am having
trouble connecting phone-dependent your phone’s compatibility.
feature, OR
• Try turning off the device,
my phone to
• Possible phone resetting the device or removing
SYNC.
malfunction.
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Try deleting your device from
SYNC, deleting SYNC from your
device and trying again.
• Check the security and auto
accept/prompt always settings
relative to the SYNC Bluetooth
connection on your phone.
• Update your device’s software
firmware.
• Turn off the Auto phonebook
download setting.
• Go to the website to review
Text messaging is • This is a
not working on
phone-dependent your phone’s compatibility.
• Try turning off the device,
SYNC.
feature, OR
• Possible phone resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
malfunction.
again.
Issue

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

462

SYNC®

USB and media issues
Possible
Possible solution(s)
cause(s)
I am having
Possible device
• Try turning off the device,
trouble connecting malfunction.
resetting the device or removing
my device.
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Make sure you are using the
manufacturer’s cable.
• Make sure the USB cable is
properly inserted into the device
and the vehicle’s USB port.
• Make sure that the device does
not have an auto-install program
or active security settings.
SYNC does not
This is a device
Make sure you are not leaving the
recognize my
limitation.
device in your vehicle during very
device when I turn
hot or cold temperatures.
on the car.
Bluetooth audio
• This is a
Make sure the device is
does not stream.
phone-dependent connected to SYNC and that you
feature, OR
have pressed play on your device.
• The device is
not connected.
SYNC does not
• Your music files • Make sure that all song details
recognize music
may not contain
are populated.
that is on my
the proper artist, • Some devices require you to
device.
song title, album
change the USB settings from
or genre
mass storage to MTP class.
information, OR
• The file may be
corrupted, OR
• The song may
have copyright
protection which
does not allow it
to play.
Issue

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®

463

Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions and
Information) issues
Issue
Possible
Possible solution(s)
cause(s)
I received a text
• Your account
• This is a free feature, but you
that the Vehicle
may not be
must first register online to use it.
Health Report is
activated on the
• Make sure that your VIN is
not activated.
website, OR
correctly listed in your account.
• You may
have the wrong
VIN (vehicle
identification
number) listed.
The preferred
When you register your account,
I am unable to
retrieve the report dealer information you must list a preferred dealer. If
one is already listed, try selecting
on the website, or did not load
I receive a system correctly.
another dealer and logging out.
error.
Log back in and change it back to
your preferred dealer and retrieve
the report.
I am unable to
• This could be
• Update your mobile number in
your account on the website.
submit a report.
due to your
• Make sure you have full signal
phone’s
compatibility, OR strength and that your Bluetooth
volume level has been turned up.
• Bad signal
• Try deleting your phone and
strength, OR
• Your phone may performing a clean pairing.
not be activated
on the website.
I heard a
• The phone in
• This is a free feature, but you
commercial when I use is not
must first register online to use it.
tried to use
activated, OR
• Turn off ID blocker on your
Traffic, Directions • Your phone has phone as the system recognizes
and Information.
ID blocker active. you by your phone number.
• Make sure the currently
connected phone is the same one
that is registered on your
SyncMyRide account.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

464

SYNC®

Voice command issues
Possible
Possible solution(s)
cause(s)
SYNC does not
• You may be
• Review the Phone voice
understand what I using the wrong
commands and the Media voice
am saying.
voice commands, commands at the beginning of
their respective sections.
OR
• You may be
• Be aware that SYNC’s
speaking too soon microphone is either in your rear
or at the wrong
view mirror or in the headliner
time.
just above the windshield.
• Review the media voice
SYNC does not
• You may be
using the wrong
commands at the beginning of the
understand the
name of a song or voice commands, media section.
• Say the song or artist exactly
artist.
OR
• You may not be as listed. If you say, “Play Artist
Prince”, the system does not
saying the name
play music by Prince and the
exactly as it is
Revolution or Prince and the
saved, OR
• The system may New Power Generation.
not be reading the • Make sure you are saying the
name the same
complete title, such as “California
remix featuring Jennifer Nettles”.
way you are
• If the songs are saved in all
saying it.
CAPS, you have to spell them.
LOLA requires you to say, “Play
L-O-L-A”.
• Do not use special characters in
the title as the system does not
recognize them.
Issue

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

SYNC®
Issue
SYNC does not
understand or is
calling the wrong
contact when I
want to make a
call.

465

Voice command issues
Possible
Possible solution(s)
cause(s)
• You may be
• Review the phone voice
using the wrong
commands at the beginning of the
voice commands, phone section.
• Make sure you are saying the
OR
• You may not be contacts exactly as listed. For
example, if a contact is saved as
saying the name
Joe Wilson, say “Call Joe Wilson”.
exactly as it is
• The system works better if you
saved, OR
• Contacts in your list full names, such as “Joe
phonebook may be Wilson” rather than “Joe”.
• Do not use special characters
very short and
such as 123 or ICE, as the system
similar, or they
does not recognize them.
may contain
special characters, • If contacts are saved in CAPS,
you have to spell them. JAKE
OR
• Your phonebook requires you to say, “Call
J-A-K-E”.
contacts may be
saved in CAPS.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

466

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

INTRODUCTION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.

A

G

B

F

E

D

C

A. Phone
B. Navigation (or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation)
C. Climate
D. Settings
E. Home
F. Information
G. Entertainment

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

467

This system uses a four-corner strategy to provide quick access several
vehicle features and settings. The touchscreen provides easy interaction
with your cellular phone, multimedia, climate control and navigation
system. The corners display any active modes within those menus, such
as phone status or the climate temperature.
Note: Some features are not available while your vehicle is moving.
Note: Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access
and control audio features for 30 minutes after you switch the ignition
off (and no doors open).
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
• Making and Receiving Calls
• Quick Dial
• Phonebook
• Call History
• Text Messaging
• Settings
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following:
• My Home
• Favorites
• Previous Destinations
• Point of Interest
• Emergency
• Street Address
• Intersection
• City Center
• Map
• Edit Route Cancel Route
CLIMATE
Press to select any of the following:
• Driver Settings
• Recirculated Air
• Auto
• Dual
• Passenger Settings
• A/C
• Defrost

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

468

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
SETTINGS

Press to select any of the following:
• Clock
• Display
• Sound
• Vehicle
• Settings
• Help
HOME
Press to access your home screen. Depending on your vehicle’s option
package and software, your screens may vary in appearance from the
descriptions in this section. Your features may also be limited depending
on your market. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
INFORMATION
Press to select any of the following:
• SYNC Services
• SIRIUS Travel Link
• Alerts
• Calendar
• SYNC Apps
If the icon is yellow, see Alerts in the Information section of this
chapter.
ENTERTAINMENT
Press to select any of the following:
• AM
• FM
• SIRIUS
• CD
• USB
• BT Stereo
• SD Card
• A/V In

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

469

Using the Touch-sensitive Controls on Your System
To turn a feature on and off, just touch the graphic with your finger.
To get the best performance from the touch-sensitive controls:
• Do not press hard on the controls. They are sensitive to light touch.
• Use your bare finger to touch the center of a touch-control graphic.
Touching off-center of the graphic may affect operation of a nearby
control.
• Make sure your hands are clean and dry.
• Keep metal and other conductive material away from the surface of the
touchscreen as this may cause electronic interference (for example,
inadvertently turning on a feature other than the one you meant to
turn on).
Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may also have these
controls on your bezel:
• Power: Switch the media or climate features off and on.
• VOL: Control the volume of playing media.
• Fan: Control the speed of the climate system fan.
• Seek and Tune buttons: Use as you normally would in media modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD from the entertainment system.
• Radio preset buttons: Located below the touchscreen, you can use
these buttons to enter a radio preset in addition to using the
touchscreen.
• MEDIA: Touch the word repeatedly to see all available media modes.
The screen does not change, but you see the media change in the
lower left status bar.
• Hazard flasher: Switch the hazard flashers off and on.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a clean, soft cloth such as one used for cleaning glasses. If dirt or
fingerprints are still visible, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth.
Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not use detergent or
any type of solvent to clean the display.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you
aren’t able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30 am-8pm EST
In the United States, call: 1–888–270–1055
In Canada, call: 1–800–565–3673
Times are subject to change due to holidays.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

470

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Safety information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of
the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
• Do not attempt to service or repair SYNC®. See your authorized dealer.
• Do not operate playing devices if the power cords and/or cables are
broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and/or cables where
they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation of pedals,
seats and/or compartments, or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in the vehicle in extreme conditions as it
could cause damage to your device. Refer to your device’s user guide
for further information.
• For your safety, some SYNC® functions are speed dependent and
cannot be performed when the vehicle is traveling at speeds greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h).
• Ensure that you review your device’s user guide before using with
SYNC®.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your
vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is
stationary.
• Screens that are too crowded with information, such as Point of
Interest reviews and ratings, SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores, movie
times and ski conditions.
• Any action that requires you to use a keyboard is restricted, such as
entering a navigation destination or editing information.
• All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries (such as phone
contacts or recent phone call entries).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

471

See the following chart for more specific examples:
Cellular Phone

System Functionality

Wi-Fi and Wireless
Videos, Photos and
Graphics
Text Messages

Navigation

Restricted Features
Pairing a Bluetooth phone
Adding phonebook contacts or uploading
phonebook contacts (from a USB)
List entries are limited for phone contacts and
recent phone call entries
Editing the keypad code
Enabling Valet Mode
Editing settings while the rear view camera or
Active Park Assist are active
Editing wireless settings
Editing the list of wireless networks
Playing video
Editing the screen’s wallpaper or adding new
wallpaper
Composing text messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destination
Demo navigation route
Adding or Editing Address Book entries or
Avoid Areas

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

472

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Privacy information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC®, SYNC® creates a profile
within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is
created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your
cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to
SYNC®. In addition, if you connect a media device, SYNC® creates and
retains an index of media content supported by SYNC®. SYNC® also
records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all
recent SYNC® activity. The log profile and other SYNC® data may be
used to improve SYNC® and help diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log will remain
in the vehicle unless you delete it and are generally accessible only in
the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you
no longer plan to use SYNC® or the vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all information stored in SYNC®.
SYNC® data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access
to the vehicle’s SYNC® module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada will not access SYNC® data for any purpose other than as
described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further
privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist™ (if equipped),
Vehicle Health Report (if equipped), and Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front
of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the
chosen level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is
not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses
to your request.
When using voice commands, words and icons may appear in the lower
left status bar indicating the status of the voice session (such as
Listening, Success, Failed, Paused or Try Again).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

473

How to Use Voice Commands with Your System
Press the voice icon. After the tone, speak your command
clearly.
These commands can be said at any time.
“Cancel”
“Exit”
“Go back”
“List of commands”
“Main menu”
“Next page”
“Previous page”
“What can I say?”
“Help”
What Can I Say?
To access the available voice commands for the current session, do one
of the following:
• During a voice session, press the Help icon (?) in the lower left status
bar of the screen.
• Say, “What can I say?” for an on-screen listing of the possible voice
commands associated with your current voice session.
• Press the voice icon. After the tone, say, “Help” to hear a list of
possible voice commands.
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system
from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
• At any time, you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

474

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Accessing a List of Available Commands
• If you use the touchscreen, press the Settings icon > Help > Voice
Command List.
• If you use the steering wheel control, press the voice icon. After the
tone, speak your command clearly.
Voice command list
“Audio list of commands”
“Bluetooth audio list of commands”
“Browse list of commands”
“CD list of commands”
“Climate control list of commands”
“List of commands”
“Navigation list of commands”*
“Phone list of commands”
“Radio list of commands”
“SD card list of commands”
“Sirius satellite list of commands”**
“Travel link list of commands”*
“USB list of commands”
“Voice instructions list of commands”
“Voice settings list of commands”
“Help”
*

This command is only available when your vehicle is equipped with the
navigation system, and the navigation system SD card is in the card slot.
**
This command is only available when you have an active SIRIUS
satellite radio subscription.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

475

Voice Settings
Voice settings allow you to customize the level of system interaction,
help and feedback. The system defaults to standard interaction that uses
candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the highest
level of guidance and feedback.
Interaction Mode: Novice mode provides detailed interaction and
guidance while the advanced mode has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
Confirmation Prompts: The system uses these short questions to
confirm your voice request. If turned off, the system simply makes a best
guess as to what you requested. The system may still occasionally ask
you to confirm settings.
Phone/Media Candidate Lists: Candidate lists are lists of possible
results from your voice commands. The system creates these lists when
it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice
command.
To access these settings using the touchscreen:
1. Press theSettings icon > Settings > Voice Control.
2. Select from:
• Interaction Mode
• Confirmation Prompts
• Media Candidate Lists
• Phone Candidate Lists
• Voice Control Volume.
To access these settings using voice commands:
Press the voice icon. Wait for the prompt “Please say a
command”. Another tone sounds to let you know the system is
listening.
Voice settings using voice commands
“Interaction Mode Novice”
“Interaction Mode Advanced”
“Confirmation Prompts On”
“Confirmation Prompts Off”
“Phone Candidate Lists On”
“Phone Candidate Lists Off”
“Media Candidate Lists On”
“Media Candidate Lists Off”
“Help”

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

476

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Using Voice Commands with the Touchscreen Options
Your voice system has a dual mode feature which allows you to switch
between using voice commands and making on-screen selections. This is
most often available when using navigation.
Buttons outlined in blue indicate selections that are part of the dual
mode feature. For example, if while you are in a voice session rather
than saying the command “Enter Street Name” to change the field, you
can press Street and the voice session does not end. Instead, the voice
system changes to the Street field and asks you to say the street name.
You cannot use the buttons not outlined in blue as voice commands.
If they are touched during a voice session, the voice session ends.
For example, you can choose from the following on the Navigation home
screen:
• My Home
• Favorites
• Previous Destinations
• Point of Interest (POI)
• Emergency
• Street Address
• Intersection
• Cancel Route.
Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen
are:
“DESTINATION”
“Destination my home”
“Destination street address”
“Destination favorites”
“Destination previous destinations”
“Destination POI”
“Destination intersection”
“Destination emergency”
If you choose Street Address from the navigation screen, you can choose
from the following:
• Number
• City
• Street Name
• State/Prov.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

477

Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are:
“STREET ADDRESS”
“Enter house number”
“Change house number”
“Enter street name”
“Change street name”
“Enter city”
“Change city”
“Enter state”
“Change state”
If you choose Points of Interest from the navigation screen, you can
choose from the following:
• Search Area
• Search By Name
• Fuel Station
• ATM
• All Restaurants
• Accommodations
• Parking.
Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are:
“POINTS OF INTEREST” or “POI”
“Destination ”
“Search by name”
“Search by category”
“Change search area”
Note: These are just a sample of the voice commands available within
the Points of Interest section; the categories themselves are also
technically voice commands.
If you choose Intersection from the navigation screen, you can choose
from the following:
• 1st Street
• 2nd Street
• City
• State/Prov.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

478

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are:
“INTERSECTION”
“Enter first street name”
“Change first street name”
“Enter second street name”
“Change second street name”
“Enter city”
“Change city”
“Enter state”
“Change state”
The dual mode feature is also available when the voice system displays a
list of items to pick from during a voice session, where you would be
able to touch the line item or say “Line 2”. If the system does not
understand a voice command, or there are multiple options, the system
displays a voice command list for you.
ENTERTAINMENT

A
B
C

G

D
E
F

A. AM 1 and AM AST
B. FM 1, FM 2 and FM AST
C. SIRIUS
D. CD
E. USB

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

H

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

479

F. Touch this button to scroll down for more options, such as:
• SD Card
• BT Stereo
• A/V In
G. These buttons change with the media mode you are in.
H. Radio memory presets and CD controls.
Note: Some features may not be available in your area. Contact an
authorized dealer for more information.
You can access these options using the touchscreen or voice commands.
Browsing Device Content
When listening to audio on a device, you can browse through other
devices without having to change sources. For example, if you are
currently listening to audio on an SD card, you can browse all the artists
that are stored on your USB device.
Press the voice icon on the steering wheel. When prompted,
you can say:
“BROWSE” within Devices
“Browse”*
“Browse  games”
“Browse  channels”
“Browse CD track list”
“Browse Sirius channel guide”
“Browse SD card”
“Browse USB”
“Help”
*
If you have said “Browse”, you can then say any commands in the
following chart.
**
This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to
SIRIUS satellite radio.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

480

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

“BROWSE”
“ games”
” channels”
“CD track list”
“SD card”
“Sirius channel guide”
“USB”
“Help”
*
This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to
SIRIUS satellite radio.
**
For more commands in SD card or USB mode, see the “SD card and
USB Port” section of this chapter.
For a complete list of “Browse” voice commands, see USB and SD card
voice commands and Bluetooth audio voice commands in the
following sections.
Your voice system allows you to change audio sources with a simple voice
command. For example, if you are listening to music on a USB device, then
want to switch to a satellite radio channel, simply press the voice button on
the steering wheel controls and say the name of the SIRIUS station (such
as, “the Highway”). The following voice commands are available at the top
level of the voice session no matter which current audio source you are
listening to (such as a USB device or SIRIUS satellite radio). Note: This is
only available when your MyFord Touch system language is set to North
American English.
“AM <530 - 1710>”
“<530 - 1710>”
“Sirius <0-223>”*
“Play [genre] ”**
“Play [artist] ”**
“Play [album] ”**

“FM <87.7 – 107.9>”
“<87.7 – 107.9>”
“”*
“Play [playlist] ”**
“Play [song] ”**
“Play  by
”
“Play ”
“Sports games”*
*
This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to
SIRIUS satellite radio.
**
The commands that have [ ] around the word means that the word is
optional. For example, if you say, “Play Metallica”, this is the same as the
voice command, “Play [artist] ”.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

481

AM and FM
Touch the AM or FM tab to listen to the radio.
To change between AM and FM presets, just touch the AM or
FM tab.
Memory Presets
Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when finished.
HD Radio
Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The light on the button
illuminates when the feature is on. HD Radio allows you to receive radio
broadcasts digitally, where available, providing free, crystal-clear sound.
See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
Scan
Touch this button to go to the next strong AM or FM radio station.
The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on.
Options
Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Set PTY for Seek/Scan allows you to select a category of music you
would like to search for. You can then choose to either seek or scan for
the stations playing that category.
RDS Text Display allows you to view the information broadcast by FM
stations.
AST allows you to have the system automatically store the six strongest
stations in your current location.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

482

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

TAG Button is available when HD Radio is on, and allows you to tag a
song to download later. When you select On, TAG appears on-screen
when HD Radio is active. You can touch TAG to save the information of
the song that is playing. When you plug in your portable music player,
the information transfers, if supported by your device. When you are
connected to iTunes, the tags appear to remind you of the songs you
would like to download. See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to manually enter the desired station number. Touch
Enter when you are done.
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives.
Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts
with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more
information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please
visit www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio
technology, you may notice the following indicators on your screen:
HD) logo blinks when acquiring a digital station and stays solid
when digital audio is playing. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
Multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify
available digital channels where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and
digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only
available digitally.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

483

TAG allows you to save a song to download later when you are on an
acquired HD Radio station and the feature is on. To turn the feature on
and use it:
1. Press AM or FM > Options > TAG button > On.
2. When you hear a song you like, touch TAG.
3. The system automatically saves the song’s information and transfers
it to your portable music player (if supported) when you connect it
to the system. The system automatically transfers the tag to your
player (if already connected) and a pop-up confirms the transfer.
4. When you access iTunes with your portable music player, the tags
appear to you as a reminder. The system allows you to tag up to
approximately 100 songs. For a list of devices that support tagging,
see www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following
functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio reception is on, although it does
not scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo appear if
the station has a digital broadcast.
• Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as a memory
preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when finished. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the
sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to
reacquire the digital signal.
• Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access the
saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

484

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Reception area

Station blending

Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and
you are on the fringe of the reception area,
the station may mute due to weak signal
strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system
switches back to the analog broadcast until
the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the
possible HD2 through HD7 multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays muted
unless it is able to connect to the digital
signal again.
When the system first receives a station
(aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it
first plays the station in the analog version.
Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD
Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may
hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the
shift from analog to digital sound or digital
back to analog sound.

In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to
report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting
with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each
station. These stations are responsible for making sure all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Issue
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
HD2-HD7 stations not
found when Scan is
pressed.

485

Potential station issues
Cause
Action
This is poor time
No action required.
alignment by the radio This is a broadcast
broadcaster.
issue.
The radio is shifting
between analog and
digital audio.
The digital multicast is
not available until the
HD Radio broadcast is
decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is
available.
The previously stored
multicast preset or
direct tune is not
available in your
current reception area.
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel
search.

No action required. The
reception issue may
clear up as you
continue to drive.
No action required.
This is normal behavior.
Wait until the audio is
available.
No action required. The
station is not available
in your current
location.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
No action required.
This is normal behavior.

*

http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital
Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content
sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or
deleted at any time at the station owner’s discretion.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

486

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Radio”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“RADIO”
“<87.9–107.9>”
“FM autoset preset <#>”
1
“FM preset <#>”
“<87.9–107.9> HD”
“<530–1710>”
“FM1”
“AM”
“FM 1 preset <#>”
“AM <530–1710>”
“FM2”
“AM autoset”
“FM 2 preset <#>”
“AM autoset preset <#>”
“HD <#>” 1
“AM preset <#>”
“Preset <#>”
“Browse”2
“Radio off”
“FM”
“Radio on”
“FM <87.9–107.9>”
“Set PTY”
“Tune”3
“FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>”1
“FM autoset”
“Help”
1

If available.
If you have said, “Browse”, see Browsing device content earlier in this
section.
3
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
2

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

487

“TUNE”
“<87.9–107.9>”
“FM autoset”
“FM autoset preset <#>”
“<87.9-107.9> HD <#>”*
“<530–1710>”
“FM preset <#>”
“AM”
“FM1”
“AM <530–1710>”
“FM 1 preset <#>”
“AM autoset”
“FM2”
“AM autoset preset <#>”
“FM 2 preset <#>”
“AM preset <#>”
“HD <#>”*
“FM”
“Preset <#>”
“FM <87.9–107.9>”
“Help”
“FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>”*
*
If available.
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, then select the
SIRIUS tab.
Presets
Save a channel by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the channel. Sound returns
when finished.
ALERT
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts
you when it plays again on any channel.
Replay
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately
45 minutes of audio as long as you have remained tuned to the current
station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
While in replay mode:
• Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the seek buttons to reverse or fast forward in the
current track.
• Press play or pause to play or pause the audio.
• Press Replay to return to live audio if you have been using the
feature to replay audio.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

488

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of channels.
Options
Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Set Category for Seek/Scan allows you to select a category of music
you would like to search for. You can then choose to either seek or scan
for the stations playing that category.
Parental Lockout allows you to lock and unlock channels, change or
reset your PIN or unlock all channels. To use this feature, you need your
initial PIN, which is 1234.
Artist/Title/Team Alerts allows you to select Artists, Titles and Teams
that you would like the system to alert you to when they are playing on
other channels. Press Edit Alerts to delete or turn off alerts. You can
also set all alerts to on or off. When an alert appears on the screen, you
can choose to Tune to the channel, to Cancel the alert or to Disable
Alerts. If you are listening to a sporting event, you can save your favorite
teams so that the system can alert you when they are playing on a
satellite radio channel.
Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on all channels. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is required when communicating
with SIRIUS about your account.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to manually enter the desired satellite channel
number. Touch Enter when you are done.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

489

Browse
Touch this button to view a list of all available stations. Scroll to see
more categories. Touch the station you want to listen to.
Touch Skip if you want to skip this channel.
Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to listen to this channel.
Touch Title or Artist to see song and artists on other stations.
Satellite Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to SIRIUS satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any
of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite radio, press the voice button
and, after the tone, say “Sirius”, then any of the commands in the
following chart.
“SIRIUS”
“Sirius <0–223>”
“”
“Preset <#>”
“SAT”
“SAT 1”
“SAT 1 preset <#>”
“SAT 2”
“SAT 2 preset <#>”

“SAT 3”
“SAT 3 preset <#>”
“SAT preset <#>”
“Sirius off”
“Sirius on”
“Sports game”*
“Tune”**
“Help”

*

If you have said, “Sports game”, see the following “Sports game” chart.
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.

**

“SPORTS GAME”
“Tune to the  game”
“Tune to the  game”
“Tune to the   game”
“Tune to the  game”
“Help”

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

490

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
“TUNE”
“Sirius <0–223>”
“”
“Preset <#>”
“SAT”
“SAT 1”
“SAT 1 preset <#>”
“SAT 2”
“SAT 2 preset <#>”
“SAT 3”
“SAT 3 preset <#>”
“Help”

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or
delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos
is published under the eCos License.
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed SIRIUS
satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale
or lease of your vehicle. See your authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN): You need your ESN to
activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. The ESN is on the
System Information Screen (SR ESN: XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access your
ESN, press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen, then SIRIUS >
Options.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

491

Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna
For optimal reception performance, keep the
obstructions
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other materials as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload
When you pass a ground-based
broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to
interference
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
Radio display
Acquiring...

Sat Fault/SIRIUS
system failure.

Invalid Channel.

SIRIUS troubleshooting
Condition
Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
There is an internal
module or system
failure present.

The channel is no
longer available.

tips
Possible action
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
If this message does
not clear shortly, or
with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See
your authorized dealer
for service.
Tune to another
channel or choose
another preset.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

492

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

SIRIUS troubleshooting tips
Radio display
Condition
Possible action
Unsubscribed Channel. Your subscription does Contact SIRIUS at
not include this
1–888–539–7474 to
channel.
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal.
The signal is lost from The signal is blocked.
the SIRIUS satellite or When you move into
SIRIUS tower to your an open area, the
signal should return.
vehicle antenna.
Updating.
Update of channel
No action required.
programming in
The process may take
up to three minutes.
progress.
Call SIRIUS
Your satellite service is Contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
no longer available.
1-888-539-7474 to
resolve subscription
issues.
None Found. Check
All the channels in the Use the channel guide
Channel Guide.
selected channels are to turn off the Lock
either skipped or
or Skip function on
that station.
locked.
Subscription Updated. SIRIUS has updated
No action required.
the channels available
for your vehicle.
CD
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, and then select
the CD tab.
You can also advance and reverse the current track or current folder, if
applicable.
Repeat
Touch this button to repeat the currently playing track, all tracks on the
disc or turn the feature off if already on.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

493

Shuffle
Touch this button to play the tracks or entire albums in random order, or
turn the feature off if already on.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of all available tracks.
More Info
Touch this button to see disc information.
Options
Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Compression allows you to turn the compression feature on and off.
Browse
Touch this button to look through all available CD tracks.
CD Voice Commands
If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “CD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“CD”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play next track”
“Play previous track”
“Play track <1–512>”
“Repeat”
“Repeat folder”*

“Repeat off”
“Repeat track”
“Shuffle”
“Shuffle CD”*
“Shuffle folder”*
“Shuffle off”
“Help”

*

This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

494

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

SD Card Slot and USB Port
SD Card Slot
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded. To remove the SD card, press
the card in and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to pull the card to
remove it as this could cause damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses this card slot. See Navigation
system later in this chapter for more information.
The slot is located in a compartment on top of
the instrument panel. Push down on the top of
the compartment to access it. To access and
play music from your card, press the lower left
corner of the touchscreen, and then select the
SD Card tab.
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

USB Port
The ports are located in a compartment on
top of the instrument panel. Push down on
the top of the compartment to access them.
To access and play music from your device,
press the lower left corner of the touchscreen,
and then select the USB tab.
This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks,
flash drives or thumb drives, and charge devices if they support this
feature.
In order to playback video from your iPod or iPhone, if compatible, you
must have a special combination USB/RCA composite video cable, which
you can buy from Apple. When you connect the cable to your iPod or
iPhone, plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

495

Playing Music from Your Device
Insert your device and select the SD Card or USB tab once the system
recognizes it. You can then select from the following options:
Repeat replays the currently playing song or album.
Shuffle plays music on the selected album or folder in random order.
Similar Music allows you to choose music similar to what is currently
playing.
More Info displays information such as current track, artist name,
album and genre.
Options allows you to view and adjust various media settings.
• Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
• Media Player Settings allows you to select more settings, which is
under Media Player. See Settings.
• Device Information displays software and firmware information
about the currently connected media device.
• Update Media Index indexes your device each time you connect it
to make sure you have the latest voice commands available for all
media on the device.
Browse allows you to view the contents of the device. It also allows you
to search by categories, such as genre, artist or album.
If you want to view song information such as Title, Artist, File, Folder,
Album, and Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
You can also touch What’s Playing to hear how the system pronounces
the current band and song. This can be helpful when using voice
commands to make sure the system correctly plays your request.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

496

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

SD Card and USB Voice Commands
If you are listening to a USB device or an SD card, press the
voice button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say
any of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a USB device or an SD card, press the voice
button and, after the tone, say “USB” or “SD card”, then any of the
commands in the following chart.
“USB” or “SD CARD”
“Browse”*
“Play previous song”
“Next”
“Play similar music”
“Pause”
“Play song ”
“Play”
“Play TV show ”**
“Play album ”
“Play TV show episode ”**
“Play all”
“Play video ”**
“Play artist ”
“Play video podcast ”**
“Play audiobook ”
“Play video podcast episode
”**
“Play author ”
“Play video playlist ”**
“Play composer ”
“Previous”
“Play folder ”
“Repeat all”
“Play genre ”
“Repeat off”
“Repeat one”
“Play movie ”**
“Shuffle”
“Play music video ”**
“Play next song”
“Shuffle off”
“Play playlist ”
“What’s this?”
“Play podcast ”
“Help”
“Play podcast episode ”
*

If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card,
the system prompts you to specify what you would like to browse.
When prompted, see the following “Browse” chart.
**
This command is only available in USB mode and are
device-dependent.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

497

“BROWSE”
“Album ”
“All albums”
“All artists”
“All audiobooks”
“All authors”
“All composers”
“All folders”
“All genres”
“All movies” *
“All music videos”*
“All playlists”
“All podcasts”
“All songs”
“All TV shows”*
“All video playlists”*

“All video podcasts”*
“All videos”*
“Artist ”
“Audiobook ”
“Author ”
“Composer ”
“Folder ”
“Genre ”
“Playlist ”
“Podcast ”
“TV show ”*
“Video ”*
“Video playlist ”*
“Video podcast ”*
“Help”

*

This command is only available in USB mode and are device-dependent.

Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player, including
iPod®, Zune™, plays from device players, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed media from your playing device by
metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are descriptive software identifiers
embedded in the media files, provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these
metadata tags, SYNC may classify the empty metadata tags as
Unknown.
In order to playback video from your iPod® or iPhone®, (if compatible),
you MUST have a special combination USB/RCA composite video cable
(which you can buy from Apple®). When the cable is connected to your
iPod® or iPhone®, plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the
USB port.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

498

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Bluetooth Audio
Your system allows you to stream audio over your vehicle’s speakers from
your connected, Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
To access, press the lower left corner on the touchscreen, then
select the BT Stereo tab.
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
If you are listening to a Bluetooth audio device, press the voice
button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say
“Next song”, “Pause”, “Play” or “Previous song”.
If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio device, press the voice
button and, after the tone, say “Bluetooth Audio”, then “Next song”,
“Pause”, “Play” or “Previous song”.
A/V Inputs
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the
settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is
moving.
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location,
such as the center console or the glove box, when your vehicle is
in motion. Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension
cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be
safely stored while your vehicle is moving.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

499

Your A/V inputs allow you to connect an
auxiliary audio/video source (such as a
gaming systems or a personal camcorder)
by connecting RCA cords (not included)
to these input jacks. The jacks are yellow,
red and white and are located either
behind a small access door on the
instrument panel or in your center console.
You can also use the A/V inputs as an auxiliary input jack to play music
from your portable music player over your vehicle’s speakers. Plug in
your 1/8 inch (3.5 millimeter) RCA adapter into the two left A/V input
jacks (red and white).
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, and then select A/V In.
To use the auxiliary input jack feature, make sure that your portable music
player is designed for use with headphones and that it is fully charged.
You also need an audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8th-inch
(3.5 millimeter) connectors at one end and a RCA jack at the other.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and portable music player. Set the parking
brake and put the transmission in position P.
2. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end into the adapter in one of the two left
A/V input jacks (white or red) inside the center console.
3. Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen. Select either a tuned
FM station or a CD (if there is a CD already loaded into the system).
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1⁄2 the
maximum.
6. Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen. Select the A/V In tab.
(You should hear audio from your portable music player although it
may be low.)
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
controls.
In order to playback video from your iPod® or iPhone® (if compatible),
you must have a special combination USB/RCA composite video cable
(which you can buy from Apple®). When the cable is connected to your
iPod® or iPhone®, plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the
USB port.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

500

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Troubleshooting
• Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. The jack
only works correctly with devices that have a headphone output with
a volume control.
• Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio as this causes
distortion and reduces sound quality.
• If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problem persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable media player.
• Control the portable media player in the same manner when used with
headphones, as the auxiliary input jack does not provide control (such
as Play or Pause) over the attached portable media player.
PHONE

A
B
C
D
E
F

A. Phone
B. Quick Dial
C. Phonebook
D. History
E. Messaging
F. Settings

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

501

Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC®. Once you pair
your phone, you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice
commands. While the system supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone’s functionality. At a minimum, most
cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following
functions:
• Answering an incoming call
• Ending a call
• Using privacy mode
• Dialing a number
• Redialing
• Call waiting notification
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check
your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing Your Phone for the First Time
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
The first thing you must do to use the phone features of SYNC is to pair
your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone with SYNC. This allows you to use
your phone in a hands-free manner.
Note: Put the transmission in position P. Turn on your vehicle ignition
and the radio.
1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left corner of the touchscreen. Find
SYNC appears on the screen and instructs you to begin the pairing
process from your device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is
in the proper mode. See your phone’s manual if necessary.
• Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

502

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

3. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on
the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
4. When prompted on your phone’s display, confirm that the PIN
provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cellular phone.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone options. For more information on
your phone’s capability, see your phone’s manual and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Put the transmission in position P. Turn on your vehicle ignition
and the radio.
1. Press the Phone corner of the touchscreen > Settings > BT
Devices > Add Device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is
in the proper mode. See your phone’s user guide if necessary.
3. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC on the screen. The display indicates when the
pairing is successful. The system asks you if you want to download
your phonebook.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone options. For more information on
your phone’s capability, see your phone’s user guide and visit the website.
Making Calls
Press the voice button on your steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say, “Call ” or say “Dial”, then the desired
number.
To end the call or exit phone mode, press and hold the phone
button.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone sounds. Call information
appears in the display if it is available.
Accept the call by pressing Accept on the touchscreen or by
pressing the phone button on your steering wheel controls.
Reject the call by pressing Reject on the touchscreen or by
pressing and holding the phone button on your steering wheel controls.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs it as a missed call.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

503

Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on your touchscreen to select from the
following options:
Phone
Touch this button to access the on-screen numerical pad to enter a
number and place a call. During an active call, you can also choose to:
• Mute the call
• Put it on hold
• Turn on privacy (returns the call to your cellular phone)
• Join two calls
• End the call.
Quick Dial
Set up favorite contacts from you phonebook or history folder.
Phonebook
Touch this button to access and call any contacts in your previously
downloaded phone book. The system places the entries in alphabetical
categories summarized at the top of the screen.
To turn on contact picture settings, if your device supports this feature,
press Phone > Settings > Manage Phonebook > Download photos
from Phonebook > On.
Certain smart phones may support transferring street addresses when
listed with phone book contact information. If your phone supports this
feature, you can select and use these addresses as destinations and save
them as favorites.
History
After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled phone to SYNC, you can
access any previously dialed, received or missed calls. You can also
choose to save these to your Favorites or to Quick Dial.
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone does not support
downloading call history using Bluetooth, SYNC keeps track of calls made
with the SYNC system.
Messaging
Send text messages using your touchscreen. See Text messaging later in
this section.
Settings
Touch this button to access various phone settings, such turning
Bluetooth on and off, managing your phonebook and more. See Phone
settings later in this section.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

504

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging are speed-dependent and not
available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read text messages from your phone.
You can send and receive text messages using Bluetooth, read them
aloud and translate text messaging acronyms, such as LOL.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu.
2. Select Messaging.
3. Choose from the following:
• Listen (speaker icon)
• Dial
• Send Text
• View
• Delete.
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature. It is unavailable when your
vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu.
2. Touch Messaging > Send Text.
3. Enter a phone number or choose from your phone book.
4. You can select from the following options:
• Send which sends the message as it is.
• Edit Text allows you to customize the pre-defined message or
create a message on your own.
You can then preview the message, verify the recipient as well as update
the message list, and send it to a connected device (such as a USB
drive).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

505

Pre-defined Text Message Options
I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late.
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there early.
I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
Thanks
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen
displays a pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your
phone. You can press:
• View to view the text message.
• Listen for SYNC to read the message to you.
• Dial to call the contact.
• Ignore to exit the screen.
Note: If you select View and your vehicle is traveling over 5 mph
(8 km/h), the system offers to read the message to you instead of
allowing you to view it while driving.
Phone Settings
Press Phone > Settings.
Bluetooth Devices
Touch this tab to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as
save it as a favorite.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

506

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Bluetooth
Touch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on.
Do Not Disturb
Touch this tab if you want all calls to go directly to your voice mail
and not ring in the vehicle. When this feature is on, text message
notifications do not ring inside the cabin either.
911 Assist
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See 911 Assist in the SYNC
Services and Applications section.
Phone Ringer
Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call. Choose
from possible system ring tones, your currently paired phone’s ring tone,
a beep, text-to-speech or a silent notification.
Text Message Notification
Select a text message notification, if supported by your phone. Choose
from possible system alert tones, text-to-speech or silent.
Internet Data Connection
If your phone is compatible, use this screen to adjust your internet data
connection. Select to make your connection profile with the personal
area network or to turn off your connection. You can also choose to
adjust your settings or have the system always connect, never connect
when roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Manage Phonebook
Touch this button to access features such as automatic phonebook
download, re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your phone
as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Roaming Warning
Touch this button to have the system alert you when your phone is in
roaming mode.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

507

Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the steering wheel control. After the
tone, say any of the following commands:
“PHONE”
“Bluetooth off”
“Bluetooth on”
“Call”
“Call ”
“Call  at home”
“Call  at work”
“Call  on cell”
“Call  on other”
“Call voicemail”
“Dial”
“Do not disturb off”
“Do not disturb on”
“Forward text messages”
“Go to hands free”*

“Hold call off”*
“Hold on”*
“Join calls”*
“Listen to text message <#>”
“Listen to text messages”
“Messages”**
“Mute call”*
“Pair phone”
“Privacy on”*
“Reply to text messages”
“Turn ringer off”
“Turn ringer on”
“Unmute call”*
“Help”

*

This command is only available during an active call.
If you have said “Messages”, see the following “Messages” chart.

**

“MESSAGES”
“Call”
“Forward text messages”
“Listen to text message <#>”
“Listen to text messages”
“Reply to text messages”
“Help”

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

508

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

INFORMATION
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.

A
B
C
D
E

Under the Information menu, you can access features, such as:
A. SYNC Services
B. SIRIUS Travel Link
C. Alerts
D. Calendar
E. SYNC Applications.
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation before use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC
Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. See Phone
earlier in this chapter for pairing instructions.
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not
blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

509

Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing
so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed
in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of
errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect your vehicle’s current location, travel direction
and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or
business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you
request, for continuous improvement, the service may collect and record
call details and voice communications. For more information, see SYNC
Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do
not want Ford or its service providers to collect your vehicle travel
information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions,
do not subscribe or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology
and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic
reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports,
weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls.
1. When prompted, say “Services”. This initiates an outgoing
call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
2. Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts to request
the desired service, such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can also
say, “What are my choices?” to receive a list of available services
from which to choose.
3. Say, “Services” to return to the Services main menu or for help, say,
“Help”.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

510

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Touchscreen
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Services.
1. Select Connect to Services to initiate an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
2. Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts to request
the desired service, such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can also
say, “What are my choices?” to receive a list of available services
from which to choose.
3. Say, “Services” to return to the Services main menu or for help, say,
“Help”.
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say “Directions” or “Business
Search”. To find the closest business or type of business to your
current location, just say “Business Search” and then “Search Near
Me”. If you need further assistance in finding a location, you can say
“Operator” at any time within a Directions or Business search to
speak with a live operator. The system may prompt you to speak with
an operator when it has difficulty matching your voice request. The
live operator can assist you by searching for businesses by name or
by category, residential addresses by street address or by name or
specific street intersections. Operator Assist is a feature of your
SYNC Services subscription. For more information on Operator
Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your Destination. After the route
download is finished, the phone call automatically ends.
If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation:
• Turn-by-turn directions appear in the information display, in the
status bar of your touchscreen system and on the SYNC Services
screen. You also receive driving instructions from audible prompts.
• When on an active route, you can select Route Summary or Route
Status using the touchscreen controls or voice commands to view the
Route Summary Turn List or the Route Status ETA. You can also
turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the route or update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Just say, “Yes” when prompted and the system delivers a new
route to your vehicle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

511

If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, SYNC Services downloads
your requested destination to the navigation system. The navigation
system then calculates the route and provides driving instructions.
See the Navigation system section for more information.
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Good-bye” from the SYNC Services main menu.
Personalizing

Push to interrupt

Portable

SYNC Services quick tips
You can personalize your Services feature to
provide quicker access to your most used or
favorite information. You can save address
points, such as work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams,
such as Detroit Lions, or a news category.
You can learn more about personalization by
logging onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Press the voice button at any time (while
connected to SYNC TDI Services) to interrupt
a voice prompt or an audio clip (such as a
sports report) and say your voice command.
Your subscription is associated with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number,
not your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).
You can pair and connect your phone to any
vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and
Information and continue enjoying your
personalized services.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

512

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

SYNC Services Voice Commands
When a route has been downloaded (non-navigation systems),
press the voice button on the steering wheel control. When
prompted, say any of the following commands:
“SERVICES”
“Cancel route”
“Navigation voice off”
“Navigation voice on”
“Next turn”
“Route status”
“Route summary”
“Services”
“Update route”
“Help”
SIRIUS Travel Link (If Equipped and If Activated)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: In order to use SIRIUS Travel Link, your vehicle must be equipped
with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features.
Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic# and click on Coverage map and
details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by SIRIUS Travel
Link.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

513

Note: Neither SIRIUS nor Ford is responsible for any errors or
inaccuracies in the SIRIUS Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.
When you subscribe to SIRIUS Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
current weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see scores to
current sports games.
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle
is not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, nearby
your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite places, if
programmed.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s
location or on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if
available.
Weather
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the
five day forecast for the chosen area. Select Map to see the weather
map, which can show storms, radar information, charts and winds.
Select Area to select from a listing of weather locations.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports.
You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access. The score
automatically refreshes when a game is in progress.
Ski Conditions
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

514

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

SIRIUS Travel Link Voice Commands
Note: In order to use SIRIUS Travel Link, your vehicle must be equipped
with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot.
Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls and, when
prompted, say any of the following:
Travel Link voice commands
“5–day weather forecast”
“Sports scores”*
“Fuel prices”
“Traffic”
“Movie listings”
“Travel Link”**
“Sports headlines”*
“Weather”
“Weather map”
“Sports schedule”*
*

If you have said, “Sports headlines”, “Sports schedule” or “Sports
scores”, you may say any of the commands in the “Sports headlines,
Sports schedules and Sports scores” commands chart:
**

If you have said, “Travel Link”, you may say any of the commands in
the “Travel Link” chart:
Sports headlines, sports schedules and sports scores voice
commands
“Baseball”
“My teams”
“College basketball”
“NBA”
“College football”
“NFL”
“Golf”
“NHL”
“MLS”
“WNBA”
“Motor sports”
“5–day weather
forecast”
“Baseball headlines”
“Baseball schedule”
“Baseball scores”
“College basketball
headlines”

“TRAVEL LINK”
“Golf schedule”

“NBA scores”

“MLS headlines”
“MLS schedule”
“MLS scores”
“Motor sports”

“NFL headlines”
“NFL schedule”
“NFL scores”
“NHL headlines”

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
“College basketball
schedule”
“College basketball
scores”
“College football
headlines”
“College football
schedule”
“College football
scores”
“Fuel prices”
“Golf headlines”
“Golf leaderboard”

“TRAVEL LINK”
“Motor sports order”

515

“NHL schedule”

“Motor sports
schedule”
“Movie listings”

“NHL scores”

“My team headlines”

“Weather”

“My teams schedule”

“Weather map”

“My teams scores”
“NBA headlines”
“NBA schedule”

“WNBA headlines”
“WNBA schedule”
“WNBA scores”

“Traffic”

Alerts
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Alerts, and then choose from any of the following services:
• View the message.
• Delete the message.
• Delete All messages.
This screen displays any system messages (such as an SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any messages by turning the information
icon yellow. After you read or delete the messages, the icon returns to
white.
Calendar
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Calendar. You can view the current calendar by day, week or
month.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

516

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

911 Assist® (If Equipped)
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a
crash, the system will not dial for help, which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency
call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response time, which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911
Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in your
vehicle so it does not become a projectile or damaged in a crash.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the
phone, which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911
Assist privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off, that setting applies for all
paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, either a voice message plays or
a display message (or icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle is
started after a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works
with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable
safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your
SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
• For information on airbag deployment, see the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter.
• For information on the fuel pump shut-off, see the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

517

Setting 911 Assist On
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Apps > 911 Assist, > On.
You can also access 911 Assist by:
• Pressing the Settings icon > Settings > Phone > 911
Assist, or
• Pressing the Settings icon > Help > 911 Assist.
To Make Sure that 911 Assist Works Properly
• SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone
to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the United
States, Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency
number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off
(which would trigger 911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to contact
emergency services if 911 Assist triggers. If a connected phone sustains
damage or loses connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to
connect to, any available previously paired phone and tries to make the
call to 911.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar message: “SYNC will attempt to
call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and
hold the phone button on your steering wheel.”

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

518

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a
pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s)
in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide
your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle’s battery or SYNC system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and
connected to the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that
your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or
crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the
feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, United States Only)
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot
replace, normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health
Report only monitors certain systems electronically monitored by your
vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system,
(such as brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to use.
Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or subscription
associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register to use this
feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review the
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

519

Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not
be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering, you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for
SYNC to remind you automatically to run reports at specific mileage
intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your vehicle’s overall health in the form
of a diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health Report contains valuable
information, such as:
• Vehicle Diagnostic Information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
• Items noted during vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer that
still need servicing.
Making a Report
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
If you want to run a report by using the touchscreen, touch Apps >
Vehicle Health Report.
To run a report by voice command, press the voice button on
the steering wheel and, when prompted, say “Vehicle health
report”.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may
collect your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and
diagnostic information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to
Vehicle Health Report may also collect more vehicle information. Ford
may use your vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you do
not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information,
do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy Statement) for more
information.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

520

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

SETTINGS

A
B
C
D
E
F

A. Clock
B. Display
C. Sound
D. Vehicle
E. Settings
F. Help
Under this menu, you can set your clock, access and adjust the
display, sound and vehicle settings as well as access settings for
specific modes or the help feature.
Clock
Note: You cannot manually set the date. Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected, your vehicle needs to acquire
a GPS signal to update the clock. Once your vehicle acquires the signal, it
may take a few minutes for the update to display the correct time.
1. Press theSettings icon > Clock.
2. Press + and − to adjust the time.
From this screen, you can also make other adjustments, such as 12– or
24–hour mode, activate GPS time synchronization and have the system
automatically update for daylight savings time and new time zones.
You can also turn the outside air temperature display on and off. It
appears at the top center of the touchscreen, next to the time and date.
The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

521

Display
You can adjust the touchscreen display through the touchscreen or by
pressing the voice button on your steering wheel controls and when
prompted, say, “Display settings”.
Press the Settings icon > Display, then select from the
following:
Brightness allows you to make the screen display brighter or dimmer.
Mode allows you to set the screen to a certain brightness or have the
system automatically change based on the outside light level.
• If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you have the options of turning the
display’s Auto Dim feature on or off and changing the Auto Dim
Manual Offset feature.
Edit Wallpaper
• You can have your touchscreen display the default photo or upload
your own.
Uploading Photos for Your Home Screen Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from your camera. You must
access the photos either from your USB mass storage device or from an
SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely large dimensions (such as 2048 x
1536) may not be compatible and appear as a blank (black) image on the
display.
Your system allows you to upload and view up to 32 photos.
To access, press theSettings icon > Display > Edit Wallpaper, and then
follow the system prompts to upload your photographs.
Only the photograph(s), which meets the following conditions, display:
• Compatible file formats are as follows: .jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp.
• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

522

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Sound
Press the Settings icon > Sound, then select from the
following:

Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade

Sound Settings
DSP*
Occupancy Mode*
Speed Compensated Volume

*

If equipped.

Vehicle
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle, then select from the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Active Park Assist
Ambient Lighting
Vehicle Health Report
Door Keypad Code
Rear View Camera
Enable Valet Mode.

Active Park Assist
When activated, your system displays directions for you regarding the
active park assist process.
For complete information on this system, see Active park assist in the
Driving Aids chapter.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
When activated, ambient lighting illuminates footwells and cupholders
with a choice of colors. To access and make adjustments:
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Ambient Lighting.
2. Touch the desired color.
3. Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease the intensity.
To turn the feature on or off, press the power button.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

523

Vehicle Health Report
Turn Automatic Reminders on and off and set the mileage interval at
which you would like to receive the reports. Press ? for more information
on these selections.
When done making your selections, press Run Vehicle Health Report
Now if you want your report.
Door Keypad Code
To change the keypad code for your keyless entry keypad system:
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Door Keypad Code.
2. Enter your current factory code, then, when prompted, enter your
new code.
Rear View Camera
This menu allows you to access settings for your rear view camera.
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Rear View Camera, then select
from the following settings:
• Rear Camera Delay
• Visual Park Aid Alert
• Guidelines.
Enable Valet Mode
Note: If the system locks, and you need to reset the PIN, enter 3681 and
the system unlocks.
Valet mode allows you to lock the system. No information is accessible
until the system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Enable Valet Mode.
2. When prompted, enter a four-digit PIN.
After you press Continue, the system locks until you enter the PIN again.
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice features, as well as phone,
navigation and wireless settings.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

524

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

System
Press the Settings icon > Settings > System, then select from
the following:
System
Select to have the touchscreen display in
English, Spanish or French.
Distance
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.
Temperature
Select to display units in Celsius or
Fahrenheit.
System Prompt
Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the
Volume
system.
Touch Screen Button Select to have the system beep to confirm
Beep
choices made through the touchscreen.
Touch Panel Button
Select to have the system beep to confirm
Beep
button choices made through the climate or
audio system.
Keyboard Layout
Have the touchscreen keyboard display in
QWERTY or ABC format.
Install Applications
Install any downloaded applications or view
the current software licenses.
Master Reset
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases
all personal settings and personal data.
Language

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

525

Voice Control
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Voice Control, then
select from the following:
Voice control
Standard interaction mode provides more
detailed interaction and guidance. Advanced
mode has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
Confirmation
Have the system ask you short questions if it
Prompts
has not clearly heard or understood your
request.
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned
off, the system may occasionally ask you to
confirm settings.
Media Candidate
Candidate lists are possible results from your
Lists
voice commands. The system simply makes a
best guess at your request with these turned
off.
Phone Candidate
Candidate lists are possible results from your
Lists
voice commands. The system simply makes a
best guess at your request with these turned
off.
Voice Control Volume This allows you to adjust the system’s voice
volume level.
Interaction Mode

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

526

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Media Player
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Media Player, then select
from the following:

Autoplay

Bluetooth Devices

Gracenote Database
Info
Gracenote Mgmt

Cover Art Priority

Media player
When this feature is on, the system
automatically switches to the media source
upon initial connection. This allows you to
listen to music during the indexing process.
When this feature is off, the system does not
automatically switch to the inserted media
source.
Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a
device. You can also set a device as your
favorite so that the system automatically
attempts to connect to that device at every
ignition cycle.
This allows you to view the version level of
the Gracenote Database.
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database
supplies metadata information for your music
files. This overrides information from your
device. This feature defaults to off.
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database
supplied cover art for your music files. This
overrides any art from your device. This
feature defaults to Media Player.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

527

Navigation
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Navigation, then select
from the following:

Map Preferences

Route Preferences

Navigation
Preferences
Traffic Preferences

Avoid Areas

Navigation
Turn breadcrumbs on and off.
Have the system display your turn list top to
bottom or bottom to top.
Turn the Parking POI notification on and off.
Have the system display the shortest route,
fastest route or ecological route.
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid tollroads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use high-occupancy vehicle
lanes.
Have the system use guidance prompts.
Have the system automatically fill-in
State/Province information.
Have the system display areas where
roadwork occurs.
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display areas where difficult
driving conditions may occur.
Have the system display areas where snow
and ice on the road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
Have the system display where there may be
reduced visibility.
Have the system turn on your radio for traffic
announcements.
Enter specific areas that you would like to
avoid on planned navigation routes.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

528

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Phone Settings
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Phone, then select from
the following:

Bluetooth Devices
Bluetooth
Do Not Disturb

911 Assist

Phone Ringer

Text Message
Notification
Internet Data
Connection

Manage Phonebook

Roaming Warning

Phone
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as
well as save it as a favorite.
Turn Bluetooth on and off.
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and
not ring inside your vehicle. With this feature
turned on, text message notifications are also
suppressed and do not ring inside your vehicle.
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See
911 Assist in the SYNC applications and
services section.
Select the type of notification for phone calls ring tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be
silent.
Select the type of notification for text messages
- alert tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be
silent.
If compatible with your phone, you can adjust
your internet data connection. Select to make
your connection profile with the personal area
network or to turn off your connection. You can
also choose to adjust your settings or have the
system always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more
information.
Access features, such as automatic phonebook
download, re-download your phonebook, add
contacts from your phone as well as delete or
upload your phonebook.
Have the system alert you when in Roaming
mode.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

529

Wireless & Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that creates a wireless network within
your vehicle, thereby allowing other devices (such as personal computers
or phones) in your vehicle to speak to each other, share files or play
games. Using this Wi-Fi feature, everyone in your vehicle can also gain
access the internet if you have a USB mobile broadband connection
inside your vehicle, your phone supports personal area networking and if
you park outside a wireless hotspot.
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Wireless & Internet,
then select from the following:

Wi-Fi Settings

Wireless & Internet
Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode turns the
Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make
sure you turn it on for connectivity purposes.
Choose a Wireless Network allows you to
use a previously stored wireless network. You
can categorize by alphabetical listing, priority
and signal strength. You can also choose to
search for a network, connect to a network,
disconnect from a network, receive more
information, prioritize a network or delete a
network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode makes
SYNC an access point for a phone or a
computer when turned on. This forms the
local area network within your vehicle for
things, such as game playing, file transfer
and internet browsing. Press ? for more
information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings allows
you to view and change settings for using
SYNC as the internet gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Device List
allows you to view recent connections to your
Wi-Fi system.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

530

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Wireless & Internet
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also
use a USB mobile broadband connection to
access the internet. (You must turn on your
mobile broadband device on your personal
computer before connecting it to the system.)
This screen allows you to set up what is your
typical area for your USB mobile broadband
connection. (USB mobile broadband settings
may not display if the device is already on.)
You can select the following: Country, Carrier,
Phone Number, User Name and Password.
Bluetooth Settings
Shows you the currently paired devices as
well as giving you your typical Bluetooth
options to connect, disconnect, set as favorite,
delete and add device. Bluetooth is a
registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Prioritize
Choose your connection methods and change
Connection Methods them as needed. You can select to Change
Order and have the system either always
attempt to connect using a USB mobile
broadband or using Wi-Fi.
USB Mobile
Broadband

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a
certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

531

Wi-Fi
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature which creates a wireless network within
your vehicle, thereby allowing other devices (i.e. personal computers or
phones) in your vehicle to speak to each other, share files, play games,
etc. Using this Wi-Fi feature, everyone in your vehicle can also gain
access the internet if:
• You have a USB mobile broadband connection inside the vehicle
• Your phone supports PAN (personal area networking)
• You are parked outside of a wireless hotspot
To access, press the Menu icon > Settings > Wireless and Internet >
Wi-Fi settings, then select from the following options:
• Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode: Turn the wi-fi feature on and off in
your vehicle. Make sure it is turned on for connectivity purposes.
• Choose a Wireless Network: Use a previously stored wireless
network. You can categorize by alphabetical listing, priority and signal
strength. You can also choose to search for a network, connect to a
network, disconnect from a network, receive more information,
prioritize a network or delete a network.
• Gateway Access Point Mode: Make SYNC an access point for a
phone or a computer by turning this feature on. This forms the local
area network within the vehicle for things such as game playing, file
transfer, internet browsing, etc. Press ? for more information.
• Gateway (Access Point) Settings: View and change settings for
using SYNC as the internet gateway.
• Gateway Access Point Device List: View who has connected to
your Wi-Fi connection recently.
Press the ? button (if available) for additional information.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a
certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

532

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

USB Mobile Broadband
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB mobile broadband
connection to access the internet. (You must activate your mobile
broadband device on your PC prior to connecting it to the system.)
This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB
mobile broadband connection. (USB mobile broadband settings may not
be displayed if the device is already activated.) You can select the
following:
• Country
• Carrier
• Phone Number
• User Name
• Password
Prioritize Connection Methods
This screen allows you to choose your connection methods and change
them as needed. You can select to Change Order and have the system
either always attempt to connecting using a USB mobile broadband or
using Wi-Fi.
Bluetooth Settings
Shows you what device is currently paired with the system as well as
giving you your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect, set as
favorite, delete and add device.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

533

Help
Press the Settings icon > Help, then select from the following:

Where Am I?

System Information

Software Licenses
Driving Restrictions
911 Assist

Voice Command List

Help
View your vehicle’s current location, if your
vehicle is equipped with navigation. If your
vehicle is not equipped with navigation, nothing
displays.
Touchscreen system serial number.
Your vehicle identification number (VIN).
Touchscreen system software version.
Navigation system version.
Map database version.
Sirius satellite radio electronic serial number
(ESN).
Gracenote Database Information and Library
version.
View the licenses for any software and
applications installed on your system.
Certain features are not accessible when your
vehicle is moving.
Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See
911 Assist in the SYNC applications and
services section.
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Speed Dial
allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE
contacts for quick access if there is an
emergency. Select Edit to access your
phonebook and then select the desired contacts.
The numbers then appear as options on this
screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons. The
ICE contacts you select appear at the end of the
911 Assist call process.
View categorized lists of voice commands.

To access Help using the voice commands, press the voice button, then,
after the tone, say “Help”. The system provides allowable voice
commands for the current mode.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

534

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

CLIMATE
Press the lower right corner on the touchscreen to access your climate
control features. Depending on your vehicle line and option package,
your climate screen may look different from the screen shown here.

A

K

B

J

C
I

H

G

F

E

D

A. Power: Touch to switch the system off and on. Outside air cannot
enter your vehicle when you switch off the system.
B. Passenger settings:
• Touch DUAL to switch on the passenger temperature control.
• Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.
• Touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat.
• Touch the cooled seat icon to control the cooled seat.
C. Fan speed: Touch + or – to adjust fan speed.
D. Recirculated air: Touch to turn the recirculated air on or off which:
• May reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior.
• May help reduce odors from reaching the interior.
• Engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected.
• May be engaged manually in any airflow mode except defrost.
• May turn off in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce fog
potential.
E. MAX A/C: Touch to cool your vehicle with recirculated air. Touch
again for normal A/C operation. MAX A/C:
• Distributes air through instrument panel vents.
• Is more economical and efficient than normal A/C mode.
• May help reduce odors from entering your vehicle.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

535

F. A/C: Touch to turn the air conditioning on or off.
• Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
• Engages automatically in MAX A/C, defrost and floor/defrost.
G. AUTO: Touch to engage automatic operation, then set the
temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically
controls:
• Fan speed
• Airflow distribution
• A/C on or off
• Outside or recirculated air.
H. Rear defroster: Touch to turn the rear window defroster and heated
mirrors.
I. Defrost: Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice. Touch
again to return to the previous airflow selection. When on, defrost:
• Provides outside air to reduce window fogging.
• Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister
vents.
J. Manual controls: Select any of the following airflow distribution
modes:
• Floor and Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster
vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents, and
provides outside air to reduce window fogging.
• Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
• Panel and Floor: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents,
demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
• Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and
rear seat floor vents.
K. Driver settings: Depending on your vehicle and option package, you
may have the following features:
• Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.
• If your vehicle is equipped with heated seats, touch the heated seat
icon to control the heated seat. See the Seats chapter.
• If your vehicle is equipped with cooled seats, touch the cooled seat
icon to control the cooled seat. See the Seats chapter.
• Touch and hold MyTemp to select a temperature you would like your
vehicle to remember and maintain for you.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a heated steering wheel, touch the
heated steering wheel icon to warm the steering wheel.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a wood-trimmed steering wheel, it
does not heat between the 10 o’clock and 2 o’clock positions.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

536

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Climate Control Voice Commands
The following voice commands are available at the main menu
level of a voice session. For example, press the voice button
and after the prompt, “Say a command”; say any of the
following commands:
Climate control voice commands
“Climate automatic”
“Climate my temperature”
“Climate off”
“Climate on”
“Climate temperature <15.5–29.5> degrees”
“Climate temperature <60–85> degrees”
“Help”
There are additional climate control commands but in order to access
them, you have to say “Climate” first, then when the system is ready to
listen, you may say any of the following commands:
Additional climate control voice commands
“Automatic”
“Panel off”
“A/C off”
“Panel on”
“A/C on”
“Rear defrost off”
“Defrost off”
“Rear defrost on”
“Defrost on”
“Recirc off”
“Dual off”
“Recirc on”
“Fan decrease”
“Temperature”*
“Fan increase”
“Temperature <15.5–29.5> degrees”
“Floor on”
“Temperature <60–85> degrees”
“Max A/C off”
“Temperature decrease”
“Max A/C on”
“Temperature high”
“My temp”
“Temperature increase”
“Off”
“Temperature low”
“On”
“Windshield floor on”
“Panel floor on”
“Help”
*

If you have said “Temperature”, you can say any of the commands in the
following “Temperature” chart.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

537

“TEMPERATURE”
“High”
“Low”
“<15.5–29.5> degrees”
“<60–85> degrees”
“Help”
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot to operate
the navigation system. If you need a replacement SD card, see your
authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To remove the SD card, just
push the card in and release it. Do not attempt to pull the card out to
remove it; this could cause damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of two main features, destination
mode and map mode.
To set a destination, press the green corner of your touchscreen, then
Dest when it appears. See Setting a destination later in this chapter.
To view the navigation map and your vehicle’s current location, touch the
green bar in the upper right hand corner of the touchscreen, or, press
Dest > Map. See Map mode later in this chapter.
Setting a Destination
Press the green corner of your touchscreen, then Dest when it appears.
Choose any of the following:
Destination Selections
My Home
Street Address
Favorites
Intersection
Previous Destinations
City Center
Point of Interest
Map
Emergency
Edit Route Cancel Route
Previous Starting Point
Freeway Entrance/Exit
Latitude/Longitude

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

538

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

1. Enter the necessary information into the highlighted text fields
(in any order). For address destination entry, Go! appears once you
enter all the necessary information. Pressing Go! makes the address
location appear on the map. If you choose Previous Destination,
the last 20 destinations you have selected appear.
2. Select Set as Dest to make this your destination. You can also
choose to set this as a waypoint (have the system route to this point
on the way to your current destination) or save it as a favorite. The
system considers any Avoid Areas selections in its route calculation.
3. Choose from up to three different types of routes, and then select
Start Route.
• Fastest Route: Uses the fastest moving roads possible.
• Shortest Route: Uses the shortest distance possible.
• Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficient route.
You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route for
you. Select Route Prefs to set route preferences like avoiding
freeways, tollroads, ferries and car trains as well as to use or not use
high-occupancy vehicle lanes. (High-occupancy vehicle lanes are also
known as carpool or diamond lanes. People who ride in buses, vanpools
or carpools use these lanes.)
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road and you do not press the
Start Route button, the system defaults to the Fastest Route option
and begins guidance.
During route guidance, you can press the talking bubble icon that
appears in the upper right navigation corner (green bar) if you want the
system to repeat route guidance information. When the system repeats
the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to the next
guidance instruction, since it detects when the vehicle is moving.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

539

Point of Interest (POI) Categories
Your system offers a variety of points of interest categories.
Food/Drink & Dining
Travel & Transportation
Financial
Emergency
Community
Health & Medicine

Main categories
Automotive
Shopping
Entertainment & Arts
Recreation & Sports
Government
Domestic Services

Within these main categories, there are subcategories which contain
more listings:
Subcategories
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Automobile Dealership
Government Office
Public Transit
Education
To expand these listings, press the + in front of the point of interest
listing.
When programming a point of interest destination, the system allows you
to sort the resulting lists alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr
listings (if available).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

540

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

cityseekr (If Available)
Note: cityseekr point of interest information is limited to approximately
154 cities (132 in the United States, 13 in Canada and 9 in Mexico).
cityseekr, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of
interest, the location and information
appear, such as address and phone
number. If cityseekr lists the point of
interest, more information is available, such as a brief description, hotel
check-in and checkout times or restaurant hours.
Press More Information for a longer review, a list of services and
facilities, the average room or meal price as well as the website link.
This screen displays point of interest icons, such as:
Hotel

Coffeehouse

Food & Drink

Nightlife

Attraction

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

541

This icon appears when your selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.

When you are viewing more information for hotels, cityseekr also tells
you if the hotel has certain services and facilities using icons.
Hotel services and facilities

Restaurant

24 Hr Room Service

Business Center

Fitness Center

Handicap Facilities

Internet Access

Laundry

Pool

Refrigerator

Wi-Fi

For restaurants, cityseekr can provide information, such as star rating,
average cost, review, handicap access, hours of operation, and website
address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide information, such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and check-out times, hotel service icons and
website address.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

542

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Setting Your Navigation Preferences
Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your
route.
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Navigation.
When you select:
Map Preferences

Route Preferences

Navigation
Preferences

You can:
Turn breadcrumbs on and off.
Have the system display your turn list top to
bottom or bottom to top.
Set the automatic parking points of interest
notification.
When parking points of interest notification is
on, the icons display on the map when you
get close to your destination. (This may not
be very useful in dense areas, and may clutter
the map when other points of interest
display.)
Choose to have the system display the
shortest route, fastest route or most
ecological route.
Avoid freeways, toll roads, ferries and car
trains when planning your route.
Use high-occupancy vehicle lanes
(if available).
Choose prompts to be either voice or tone
only.
Have the system automatically fill in the state
and province based on the information
already entered into the system.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
When you select:
Traffic Preferences

Avoid Areas

543

You can:
Choose how you want the system to handle
traffic problems along your route.
Automatic: Have the system reroute you to
avoid traffic incidents that develop and
impact the current route (no notification is
provided).
Manual: Have the system always provide a
traffic alert notification for traffic incidents
along the planned route. You have a choice to
accept or ignore the notification before
making the route deviation.
Turn on certain, or all, traffic icons on the
map (such as road work, incident, accidents
and closed roads).
Choose areas which you want the system to
avoid when calculating a route for you. Press
Add to select a category.
Once you select, the system tries to avoid the
area(s) if possible for all routes. To delete a
selection, choose the listing on the screen.
When the screen changes to Avoid Areas
Edit, you can press Delete at the bottom
right of the screen.

Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area of the touchscreen to view
map mode. Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of both 2D
city maps as well as 3D landmarks (when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings, visible land use and
land elements and detailed railway infrastructure for the most essential
cities around the globe. These maps also contain features, such as town
blocks, building footprints, and railways.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects that are typically
recognizable and have a certain tourist value. The 3D landmarks appear
in 3D map mode only. Coverage varies, and improves with updated map
releases.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

544

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Change the appearance of the map
display by repeatedly pressing the
arrow button in the upper left
corner of the screen. It toggles
between three different map modes:
Heading up, North up, and 3D.

Heading up (2D map) always shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the screen. This view is available for map
scales up to 2.5 miles (4 kilometers). The system remembers this
setting for larger map scales, but shows the map in North up only.
If the scale returns below this level, the system restores Heading up.
North up (2D map) always shows the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
3D map mode provides an elevated perspective of the map.
This viewing angle can be adjusted and the map can be rotated
180 degrees by dragging your finger along the shaded bar with
arrows at the bottom of the map.
Re-center the map by pressing this icon whenever you scroll
the map away from your vehicle’s current location.
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode, then select the + or - zoom
button to bring up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the touchscreen.
When you press Auto, Auto Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map scale. The map zoom level
then synchronizes with vehicle speed. The slower your vehicle is
traveling, the farther in the map zooms in; the faster your vehicle is
traveling, the farther the map zooms out. To turn the feature off, just
press the + or - button again.
In 3D mode, rotate the map view by swiping your finger across the
shaded bar with the arrows.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

545

Map Icons
Vehicle mark shows the current location of your vehicle. It
stays in the center of the map display, except when in scroll
mode.
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the map; the fixed icon is in
the center of the screen. The map position closest to the cursor
is in a window on the top center part of the screen.
Address book entry default icon(s) indicates the location on
the map of an address book entry. This is the default symbol
shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by
any method other than the map. You can select from any of the
22 icons available. You can use each icon more than once.
Home indicates the location on the map currently stored as the
home position. You can only save one address from the Address
Book as your Home entry. You cannot change this icon.
POI (Point Of Interest) icons indicate locations of any point
of interest categories you choose to display on the map. You can
choose to display about 56 point of interest subcategories on the
map at one time.
Starting point indicates the starting point of a planned route.

Waypoints indicates the location of a waypoint on the map.
The number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and
represents the position of the waypoint in the route list.
Destination symbol indicates the ending point of a planned
route.
Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn on
the planned route.
No GPS symbol indicates that insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map positioning. This icon may display
under normal operation in an area with poor GPS access.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

546

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on the map display to access the
following options:
When you select:
Set as Dest

Set as Waypoint
Save to Favorites
POI Icons On/Off

Cancel Route
View/Edit Route

You can:
Select a scrolled location on the map as your
destination. (You may scroll the map by
pressing your index finger on the map display.
When you reach the desired location, simply
let go and then touch Set as Dest.)
Set the current location as a waypoint.
Save the current location to your favorites.
Select icons to display on the map. You can
select up to three icons to display on the map
at the same time.
Cancel the active route.
Access these features when a route is active:
• View route
• Edit destination/waypoints
• Edit turn list
• Detour
• Edit route preferences
• Edit traffic preferences
• Cancel route.

Navteq is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you
find map data errors, you may report them directly to Navteq by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Navteq evaluates all reported map errors
and responds with the result of their investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-800-NAVMAPS (in Mexico, call 01–800–557–5539) or
going to www.navigation.com/ford. You need to specify the make and model
of your vehicle to determine if there is an update available.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)

547

Navigation Voice Commands
When in navigation mode, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. After the tone, say any of the following
commands:
Navigation system voice commands
“Navigation”3
“Cancel next waypoint”1
1
“Cancel route”
“Navigation voice volume
decrease”1
“Destination”2
“Navigation voice volume increase”
“Destination ”
“Repeat instruction”
“Destination ”
“Show 3D”
“Destination favorites”
“Show heading up”
“Destination home”
“Show map”
“Destination intersection”
“Show north up”
“Destination nearest ”
“Destination nearest POI”
“Show turn list”1
“Destination play nametags”
“Voice guidance off”
“Destination POI”
“Voice guidance on”
“Destination POI category”
“Where am I?”
“Destination previous destination”
“Zoom in”
“Destination street address”
“Zoom out”
“Help”
“Detour”1
1

This command is only available when a navigation route is active.
If you have said the command, “Destination”, you may say any of the
above commands or commands in the following Destination chart.
3
If you have said the command, “Navigation”, you may say any of the
above commands or commands in the following Navigation chart.
2

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

548

MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
“DESTINATION”
“”
“”
“Favorites”
“Home”
“Intersection”
“Nearest ”
“Nearest POI”
“Play nametags”
“POI category”
“Previous destination”
“Street address”
“Help”
“NAVIGATION”
“Destination”*
“Zoom city”
“Zoom country”
“Zoom in minimum”
“Zoom out maximum”
“Zoom province”
“Zoom state”
“Zoom street”
“Zoom to ”
“Help”

*

If you have said, “Destination”, you may say any of the commands in the
Destination chart.
One-shot Destination Street Address
When you say either “Navigation destination street address” or
“Destination street address”, the system asks you to say the full address.
The system displays an example on-screen. You can then speak the
address naturally, such as “One two three four Main Street, Anytown”.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Appendices

549

GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC® End User License Agreement (EULA)
• You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed
by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates (“FORD MOTOR COMPANY”)
from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation (“MS”). Those installed software
products of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and
“online” or electronic documentation (“MS SOFTWARE”) are protected by
international intellectual property laws and treaties. The MS SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or
may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with
additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY. The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials,
and “online” or electronic documentation (“FORD SOFTWARE”)
are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties.
The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with
and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by
third party software and service suppliers. The additional software and
services of third party origin, as well as associated media, printed
materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred
to as ⬙SOFTWARE.⬙
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA
(OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the
following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or
through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

550

Appendices

DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS:
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an
inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent
in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers
shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech
recognition process.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and
Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such
activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this
limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and
only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple
EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights
under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE,
provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any
upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and
the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is
an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the
SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with
the terms and conditions of this EULA.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Appendices

551

• Security Updates/Digital Rights Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect
the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the
SOFTWARE’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected
content. This action does not affect unprotected content. When your
DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content
owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE
to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able
to access content that requires the upgrade.
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may collect and use
technical information gathered in any manner as part of product
support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to improve their products or to
provide customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or
supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to
provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements,
add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the
SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE (“Supplemental Components”).

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

552

Appendices

If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components
and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are
provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS,
Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without
liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to
you through the use of the SOFTWARE.
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS SOFTWARE may provide you
with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the
SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third
party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE
provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only
as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to
drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and
abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they
pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the
DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided
by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such
as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means,
and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only” or ⬙For Recovery Purposes
Only⬙ you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it
in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms
accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Appendices

553

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and
“applets,” incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or their affiliates or
suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the
printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use
of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and
may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content.
All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and service providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be
governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this
SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic
form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S.
and other governments. For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection
with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, third party software or service providers, their
affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is not
provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their
affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the
DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

554

Appendices

No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY
LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING
FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE
LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED
FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY
EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or [AIR®] technology by Adobe
Systems Incorporated. This [Licensee Product] contains [Adobe® Flash®
Player] [Adobe® AIR®] software under license from Adobe Systems
Incorporated, Copyright 娀 1995-2009 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC.
All rights reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
End user notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC™ contains software that is licensed to
Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this
system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and
may subject you to legal action.
Read and follow instructions
Before using your Windows Automotive-based system, read and follow all
instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual
(“User’s Guide”). Not following precautions found in this User’s Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious consequences.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Appendices

555

Keep User’s Guide in Vehicle
When kept in the vehicle, the User’s Guide will be a ready reference for
you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive-based
system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first
time, all persons have access to the User’s Guide and read its
instructions and safety information carefully.
WARNING: Operating certain parts of this system while driving
can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly
cause an accident or other serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while
driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting
these operations. This is important since while setting up or changing
some functions you might be required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from the wheel.
General operation
Voice Command Control
Functions within the Windows Automotive-based system may be
accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands
from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen
Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen
while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged
attention. Even occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if
your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical
time.
Volume Setting
Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where
you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions
Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is
subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the system and address any errors.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

556

Appendices

Navigation Features
Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide
turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please
make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow
instructions and safety information fully.
Distraction Hazard
Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup.
Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can
seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
before attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail
Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving
decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never
replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or
knowledge of safe driving practices.
Route Safety
Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe
or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if
you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver
is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy
Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in
roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment
and common sense when following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services
Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route
you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency
services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as
police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation features.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Appendices

557

TeleNav Software End User License Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the
TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that
you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these
terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch,
or otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time,
with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com
from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement
and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose
a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise
require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with
the following when using the TeleNav Software: (a) observe all traffic laws
and otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software
instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an
unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe,
do not follow such instructions; (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and
parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal, unauthorized,
unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner
inconsistent with this Agreement; (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not
prevent the operation of any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims
resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav
Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to
comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide
TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about
yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such
information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

558

Appendices

3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense,
to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to access
and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon any
termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use
the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License limitations
You agree not to do any of the following: (a) reverse engineer,
decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the
TeleNav Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source
code, audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the
prior express written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav’s or its suppliers’ trademarks, trade
names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings;
(d) distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav Software in any manner that (i)
infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity
or privacy or other rights of any party, (ii) violates any law, statute,
ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations
related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity
or defamation, or (iii) is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of
the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or
anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav
Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or
other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always
reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible
for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For
example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav
Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Appendices

559

of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps
or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support
such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES
IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER
STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES
WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE
AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY
DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF
THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR
ANY REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR
GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE
LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

560

Appendices

6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating
to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent
arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American
Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California. The
arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American
Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the
arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there
is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without
giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To the extent judicial action
is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav and
you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the
County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations Convention on
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your
rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned
upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the
terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result
in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav,
in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of
the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may
assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice,
provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav
and you with respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement,
TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav Software,
including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No
licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers and
licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the
licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Appendices

561

8.3 By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures or
other information in connection with the TeleNav Software (collectively,
“Notices”) electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting them
on TeleNav’s Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device.
If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically, you
must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4 TeleNav’s or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not
affect that party’s right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver
of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining provisions
of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect.
8.6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only,
will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred to
in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement. As
used in this Agreement, the words “include” and “including,” and variations
thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words “without limitation.”
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The TeleNav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to
TeleNav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end
users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your
use of the TeleNav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to
comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which
are applicable to TeleNav’s third party vendor licensors:
NavTeq End User License Agreement
END USER TERMS
The content provided (“Data”) is licensed, not sold. By opening this
package, or installing, copying, or otherwise using the Data, you agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement. If you do not agree to the
terms of this agreement, you are not permitted to install, copy, use,
resell or transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the terms of this
agreement, and have not installed, copied, or used the Data, you must
contact your retailer or NAVTEQ North America, LLC (“NT”) within
thirty (30) days of purchase for a refund of your purchase price. To
contact NT, please visit www.navteq.com.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

562

Appendices

The Data is provided for your personal, internal use only and may not be
resold. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms
(this “End User License Agreement”) and conditions which are agreed to
by you, on the one hand, and NAVTEQ North America, LLC (“NT”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand.
The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission
from Canadian authorities, including: 娀 Her Majesty the Queen in Right
of Canada, 娀 Queen’s Printer for Ontario, 娀 Canada Post Corporation,
GeoBase ®.
NT holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service ®
to publish and sell ZIP+4 ® information.
娀 United States Postal Service ® 2009. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service ®. The
following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United
States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain Data from Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
License Limitations on Use: You agree that your license to use this Data
is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal, noncommercial
purposes, and not for service bureau, timesharing or other similar
purposes. Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for
any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws.
License Limitations on Transfer: Your limited license does not allow
transfer or resale of the Data, except on the condition that you may
transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis
if: (a) you retain no copies of the Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the
terms of this End User License Agreement; and (c) you transfer the Data
in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the
original media (e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD you purchased), all original
packaging, all Manuals and other documentation. Specifically, Multi-disc
sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you
and not as a subset thereof.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Appendices

563

Additional License Limitations: Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by NT in a separate written agreement, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph, your license is conditioned on
use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement, and you may not (a) use
this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in communication
with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs.
WARNING: This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic
Data, any of which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty: This Data is provided to you “as is”, and you agree to
use it at your own risk. NT and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any
kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness,
reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be
obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted
or error free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion
may not apply to you.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

564

Appendices

Disclaimer of Liability: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN
RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION
ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT,
WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS
DATA; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE
BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY,
EVEN IF NT OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and
Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations,
so to that extent the above may not apply to you.
Export Control: You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the
Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with
all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules
and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and
regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security
of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such export
laws, rules or regulations prohibit NT from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire
agreement between NT (and its licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements
previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
Severability: You and NT agree that if any portion of this agreement is
found illegal or unenforceable, that portion shall be severed and the
remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect.
Governing Law: The above terms and conditions shall be governed by
the laws of the State of Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree
to submit to the personal jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and
all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the
Data provided to you hereunder.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Appendices

565

Government End Users: If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying
rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States
government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at
48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with this End User
License Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise
furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use”, and be treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER)
NAME:
NAVTEQ
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
ADDRESS:
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606.
This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101
and is subject to the EndUser License Agreement under
which this Data was provided.
娀 2011 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal
official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify
NAVTEQ prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Wi-Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire 娀2013 JiWire.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music — related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 娀
2000–2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 娀 2000–2007
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued
or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the ⬙Powered by Gracenote™⬙ logo are
trademarks of Gracenote.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

566

Appendices

Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA)
This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 (“Gracenote”).
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers (“Gracenote Servers”), and to
perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of
the intended End User functions of this device
This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote’s providers.
If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote
Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be
entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote (“Gracenote
Content”), Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music
file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you
agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including
all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any information that you
provide, including any copyrighted material or music file information.
You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively
or separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each
company’s own name.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Appendices

567

Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to
allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com
for the Gracenote Privacy Policy
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA
AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU “AS IS.”
NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY
OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS
OR GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND
SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES’ RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN
THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY
CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR
THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS
NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR
ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS
ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED
BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY
LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
娀 Gracenote 2007

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

568

Appendices

Vehicle with SYNC only
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1 IC: 1422A-SG1G1
FCC ID: WDGSG1G1 IC: 5248B-SG1G1
Vehicle with SYNC and MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2 IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio
certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Index
911 Assist™ ......................441, 516
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................223
Accessing and using your
USB port ....................................494
Accessing call history/phone
book during active call .............429
Accessing your calendar ..........515
Accessing your media menu
features ......................................454
Accessing your phone menu
features ......................................431
Accessory delay ..........................92
Active call menu options .........429
Adding (pairing) a phone ........502
Advanced menu options ...439, 459
Advanced menu options
(prompts, languages, defaults,
master reset, installing
applications) ..............................439
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ..........................................48
and child safety seats ..............49
description ................................48
disposal ......................................60
driver airbag ..............................48
passenger airbag .......................48
passenger deactivation
switch ........................................51
side airbag ...........................48, 56
Air cleaner filter ...............323, 395
Air conditioning ........................146
manual heating and air
conditioning system ...............146
Air filter .............................323, 395

569

All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................209
Ambient mood/lighting .....522–523
Ambulance packages ..................16
AM/FM .......................................481
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................307
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................223
Anti-theft system ..................77, 79
arming the system ..............77, 79
disarming a triggered system ..79
AppLink™ .................................449
Audio system
Single CD ................136–137, 140
Audio system
(see Radio) ................136–137, 140
Automatic transmission ............201
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................199
fluid, adding ............................313
fluid, checking ........................313
fluid, refill capacities ..............391
fluid, specification ..................391
Selectshift (SST) ....................204
Auxiliary Input Jack .................490
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ..141
Auxiliary powerpoint ................178
A/V inputs ..........................143, 498
Axle
refill capacities ........................391
B
Battery .......................................318
acid, treating emergencies .....318
jumping a disabled battery ....279

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

570

Index

maintenance-free ....................318
replacement, specifications ...395
servicing ..................................318
Bed extender ............................251
Booster seats ...............................23
Brakelamp
bulb replacement ............329–330
Brakes ........................................223
anti-lock ...................................223
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................223
brake warning light ................223
fluid, checking and adding ....317
fluid, refill capacities ..............391
fluid, specifications .................391
parking ....................................224
shift interlock ..........................206
trailer ...............................258–259
Bulbs ..........................................331

Child safety seats booster seats ...............................23

C

Console ......................................181
overhead ..................................181

Capacities for refilling fluids ....391
Car2U® Home Automation
System .......................................168
CD ..............................136–137, 140
CD player ..........................134, 492
CD voice commands .................493
Cell phone use ............................17
Changing a tire .........................371
Changing the air filter ..............323
Child safety seats
attaching with tether straps ....31
automatic locking mode
(retractor) .................................40
in front seat ..............................28
in rear seat ................................28
LATCH .......................................31

Controls
power seat ...............................159

Cleaning the touchscreen ........469
Cleaning your vehicle ...............332
engine compartment ..............334
exterior ....................................332
instrument panel ............336–337
interior .....................................335
plastic parts ............................334
washing ....................................332
waxing .....................................334
wheels ......................................340
wiper blades ............................335
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ..........146
Climate voice commands .........536
Clock ..........................136–137, 520

Coolant ......................................307
checking and adding ..............307
recovery reservoir ..................304
refill capacities ........................391
Customer Assistance ................276
Ford Extended Service
lan ............................................400
Getting roadside assistance ...276
Getting the service
you need .................................282
Ordering additional
owner’s literature ...................288
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................286

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Index
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................87
Defrost ...............................146, 148
rear window ............................152
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................313
engine oil .........................304, 306
Display settings .........................521
Drivebelt ....................................389
Driving under special
conditions ..................207, 218, 220
sand .........................................218
snow and ice ...........................221
through water .................219, 270
Dual automatic temperature
control (DATC) .........................148
E
Electronic message center .......104
Electronic stability control ......228
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................279
running out of fuel .................192
Emergency Flashers .................278
Emission control system ..........195
End user license agreement ....549
Engine ................................304, 389
cleaning ...................................334
coolant .....................................307
fail-safe cooling .......................310
refill capacities ........................391
service points ..................304–305
Engine block heater .................186

571

Engine oil
checking and adding ..............306
dipstick ....................................306
filter, specifications ................395
refill capacities ........................391
Event data recording ..................12
Exhaust fumes ..........................185
F
Fail safe cooling ........................310
Filter
fuel ...........................................317
Fleet MyKey programming ........67
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) ....188
Floor mats .................................271
Fluid capacities .........................391
Fog lamps ....................................88
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......209
driving off road .......................216
electronic shift ................209, 213
indicator light .........................210
lever operated shift ................211
manual locking hubs ..............209
Fuel
cap ...........................................193
capacity ...................................391
choosing the right fuel ...190–191
filler funnel .............................192
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................................193
fuel pump shut-off ..................278
octane rating ...................191, 389
quality ......................................190
running out of fuel .................192
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................188

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

572

Index

Garage door opener ..........168, 172
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............193
Gauges .........................................97

Illuminated visor mirror .............95
Information displays .................104
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................198
Instrument panel
cleaning ...........................336–337
cluster ........................................99
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................87

H

J

Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
(FFV) .................................188, 191
Fuses ..........................290–291, 296
G

Hazard flashers .........................278
HD Radio™ ...............................482
Headlamps ...................................85
aiming ......................................325
autolamp system .......................86
bulb specifications ..................331
checking alignment ................325
daytime running lights .............87
flash to pass ..............................85
high beam .................................85
replacing bulbs .......................327
turning on and off ....................85
Head restraints .........................155
Heated steering wheel ..............534
Heating ..............................146, 148
Help ............................................533
Hill descent mode .....................230
Hill start assist ..........................208
Homelink wireless control
system ........................................172
Hood ..........................................303
How to use voice commands ...473
I
Ignition ...............................183, 389

Jack ............................................371
positioning ...............................371
storage .....................................371
Joining two calls
(multiparty/conference call) ....429
Jump-starting your vehicle ......279
K
Keyless entry system
autolock .....................................73
keypad .......................................75
locking and unlocking doors ....76
programming entry code .........75
Keys .......................................62, 77
positions of the ignition .........183
L
Lamps ..........................................85
autolamp system .......................86
bulb replacement
specifications chart ................331
daytime running light ...............87
fog lamps ...................................88
headlamps .................................85
headlamps, flash to pass ..........85
instrument panel, dimming .....87

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Index

573

interior lamps ...........................89
replacing bulbs .......327, 329–330
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................88
LATCH anchors ...........................31
Lights, warning and indicator ....99
Listening to music ....................478
Loading instructions .................247
Load limits .................................241
Locks
autolock .....................................73
childproof ..................................35
doors ..........................................72
Lug nuts ....................................387
Lumbar support, seats .............158

Moon roof ....................................96
Motorcraft® parts .............332, 395
MyFord Touch™ system ..........466
MyKey ..........................................67

M

Pairing other phones ........426, 502
Pairing your phone ...................501
Pairing your phone for
the first time .....................426, 501
Parental MyKey programming ...67
Parking brake ............................224
Parts
(see Motorcraft® parts) ..........395
Phone Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................437
Phone redial ..............................431
Phone settings ..................505, 528
Phone voice commands ............507
Playing music (by artist,
album, genre, playlist,
tracks, similar) ..........................455
POI categories ...........................539
Point of Interest (POI) .............539

Making and receiving calls .......502
Manual transmission
fluid capacities ........................391
MAP DVD - Loading and
Unloading ..................................502
Map icons ..................................545
Map mode ..................................543
Map preferences .......................542
Map updates ..............................546
Media Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................458
Message center .................104–105
warning messages ...................119
Mirrors ...................................92, 94
fold away .............................93–94
programmable memory ............63
side view mirrors (power) .......92

N
Navigation features ...................537
Navigation voice commands ....547
Notifications ..............................515
O
Octane rating ............................191
P

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

574

Index

Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................291
Power door locks ........................72
Power mirrors .............................92
Powerpoint ................................178
Power steering ..........................240
fluid, checking and adding ....317
fluid, refill capacity ................391
Power Windows ...........................90
Privacy information ..........422, 472
Putting a call on/off hold .........429
Q
Quick touch buttons .................546
R
Radio ..........................136–137, 140
AM/FM .....................................481
Single CD ................136–137, 140
Radio reception .........................134
Radio voice commands .............486
Rear heated seats .....................163
Rear view camera
display ................................234, 523
Rear window defroster .....146, 148
Receiving a text
message .............................433, 505
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints
for children ..................................25
Relays ................................290–291
Remote entry system
illuminated entry ......................74
locking/unlocking doors ...........72
replacing the batteries .............62

Reverse sensing system ...........233
Roadside assistance ..................276
Roll stability control .................228
Route preferences ....................542
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ............45
Safety belts
(see Safety restraints) .........38, 42
Safety defects, reporting ..........289
Safety information ............422, 470
Safety restraints ..............38, 40, 42
Belt-Minder® ............................43
extension assembly ..................42
for adults .............................38, 40
for children .........................20, 25
safety belt maintenance ...........45
seat belt maintenance ..............45
warning light and chime ..........43
Safety restraints LATCH anchors ...........................31
Safety seats for children ......20, 25
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................396
Satellite Radio ...........................487
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance and Log .............408
SD card ......................143, 494, 537
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............38
Seats
child safety seats ................20, 25
cleaning ...................................338
climate control ........................166
filter .........................................166

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

Index
heated ......................................163
memory seat .....................63, 160
SecuriCode keyless entry
system ..........................................75
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ..........................................77
Selecting your media source
(USB, Line in, BT audio) .........454
Sending new text messages .....504
Setting a destination ................537
Setting a destination
by voice .....................................537
Settings ......................................520
Setting the clock .......136–137, 520
Side air curtain ...........................57
Side-curtain airbags system .......57
SIRIUS® satellite radio ............487
SIRIUS satellite radio voice
commands .................................489
SIRIUS Travel Link ...................512
SIRIUS Travel Link voice
commands .................................514
Snowplowing ...............16, 272–274
SOS Post Crash Alert .................47
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................389, 395
Special notice ..............................17
ambulance conversions ............16
four-wheel drive vehicles .......275
Stability system .........................228
Starting a flex fuel vehicle .......185
Starting your vehicle ........183, 185
jump starting ..........................279
Steering wheel ............................80

575

controls ......................................80
tilting .........................................80
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) (see airbags) ....................48
Supported media file types ......497
Supported player, media
formats and metadata
information ................................497
SYNC® AppLink™ ...................449
SYNC® customer support ........421
SYNC® Services ................445, 508
System settings .........................524
T
Tailgate ......................................248
Tail lamps
bulb replacement ............329–330
Temperature control
(see Climate control) ..............146,
148, 534
Text messaging .................432, 504
Text messaging (sending,
downloading, deleting) .....433, 435
Tilt steering wheel ......................80
Tires ...........................345–346, 371
alignment ................................361
care ..........................................345
changing ..........................371, 376
checking the pressure ............355
inflating ...................................353
label .........................................352
replacing ..................................359
rotating ....................................362
safety practices .......................360
sidewall information ...............348
snow tires and chains ............363
spare tire .................................372

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)

576

Index

terminology .............................347
tire grades ...............................346
treadwear ........................346, 358
Touchscreen features
(climate) ....................................534
Towing .......................253, 266, 268
recreational towing .................268
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ..............259
trailer towing ..........................253
wrecker ....................................266
Traction control ........................225
Traffic, Directions and
Information ................................445
Traffic preferences ...................542
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ................259
Trailer sway control ..................254
Transfer case
fluid checking .........................316
Transmission .............................199
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....206
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................313
fluid, refill capacities ..............391
Turn signal ..................................88
U
Universal garage door opener ..168
Upfitter controls .......................300
USB port ....................142–143, 494

Using privacy mode ..................429
V
Vehicle health report ........443, 518
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................395
Vehicle loading ..........................241
Ventilating your vehicle ...........186
Voice commands in media
mode ..........................................451
Voice commands in phone
mode ..........................................427
Voice recognition ......................472
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......99
Washer fluid ..............................318
reservoir ..................................304
Water, Driving through .............270
Wi-Fi ..........................................531
Windows
power .........................................90
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................84
checking and adding fluid .....318
replacing wiper blades ...........322
reservoir ..................................304
Wrecker towing .........................266

2013 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, December 2012
USA (fus)



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Version                         : 3rd Print
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.0.0 (Windows)
Pub Date                        : 2012-12
Model Year                      : 2013
Language                        : English
Pubtype                         : Owner Guide
Supercedes                      : false
Market                          : USA
Model Name List                 : f23
Keywords                        : 
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Modify Date                     : 2013:03:05 16:33:13-05:00
Create Date                     : 2013:02:21 13:51:02Z
Metadata Date                   : 2013:03:05 16:33:13-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Ford
Description                     : 
Creator                         : 
Document ID                     : uuid:b55b8cd7-b8f2-4e89-9056-7cbafc869451
Instance ID                     : uuid:4f8384f3-e581-477f-8d76-ddf2d33bf19b
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 577
Author                          : 
Subject                         : 

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools